8921a Manual

HP 8921A Cell Site Test Set
User’s Guide
Firmware Version A.15.00 and above
SCREEN CONTROL INSTRUMENT STATE

MSSG HELP CONFI HOLD PRINT ADRS SAVE
MEAS
RX TX DUPLE PREV TESTS LOCAL RECAL PRESE
USER DATA FUNCTIONS DATA
k1’ REF METER AVG

INCR INCR INCR
k1
k2’ LO HI
7 8 9 ENTER
dB
k2
GHz
k3’
CURSOR CON-
4 5 6
k3 %
MHz
ASSIG
k4
1 2 3
s
RELEA
PUSH TO 0 +_ kHz
k5
YES NO Ω ms
ON/OFF
ppm % Hz
SHIFT CANCE
M EMO
MIC/ VOL- SQUELC AUDIO AUDIO IN

RF IN/OUT DUPLEX OUT ANT IN HI LO
POWE
OF O
MAX POWER MAX MAX

! ! M AX POWER 200 ! !
HP Part No. 08921-90022

Printed in U. S. A.
December 1997
Rev. F
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Copyright © Hewlett-Packard Company 1995
Notice Information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
This material may be reproduced by or for the U.S. Government pursuant to the
Copyright License under the clause at DFARS 52.227-7013 (APR 1988).
Hewlett-Packard Company
Learning Products Department
24001 E. Mission
Liberty Lake, WA 99019-9599
U.S.A.

Manufacturer’s Declaration
This statement is provided to comply with the requirements of the German Sound
Emission Directive, from 18 January 1991.
This product has a sound pressure emission (at the operator position) < 70 dB(A).
• Sound Pressure Lp < 70 dB(A).
• At Operator Position.
• Normal Operation.
• According to ISO 7779:1988/EN 27779:1991 (Type Test).
Herstellerbescheinigung
Diese Information steht im Zusammenhang mit den Anforderungen der
Maschinenlärminformationsverordnung vom 18 Januar 1991.
• Schalldruckpegel Lp < 70 dB(A).
• Am Arbeitsplatz.
• Normaler Betrieb.
• Nach ISO 7779:1988/EN 27779:1991 (Typprüfung).

Safety GENERAL
Considerations
This product and related documentation must be reviewed for familiarization with
safety markings and instructions before operation.
This product has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication
1010, "Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus," and has been
supplied in a safe condition. This instruction documentation contains information
and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to
maintain the product in a safe condition.
SAFETY EARTH GROUND
A uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the main power
source to the product input wiring terminals, power cord, or supplied power cord
set.
CHASSIS GROUND TERMINAL
To prevent a potential shock hazard, always connect the rear-panel chassis ground
terminal to earth ground when operating this instrument from a dc power source.
SAFETY SYMBOLS
! Indicates instrument damage can occur if indicated operating limits are exceeded.
Refer to the instructions in this guide.
Indicates hazardous voltages.
Indicates earth (ground) terminal
WARNING
A WARNING note denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure,

practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could
result in personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING sign until the
indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
CAUTION
A CAUTION note denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operation procedure,
practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result
in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product. Do not proceed beyond
an CAUTION note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.

Safety Considerations for this Instrument
WARNING This product is a Safety Class I instrument (provided with a protective
earthing ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only
be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact. Any
interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside of the product is
likely to make the product dangerous. Intentional interruption is
prohibited..
Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired, the instrument
must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation.
If this instrument is to be energized via an autotransformer (for voltage
reduction), make sure the common terminal is connected to the earth
terminal of the power source.
If this product is not used as specified, the protection provided by the
equipment could be impaired. This product must be used in a normal
condition (in which all means for protection are intact) only.
No operator serviceable parts in this product. Refer servicing to qualified
personnel. To prevent electrical shock, do not remove covers.
Servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To avoid
electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do
so.
The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous
voltages. Disconnect the product from all voltage sources while it is being
opened.
Adjustments described in the manual are performed with power supplied to
the instrument while protective covers are removed. Energy available at
many points may, if contacted, result in personal injury.
The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that my remain live for
5 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply.
For Continued protection against fire hazard, replace the line fuse(s) only
with 250 V fuse(s) or the same current rating and type (for example, normal
blow or time delay). Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited
fuseholders.

CAUTION: Always use the three-prong ac power cord supplied with this product. Failure to ensure
adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause product damage.
This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and Pollution Degree
2 per IEC 1010 and IEC 664 respectively. For indoor use only.
This product has autoranging line voltage input, be sure the supply voltage is
within the specified range.
Ventilation Requirements: When installing the product in a cabinet, the
convection into and out of the product must not be restricted. The ambient
temperature (outside the cabinet) must be less than the maximum operating
temperature of the product by 4° C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet.
If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts, then forced
convection must be used.
Product Markings CE - the CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community. A CE

mark accompanied by a year indicated the year the design was proven.
CSA - the CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Associ-
ation.

CERTIFICATION Hewlett-Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifica-
tions at the time of shipment from the factory. Hewlett-Packard further certifies
that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National In-
stitute of Standards and Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institute’s cali-
bration facility, and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards
Organization members
WARRANTY This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material

and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. During the war-
ranty period, Hewlett-Packard Company will at its option, either repair or replace
products which prove to be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility
designated by HP. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay
shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to HP from another coun-
try.
HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with an in-
strument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that
instrument. HP does not warrant that the operation of the instrument, or software,
or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free.
LIMITATION OF The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inad-
WARRANTY equate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unautho-
rized modification or misuse, operation outside of the environmental specifications
for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance.
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HP SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
EXCLUSIVE THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND EXCLU-
REMEDIES SIVE REMEDIES. HP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDI-
RECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
WHETHER BASE ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEO-
RY.
ASSISTANCE Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are
available for Hewlett-Packard products. For any assistance, contact your nearest
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name: Hewlett-Packard Co.
Manufacturer’s Address: Spokane Division
24001 E. Mission Avenue
Liberty Lake, Washington 99019-9599
USA
declares that the product
Product Name: RF Communications Test Set / Cell Site Test Set
Model Number: HP 8920A, HP 8920B, and HP 8921A

Product Options: This declaration covers all options of the above
product.
conforms to the following Product specifications:
Safety: IEC 348:1978 / HD 401S1:19811)
EMC: CISPR 11:1990 / EN 55011:1991 Group 1, Class A

EN 50082-1 : 1992
IEC 801-2:1991 - 4 kV CD, 8 kV AD
IEC 801-3:1984 - 3V/m
IEC 801-4:1988 - 0.5 kV Sig. Lines, 1 kV Power Lines
Supplementary Information:
This product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC and the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and carries the CD-marking accordingly.
1) The product was introduced prior to 12/1993

Spokane, Washington USA Date October 17, 1996 Vince Roland/Quality Manager
European Contact: Your local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Department ZQ/Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, D-71034 Böblinger, Germany (FAX+49-7031-14-3143)

HP 8924C Support The documentation supplied with your test set is an excellent source of reference,
Contacts applications, and service information. Please use these manuals if you are experi-
encing technical problems:
• Applications information is included in the HP 8924C CDMA Mobile Station Test Set
Application Guide (HP P/N 08924-90021)
• Calibration and repair information are in the HP 8924C CDMA Mobile Station Test Set
Assembly Level Repair Manual - this manual (HP P/N 08924-90001).
If you have used the manuals and still have application questions, contact your lo-
cal HP Sales Representative.
Repair assistance is available for the HP 8924C CDMA Mobile Test Set from the factory
by phone and e-mail. Internal Hewlett-Packard users can contact the factory through
HPDesk or cc:Mail© (Lotus Corporation). Parts information is also available from
Hewlett-Packard.
When calling or writing for repair assistance, please have the following information
ready:
• Instrument model number (HP 8924C)

• Instrument Serial Number (tag located on the rear panel).
• Installed options - if any (tag located on the rear panel).
• Instrument firmware revision (displayed at the top of the screen when the Test Set is
powered up, and is also displayed on the CONFIGURE screen).
Support Telephone Numbers:
1 800 827 3848 (Spokane Division Service Assistance, U.S. only)
1 509 921 3848 (Spokane Division Service Assistance, International)
1 800 227 8164 (HP Direct Parts Ordering, U.S. only)
1 916 783 0804 (HP Service Parts Identification, U.S. & Intl.)
Electronic mail (Internet): Spokane_Service@spk.hp.com
HP Desk: Spokane Service / HP1000/21
cc:Mail: SERVICE, SPOKANE /HP-Spokane,desk1

Table 1 Regional Sales and Service Offices
United States of America United States of America United Kingdom

U.S. Instrument Support Center Customer Information Center Sales and Service
For Test & Measurement Equipment For Assistance On All HP Prod- Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Repair & Calibration. ucts. Cain Road
Hewlett-Packard Company Hewlett-Packard Company Amen Corner
Englewood, Colorado 80112 Tel: (800) 752-0900 Bracknell, Berkshire
RG12 1HN
Telephone: (800) 403-0801 6:00 am to 5:00 pm Pacific Time United Kingdom
Fax: (888) 857-8161 Parts Direct: 1-800-227-8164
Telephone: 44 344 360000
Fax: 44 344 363344
South Eastern Europe European Multicountry Region Northern Europe

Sales and Service Sales and Service Sales and Service
Hewlett-Packard Ges. m.b.h. Hewlett-Packard S.A. Hewlett-Packard Nederland B.V.
Liebigasse 1 P.O. Box 95 Startbaan 16
P.O. Box 72 150, Route dv Nant_dl_AVRIL 1187 XR
A-1222 Vienna, Austria CH-1217 Meyrin 2 Amstelveen, The Netherlands
Geneva, Switzerland P.O. Box 667
Telephone: 43 222 2500 0
Telex: 13 4425 Telephone: (41/22) 780-8111 Telephone: 31/20 5476911 X 6631
Fax: (41/22) 780-8542 Fax: 31-20-6471825NL
Asia Japan International Sales Branch Head-

Sales and Service Sales and Service quarters
Hewlett-Packard Asia Ltd. Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd. Sales and Service
22-30/F Peregrine Tower 3-29-21, Takaido-Higashi Hewlett-Packard S.A.
Lippo Center Suginami-Ku, Tokyo 168 39 Rue Veyrot
89 Queensway, Central P.O. Box 365
Telephone: 81 3 3331-6111
Hong Kong 1217 Meyrin 1
Fax: 81 3 3331-6631
G.P.O. Box 863 Hong Kong Geneva, Switzerland
Telephone: 852-848-7777 Telephone: 41-22-780-4111
Fax: 852-868-4997 Fax: 41-22-780-4770
Australia, New Zealand Canada Canada

Sales and Service Sales and Service Service Center
Hewlett-Packard Ltd. Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd. Hewlett-Packard Company
P.O. Box 221 5150 Spectrum Way 17500 Transcanada Highway
31-41 Joseph Street Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5G1 S. Serv Road
Blackburn, Victoria 3130 Canada Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2X8
Canada
Telephone: (61/3) 895-2895 Telephone: (416) 206-4725
Fax: (61/3) 898-9257 Fax: (416) 206-4739 Telephone: (416) 206-3295
10

Table 1 Regional Sales and Service Offices (Continued)
Canada Latin America United Kingdom

Service Center Hewlett-Packard Company Sales and Service
Hewlett-Packard Ltd. LAHQ Mexico City Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
11120 178 Street Col. Lomas de Virreyes Cain Road
Edmonton, Alberta T5S 1P2 11000 Mexico D.F. Amen Corner
Canada Mexico Bracknell, Berkshire
RG12 1HN
Telephone: (403) 486-6666 Telephone: (52/5) 326-4000
United Kingdom
Fax: (403) 489-8764 Fax: (52/5) 202 7718
Telephone: 44 344 360000
Fax: 44 344 363344
11

In this Book The HP 8921A is referred to in this document as "Test Set."
Chapter 1, Get Started

This chapter describes the basic operation of the Test Set. It also provides a quick
check that verifies that the Test Set is operating properly.
Chapter 2, Configuring Your Test Set

This chapter describes various instrument configuration settings that affect the general
operation of the instrument.
Chapter 3, Operating Overview

This chapter contains detailed operating instructions and examples for using several
instrument features.
Chapters 4 through 23, Screen and Field Descriptions

These chapters contains reference information for each screen and its fields. Many of
the descriptions contain signal flow diagrams that relate the screen’s fields to the func-
tions they perform. The screens are arranged in alphabetical order by title at the top of
the screen; Signaling Encoder and Signaling Decoder are alphabetized by the names
Encoder and Decoder.
Chapter 24, Connector, Key, and Knob Descriptions

This chapter describes the purpose and use of each connector and control.
Chapter 25, Modifications, Accessories, Manuals, Support

This chapter describes retrofit kits, accessories, manuals, and customer support avail-
able for your Test Set.
Error Messages
This section discusses error and operating messages.
12

Contents
1 Get Started
Before Connecting a Radio 40
Accessing the Test Set’s Screens 41
Changing A Field’s Setting 43
How do I Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly? 46
Instrument Functional Diagram 47
13

Contents
2 Configuring Your Test Set
General Operating Information 50
14

Contents
3 Operating Overview
Interaction Between Screens 54
Displaying Measurements 57
Entering and Changing Numbers 63
Printing A Screen 66
Using Measurement Limit Indicators 67
Averaging Measurements 69
Setting A Measurement Reference 70
Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups 71
Using USER Keys 75
Setting an RF Generator/Analyzer Offset 79
Using Remote Control 80
15

Contents
4 Adjacent Channel Power Screen
How the Test Set Measures Adjacent Channel Power (ACP) 86
Field Descriptions 87
16

Contents
5 AF Analyzer Screen
Block Diagram 96
17

Contents
6 Call Processing Subsystem
Description of the Call Processing Subsystem 110
Using the Call Processing Subsystem 114
The CALL CONTROL Screen 118
Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing

Functions 129
CALL DATA Screen 139
CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions 144
Using the CALL DATA Screen 153
CALL BIT Screen 161
CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions 167
Using the CALL BIT Screen 187
ANALOG MEAS Screen 192
Using the ANALOG MEAS Screen 195
CALL CONFIGURE Screen 198
18

Contents
7 Configure Screen
19

Contents
8 Signaling Decoder Screen
Field Descriptions for Decoder Modes 216
AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS Decoder 217
Using the AMPS/TACS, NAMPS/NTACS Decoder 222
Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System Decoder 226
Using the CDCSS Decoder 230
Digital Paging Decoder 231
Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Decoder 235
Using the DTMF Decoder 240
EDACS Decoder 241
Using the EDACS Decoder 244
Function Generator Decoder 247
Using the Function Generator Decoder 250
LTR Decoder 251
Using the LTR Decoder 255
MPT 1327 Decoder 257
NMT Decoder 262
Using the NMT Decoder/Encoder 267
Creating NMT Tests 272
Tone Sequence Decoder 281
20

Contents
9 Duplex Test Screen
Block Diagram 286
21

Contents
10 Signaling Encoder (AF Generator 2)
Field Descriptions for Encoder Modes 300
AMPS-TACS NAMPS-NTACS Encoder 301
Using the AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS Encoder 313
CDCSS Encoder 314
Using the CDCSS Encoder 318
Digital Paging Encoder 319
DTMF Sequence Encoder 324
EDACS Encoder 328
Using the EDACS Encoder 334
Function Generator Encoder 339
LTR Encoder 342
Using the LTR Encoder 346
MPT 1327 Encoder 350
Using the MPT 1327 Encoder 363
Nordic Mobile Telephone (NMT) Encoder 366
Tone Sequence Encoder 378
22

Contents
11 Help Screen
23

Contents
12 I/O Configure Screen
24

Contents
13 Message Screen
25

Contents
14 Oscilloscope Screen
Using the Oscilloscope 398
26

Contents
15 Print Configure Screen
27

Contents
16 Radio Interface Screen
Radio Interface Functional Description 404
Using the Radio Interface (Manual Operation) 409
Using The Radio Interface (Remote Operation) 415
28

Contents
17 RF Analyzer Screen
Block Diagram 418
29

Contents
18 RF Generator Screen
Block Diagram 430
30

Contents
19 RX Test Screen
Block Diagram 440
31

Contents
20 Service Screen
32

Contents
21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen
Using the Spectrum Analyzer 464
33

Contents
22 Tests Screen
Description of the Tests Subsystem 466
TESTS (Main Menu) 468
TESTS (Channel Information) 471
TESTS (Test Parameters) 473
TESTS (Order of Tests) 474
TESTS (Pass/Fail Limits) 476
TESTS (Save/Delete Procedure) 478
TESTS (Execution Conditions) 481
TESTS (External Devices) 484
TESTS (Printer Setup) 487
TESTS (IBASIC Controller) 490
ROM Programs 492
34

Contents
23 TX Test Screen
Block Diagram 496
35

Contents
24 Connector, Key, and Knob Descriptions
Connector Descriptions 508
Key Descriptions 526
Knob Descriptions 530
36

Contents
25 Modifications, Accessories, Manuals, Support
Modifications 532
Accessories 535
HP Support for Your Instrument 546
37

Contents
38

1
Get Started
39

Before Connecting a Radio
Before Connecting a Radio

The RF IN/OUT port should be used for all transmitter tests when the radio is connected
directly to the Test Set. (All UUT transmitter power measurements are made through this
port). Off-the-air measurements can be made using the ANT IN port.
CAUTION: Overpower Damage — Refer to the Test Set’s front panel for maximum input power level.
Exceeding this level can cause permanent instrument damage.
Antenna Mic Key Mic Audio In Speaker or Audio Out
Radio Under Test
Figure 1 Connecting a Radio to the Test Set
40

Accessing the Test Set’s Screens
List of Screens
The following table lists all the screens that could be provided by the Test Set.
Table 2
Instrument Configuration
Analog Measurement Screens
Screens
Adjacent Channel Power Configure
AF Analyzer I/O Configure
Decoder Print Configure
Duplex User Assistance Screens
Encoder Help
Oscilloscope Message
Radio Interface Service Assistance Screen
RF Analyzer Service
RF Generator Call Processing Screens
RX Test Call Control
Spectrum Analyzer Call Data
TX Test Call Bit
Software Control Screens Call Configure
Tests Analog Measure
Tests (IBASIC Controller)
41

Accessing Screens
Test Set’s screens can be accessed through
• Front-panel keys
• The front-panel Cursor Control knob (using the To Screen menu, see item 5 in fig-
ure 3 on page 43)
• HP-IB, using the DISPlay subsystem.
Knob Access to Front-Panel Key

Screens Access to Screens
Knob
Access to
Additional
Screens
Figure 2 Accessing the Screens
42

Changing A Field’s Setting

There are several types of CRT display fields in the Test Set. This section
describes some of the different types of fields.
3 1
rxscrn.wmf
intro4.wmf
2 4 5
Figure 3 Different Types of Fields
43

Unit-of-Measure Field
Unit-of-measure can be changed to display measurements in different values or
magnitudes. See item 1 in figure 3 to see an example of a units-of-measure field.
To change a unit-of-measure
1. Position the cursor at the unit field on the display.
2. Press a key labeled with a different unit-of-measure (such as W).
If the new units are valid, the measurement value is displayed in the unit.
Underlined Immediate-Action Field

Underlined immediate action fields provide a choice of two settings. See item 2 in
figure 3 to see an example of an underlined immediate-action field.
To change an underlined entry

1. Position the cursor at the field.
2. Push the CURSOR CONTROL knob or the ENTER key to move the underline under
the desired choice.
The underlined setting is immediately activated when selected.
44

One-of-Many Field
One-of-many fields display a list of choices when selected. See item 3 in figure 3
to see an example of a one-of many field.
To make a one-of-many choice

2. Push the Cursor Control knob or the ENTER key to display the choices.
3. Move the cursor through the choices by turning the knob.
4. Push the Cursor Control knob or the ENTER key to make the choice.
The choice is immediately activated when selected.
The To Screen menu (see item 5 in figure 3 ) is a variation of the one-of-many
field.
Numeric-Entry Field
Numeric-entry fields contain values for settings like External Load Resistance and
RF Generator Frequency.See item 4 in figure 3 to see an example of a numeric-
entry field.
To change a value
2. Key in the desired number using the DATA keys.
3. Press ENTER to select the choice.
OR
2. Push the Cursor Control knob to highlight the desired choice.
3. Turn the knob to increment or decrement the value.
4. Push the Cursor Control knob or the ENTER key to select the choice.
45

How do I Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly?
How do I Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly?

If your Test Set powers-up and displays the RX TEST screen, but you suspect an
instrument problem, use the Instrument Quick Check to verify operation of the
basic instrument functions.
If no failure is indicated by this test, but you still suspect a problem, refer to the
“Performance Tests” information in the Assembly Level Repair Manual.
Instrument Quick Check

1. Set up the quick check:
a. Connect a cable between the DUPLEX OUT and ANT IN ports.
b. Turn instrument power on (if it is not already on).
c. Press PRESET.
d. Press DUPLEX to access the DUPLEX TEST screen.
e. Set the Tune Mode field to Manual.
f. Set the Tune Freq field to 825 MHz.
g. Set the Input Port field to Ant.
h. Set the RF Gen Freq field to 825 MHz.
i. Set the Amplitude field to -10 dBm.
j. Set the Output Port field to Dupl.
k. Verify that AFGen1 Freq is set to 1.0000 kHz, and that AFGen1 To is set to
FM and 3.00 kHz.
l. Set the AF Anl In field to FM Demod.
m. Set the Filter 1 field to 300Hz HPF.
n. Set the Filter 2 field to 3kHz LPF.
o. Verify that De-Emphasis is Off.
p. Set the Detector field to Pk+-/2.
q. Turn the VOLUME knob clockwise until you hear a tone (1 kHz default for
AFGen1 Freq).
2. Check the following readings:
❒ SINAD should be >35 dB.
❒ FM Deviation should be about 3.0 kHz.
3 Access the OSCILLOSCOPE screen using the To Screen menu. With the default
Vert/div setting of 2 kHz and a default Time/div setting of 200 µs, you should
see two complete sinewaves across the screen.
4 Access the SPECTRUM ANALYZER using the To Screen menu. You should see
an 850 MHz FM carrier.
46

Instrument Functional Diagram
Figure 4 Instrument Functional Diagram (1 of 2)
47

intr-bd2.wmf
Figure 5 Instrument Functional Diagram (2 of 2)
48

2
Configuring Your Test Set
The CONFIGURE and I/O CONFIGURE screens contain a number of settings used to
alter instrument operation and hardware communication settings. The HP-IB address,
screen intensity, serial communication parameters, and several other settings, are changed
in these screens.
Most CONFIGURE and I/O CONFIGURE screen entries are saved when the instrument
is turned off.
49

General Operating Information

The following configuration information discusses general operating information
for some of the fields in these screens.
To Set Screen Intensity

1. Access the CONFIGURE screen.
2. Select the Intensity field.
3. Rotate the knob to change the setting (1=dim, 8=bright).
To Set RF Voltage Interpretation (50 Ω /emf)

2. Position the cursor in front of the RFGen Volts field.
3. Press the Cursor Control knob or press ENTER to select 50 ohm or emf.
Voltage settings can control either:

• the voltage across a 50-ohm load, or
• the open circuit voltage (emf).
This setting affects the RF Generator’s and the Tracking Generator’s amplitudes.
To Set the Date and Time

2. Select the Date field and use the DATA keys to enter the date in the format shown be-
low the field.
3. Select the Time field and use the DATA keys to enter the time in the format shown
below the field.
The Test Set has a built-in clock that keeps track of the date and time. It is
powered by an internal battery to keep it operating when the instrument is off.
50

To Change the Beeper Volume

2. Select the Beeper field to display the volume choices.
3. Select the desired choice.
The beeper alerts you to important operating and measurement conditions. It

beeps any time a message is displayed at the top of the screen. These messages
warn you of conditions such as exceeding the RF input level or trying to set a field
to an unacceptable value. Therefore, it is recommended that you do not disable the
beeper.
To Verify or Change the

Low-Battery Setting
2. The current time setting is shown under the Low Battery field.
3. Select that field to display a list of setting choices.
• Select the desired time, or
• Select Disable to eliminate the low-battery warning.
The low-battery warning system is used to alert you when you have not used any
front-panel controls within a specified amount of time. This setting is only used
with DC power. It does not actually monitor the DC supply voltage. Since
batteries are most often used for a DC supply, this function helps you conserve
power by reminding you that the Test Set is still turned on.
When the specified time has elapsed between front-panel entries, the Beeper
sounds and a message appears at the top of the screen alerting you to the
condition.
This setting is saved when the instrument is turned off.
51

52

3
Operating Overview
The information in this section discusses some frequently used operating features
of the Test Set.
From reading chapter 1, "Get Started" you should understand:
• What “fields” and “screens” are.
• How to use the Cursor Control knob to select different fields and screens.
53

Interaction Between Screens

Most fields operate globally; changing the setting in any screen automatically
changes that setting in all screens where it is available. AFGen1 Freq is an
example of this field type.
Figure 6 Example of How Global Fields Work
Priority fields give the RX TEST and TX TEST screens priority control of their
settings. No matter what these fields were set to in other screens, if the RX TEST
or TX TEST screen is accessed, the field changes to whatever it was last set to in
these screens. The RF Generator’s Amplitude field is an example of this field
type. These fields and their preset values are listed in table 3.
54

Table 3 Priority RX TEST and TX TEST Fields
Priority Field RX TEST TX TEST
RF Gen Amplitude Presets to −80 dBm (changeable) Always Off
AFGen1 To Presets to FM (changeable) Always Audio Out
AF Anl In Always Audio In Presets to FM Demod (changeable)
Detector Always RMS Presets to Pk +− Max (changeable)
De-emphasis Always Off Presets to 750 µs (changeable)
AF Anl Measurement Presets to SINAD (changeable) Presets to Audio Freq (changeable)
55

Using your Test Set, duplicate the steps in figure 7 to demonstrate how the
Priority fields operate.
fig2-2.wmf
Figure 7 Example of How Priority Fields Work
56

Displaying Measurements
scntxrx.wmf
Figure 8 Where To Access Measurements
57

Displaying RF Measurements
Transmitter Frequency
TX Frequency is displayed when Tune Mode is set to Auto. (Refer to item (1)
in figure 8 on page 57.)
Transmitter Frequency Error

TX Freq Error is displayed when Tune Mode is set to Manual. (Refer to item
(1) in figure 8 on page 57.)
Transmitter Power
TX Power is only measured and displayed here when the Input Port is set to
RF In (Refer to item (2) in figure 8 on page 57 ). If Ant (antenna) is selected, the
measurement is replaced by four dashes (- - - -).
You can measure low power levels on the ANT IN port using the Spectrum
Analyzer.
Refer to the TX Power field description, on page 505 and the TX Pwr Zero field
description, on page 506 for more information on measuring transmitter power.
CAUTION: Connecting a signal of >200 mW to the ANT IN (antenna) port can cause instrument damage
(although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short-duration signal of 1 or 2
Watts). If the overpower circuit is triggered, remove the signal from the ANT IN port and turn
the Test Set off and on to reset it.
58

Displaying AF Measurements
FM Deviation, AM Depth, AC Level
The AF Anl In setting determines the AF Analyzer’s input and the measurement
displayed in the top-right corner of the measurement area (see table 4). These
measurements are available in the TX TEST, DUPLEX TEST, RF
GENERATOR, RF ANALYZER, and AF ANALYZER screens. (Refer to item
(3) in figure 8 on page 57.)
Table 4 AF Measurements Selected by AF Analyzer Input Setting
Measurement AF Anl In Setting
FM Deviation FM Demod, FM Mod
AM Depth AM Demod, AM Mod
AM Deptha SSB Demod, AudioIn, Radio Int,

Ext Mod, Mic Mod, Audio Out
a. AC Level is also measured in the RX TEST screen, but

always uses the AUDIO IN connector as the input. (Refer
to item (5) in figure 8 on page 57.)
59

SINAD, Distortion, SNR, AF Frequency, DC Level, DC Current

Selecting the currently-displayed measurement causes the To Screen menu to be
replaced by a list of measurement choices. Select the new choice to replace the old
measurement. These measurements are available in the RX TEST, TX TEST,
DUPLEX TEST, RF GENERATOR, RF ANALYZER, and AF ANALYZER
screens. (Refer to item (4) in figure 8 on page 57)
The Distortion measurement is only for a 1 kHz tone.
The SINAD measurement is normally shown using an analog-type meter and
small digits, but can be changed to display in large digits only. (See "To Use the
Analog METER Format" on page 62.)
DC Current can only be measured using the rear-panel DC CURRENT

MEASUREMENT connections.
Selecting SNR (Signal/Noise Ratio) turns off the other audio measurement. For
more information on making this measurement, see the RF Gen Freq field
description, on page 445.
AF Power
AF Power is measured in the RX TEST screen by specifying the external load
resistance, Ext Load R, and changing the unit of measure for the AC Level
measurement to W (Watts), mW, or dBm. (The milliwatt (mW) unit is selected by
pressing SHIFT, ENTER) Refer to item (5) figure 8 on page 57.
60

To Change the Measurement’s Unit-of-Measure

1. Position the cursor in front of the present unit-of-measurement.
2. Press the key labeled with the desired unit.
All measurements allow you to change the associated unit-of- measure. For
instance; the TX Power measurement is usually displayed in Watts, but can be
changed to display in mW, dBm, V, mV, or dBµV.
Select mW by pressing SHIFT, ENTER.
For example; to display transmitter power in units of dBm instead of Watts:
1. Move the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the TX Power measurement (W).
2. Press the dBm key. The measurement value is changed immediately to display in dBm.
61

To Use the Analog METER Format

To display measurement results using the analog meter format, use the following
procedure.
1. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the measurement you want to dis-
play.
2. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the INCR SET key to display the Meters menu
in the lower-right corner of the screen.
3. Select On/Off to display the meter.
4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter each meter end point and the meter intervals.
5. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 to cancel the METER function.
The METER function displays an equivalent analog display. (This is the SINAD
measurement’s default state when the instrument is turned on or preset). As the
measurement is displayed graphically on the meter, the value is also displayed in
small digits below the meter.
You can specify the high and low end points and display interval, or you can use
the default meter settings.
This function is only available for measurements displayed using the large digits,
such as the measurements displayed in the RX TEST and TX TEST screens.
To Make Beat Frequency Measurements

1. Select the DUPLEX TEST screen to set up for beat frequency oscillator measurements.
2. Set the AF Anl In field to SSB Demod.
3. Manually adjust the Tune Freq field to the desired carrier frequency.
62

Entering and Changing Numbers

Values for numeric entry fields can be entered and changed using various
methods, depending on your testing needs. The unit-of-measure for some of these
fields can also be changed (such as changing the RF Generator’s Amplitude
units from dBm to µV).
To Enter Numbers
1. Position the cursor in front of the numeric entry field to be changed.
2. Use one of the following methods:
a. enter the number and unit-of-measure directly using the keypad,
or
b. press the Cursor Control knob or ENTER to highlight the field, and use the
knob,
or
c. use the down-arrow or the up-arrow keys to increment or decrement the present
value.
Decimal Values
Decimal values are used for most numeric entry fields, such as the RF Gen Freq
setting. The acceptable entries for decimal values are 0 through 9, ., +/-, and EEX.
The +/- key is used for entering negative numbers. For example; when entering
the RF Generator Amplitude you can enter this sequence to set the value to
−47 dBm: +/- 4 7 dBm.
The EEX key can be used when entering exponential notation. For example; to
enter 1.25 × 103 kHz you could use the sequence: 1 . 2 5 EEX 3 kHz.
63

Hexadecimal Values
Hexadecimal (Hex) values are used for entering some signaling parameters in the
ENCODER, such as AMPS Filler data field, and for specifying remote
communications parameters, such as the RADIO INTERFACE Output Data
field. The acceptable entries for decimal values are 0 through 9 and A through F.
No unit-of-measure is associated with these values.
Hexadecimal values are either entered from the keypad (A through F are shifted
functions), or by using the Choices menu displayed when certain fields are
selected (such as the AMPS Filler field).
To Enter and Change the Unit-of-Measure

Entering the Unit-of-Measure for Settings
When a number is entered, the unit-of-measure is either specified or implied.
When the unit is implied, the current unit is used. For example; if the present RF
frequency is 250 MHz, and you want to change it to 225 MHz, you would enter
this sequence: 2 2 5 ENTER.
When the unit is specified, the units change to whatever you specify. For example;
if the present RF Gen Freq setting is 250 MHz, and you want to change it to 455
kHz, you would enter this sequence: 4 5 5 kHz.
Changing the Unit-of-Measure for Settings

To change the present unit-of-measure, position the cursor in front of the field and
press the key labeled with the desired unit. For example, position the cursor in
front of the RF Gen Freq field and push GHz or kHz to display the setting in
either of these units.
64

To Change the Increment or Decrement Setting

Using the Pre-Defined Increment/Decrement Keys
The INCR ×10] and INCR ÷10] keys change the increment/decrement value by a
factor of 10.
For example; if the Tune Freq presently changes by 10 MHz for every click of
the knob or push of the down-arrow or up-arrow keys, pushing INCR ×10] once
changes the increment value to 100 MHz.
Specifying An Increment Value

The INCR SET key is used to assign a specific increment value. The increment
value may use different units than the field you are incrementing/decrementing.
For instance; if the RF Generator Amplitude setting is displayed in dBµV, you
could increment in units of dB or mV.
To change the increment value;
1. Move the cursor to the numeric entry field to be changed.
2. Press INCR SET, and enter the desired value and unit-of-measure using the DATA
keys.
3. Use the down-arrow and up-arrow keys or CURSOR CONTROL knob to change the
field’s value by the increment value you set.
Example of Setting an Increment Value

This example changes the Tune Freq in increments of 15 MHz.
1. Access the TX TEST screen and position the cursor in front of the Tune Freq field.
2. Press 1 0 0 MHz to set the frequency at 100 MHz.
3. Press INCR SET 1 5 MHz.
4. Turn the Cursor Control knob. The field’s value changes by 15 MHz for each knob
click.
65

Printing A Screen
Printing A Screen
To Print A Screen’s Contents

1. Connect a printer to the appropriate rear-panel connector.
2. Access the PRINT CONFIGURE screen from the More menu and set the Printer
Port field to the appropriate type of printer connection.
If HP-IB is selected, enter the HP-IB Printer Address of the printer.
3. Select the type of printer you are using in the Model field. If your printer is not listed,
configure your printer to emulate one that is listed.
4. Enter a Print Title using the knob, if desired. This text will appear at the top of
your printout.
5. Display the screen you want to print and press and release the SHIFT key, then the
TESTS key to access the PRINT funciton.
To interrupt printing, select the Abort Print field on the PRINT CONFIGURE
screen.
66

Using Measurement Limit Indicators

The LO LIMIT and HI LIMIT functions are used to define a measurement
“window” to alert you to measurements that are outside these limits. When limits
are assigned, Lo and/or Hi appear by the measurement.
A measurement that goes above or below the defined limits causes three things to
happen:
1. A message appears at the top of the screen indicating a limit was exceeded.
2. The Lo or Hi indicator by the measurement flashes.
3. The Beeper beeps if it is has been enabled in the CONFIGURE screen.
Limits are helpful when you can’t watch the Test Set’s display while you are
making an adjustment on the equipment you are testing or repairing. They are also
a convenient way of alerting you to long-term measurement drift without having
to observe the screen.
To Set A HI and/or LO LIMIT

1. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the measurement that you are set-
ting limits for.
2. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the down-arrow key to access the LO LIMIT
function, and enter the measurement’s low-limit value and its unit-of-measure.1
3. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the up-arrow key to access the HI LIMIT func-
tion, and enter the measurement’s high-limit value and its unit-of-measure.1
1. The fundamental unit for the LIMITs does not have to be the same as the measure-
ment’s units. For instance; when measuring AC Level in Volts, you can set HI and LO
LIMITs in units of dBm.
67

To Reset or Remove Limits

To reset a limit that has been exceeded
1. Position the cursor in front of the measurement’s unit-of-measure.
2. Press and relese the SHIFT key, then the down-arrow (or up-arrow key) to access the
LO LIMIT (or HI LIMIT) function, then press ENTER or MEAS RESET.
To remove a limit
1. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the assigned limit.
2. Press and relese the SHIFT key, then the down-arrow (or up-arrow key) to access the
LO LIMIT (or HI LIMIT) function, then press ON/OFF.
Example of Setting HI and LO LIMITs

This example sets limits for the TX Freq Error measurement. Limits are being
set to indicate if a 100 MHz carrier varies more than ± 10 kHz.
1. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the TX FREQ ERROR measure-
ment (the default is kHz).
2. Press and relese the SHIFT key, then the down-arrow to access the LO LIMIT function,
then enter 1 0 kHz.
3. Press and relese the SHIFT key, then the up-arrow to access the HI LIMIT function,
then enter 1 0 kHz.
68

Averaging Measurements
Averaging Measurements
The AVG (average) function allows you to display the average value of a number
of measurements. You enter the number of measurement samples used to
calculate and display the measurement average. This dampens the effects of
rapidly changing measurements, providing a more usable measurement display.
To Use Measurement Averaging

1. Position the cursor in front of the measurement’s unit-of-measure.
2. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the INCR ×10 key to access the AVG function.
The default number of average samples is displayed below the measurement.
• Enter the desired number of measurement samples to be used for calculating the av-
erage, or
• Press ON/OFF to use the currently-displayed number of samples.
3. To turn averaging off, position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure and press and
release the SHIFT key, then the INCR ×10 key to access the AVG function, then press
the ON/OFF key.
When the averaging function is first enabled, a numeric average is calculated and
displayed each time a measurement is made. This continues until the specified
number of samples is reached. From that point on, the averaging function
performs an exponential filtering operation that mimics an RC filter.
Because of the exponential response, any large measurement changes result in a
displayed value that ramps up or down to the actual measured value.
Pressing MEAS RESET clears the measurement history for all measurements and
starts the averaging process over.
For more information on the theory of this filtering technique, refer to the April
1986 issue of the HP Journal, page 24.
Example of Using Measurement Averaging

This example enables the SINAD measurement to be averaged using 25 samples.
1. Press PRESET and wait for the instrument to display the RX TEST screen.
2. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the SINAD measurement (default
is dB).
3. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the INCR ×10 key to access the AVG function,
enter 2 5, then press the ENTER key. Avg appears below the displayed measurement
value to indicate that averaging is being used.
69

Setting A Measurement Reference
Setting A Measurement Reference

The REF SET function establishes a measurement reference point. This allows
you to make a direct comparison between two measurement results, or between a
measurement standard and the actual measurement results.
Referenced measurements are displayed in one of two ways, depending on the
type of measurement:
Displayed value = Measurement − Reference. The difference between the measured
value and the reference value is displayed in the same unit-of-measure.
or
Displayed value = Measurement ÷ Reference. A ratio of the measured value to the
reference value is displayed in dB.
To Use the Present Value as a Reference

1. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the measurement you want to set
the reference for.
2. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the INCR ÷10 key to access the REF SET func-
tion; then press enter ENTER.
3. Ref appears below the measurement.
The measurement displayed is now referenced to the measurement value present
when the reference was set.
To Set a Specific Reference

1. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the measurement you want to set
the reference for.
2. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the INCR ÷10 key to access the REF SET func-
tion.
3. Enter a reference value.
4. Ref appears below the measurement value to indicate a reference has been set.
The measurement displayed is now referenced to the value you entered.
70

Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups

The SAVE and RECALL functions allow you to store different instrument setups
and retrieve them later, eliminating the task of re-configuring the Test Set.
The number of available save registers depends on how many changes were made
to the base instrument setup for each save. (See "BASE Settings" on page 74.) The
smaller the number of changes, the greater the number of save registers that can
be used (typically over 200).
Save/Recall register settings can be saved to several types of mass storage. This
allows you to “back up the settings in case you need to clear them from memory
(see "Memory Considerations" on page 74) for running large programs, or when a
firmware upgrade is performed (see "Save/Recall" on page 387).
To Save an Instrument Setup

1. Use the More menu to access the I/O CONFIGURE screen. )
2. Select the storage media using the Save/Recall field. (The default is internal mem-
ory.
3. Make any changes to the instrument that you want to save in a register.
4. Press and release the SHIFT key then the RECALL key to access the SAVE function.
5. Use the DATA keys or the Save menu at the bottom right of the screen to enter the
register’s name.
To Recall an Instrument Setup

1. Use the More menu to access the I/O CONFIGURE screen.
2. Select the media to recall settings from using the Save/Recall field. The default is
internal memory.
3. Press RECALL.
4. Use the knob to select the desired setup to be recalled from the Recall menu at the
bottom-right of the screen.
71

Example of Saving and Recalling an Instrument Setup

This example SAVES changes made to the RX TEST screen, and then RECALLS
them. The register is saved to wherever the Save/Recall field is set (internal
memory - unless you have changed it).
1. Access the RX TEST screen and set the RF Gen Freq to 500 MHz.
2. Set Amplitude to -35 dBm.
3. Press and release the SHIFT key then the RECALL key to access the SAVE function.
A prompt appears at the top of the screen asking you to enter a name.
4. Using the DATA keys, press 1 2 3 ENTER to assign a name to these changes.
5. Press PRESET and wait for the instrument to return to normal operation.
6. If not already displayed, access the RX TEST screen. Notice that the RF Gen Freq
and Amplitude settings are reset to their preset values.
7. Press RECALL 1 2 3 ENTER. The RF Gen Freq and Amplitude are changed to
the settings you saved in register 123 (500 MHz and -35 dBm).
To Remove (Clear) an Individual Save Register

1. Specify where the register is stored using the Save/Recall field on the I/O CON-
FIGURE screen.
2. Press RECALL.
3. Use the knob to position the cursor in front of the register to be removed from the Re-
call menu at the bottom-right of the screen. The register name and percentage of
memory occupied by that register are indicated at the top of the screen.
4. Press ON/OFF. A prompt appears, asking if you want to delete the save register.
5. Press YES.
72

To Clear All Save Registers

1. Press RECALL.
2. Use the knob to position the cursor in front of the *Clr All* entry in the Recall
menu at the bottom-right of the screen.
3. Press the knob or press ENTER. A prompt appears at the top of the screen to verify that
you want to clear all registers.
4. Press YES.
Register Names
You can use any number, letter, or combination of numbers and letters as a name
for storing instrument settings. For instance; if you want to save a setup for testing
a “Vulcan7” radio, you can save the setting as “VULCAN7”.
Two register names are reserved for special purposes: POWERON and BASE.
POWERON Settings
When the Test Set is turned on, it uses a set of instrument setup parameters
specified at the time of manufacture. You can have the instrument power up in a
different state by making the desired changes to the original settings, and then
saving them using the name POWERON.
The next time the instrument is turned on, the instrument returns to the state
present when you saved the POWERON setting. For instance; if the
OSCILLOSCOPE screen was displayed when POWERON was saved, it is the
screen that is displayed when you turn the instrument on.
73

BASE Settings
The BASE register contains any field settings the user has saved that are different
from the instrument preset state. It establishes a reference point for all future
saves. If a base is not saved, the preset state is used as the reference.
When you save an instrument setup, the new setup is compared to the base
settings, and any differences are stored under the register name you supply.
Because only differences are stored, a much larger number of instrument setups
can be saved than if the contents of every field was saved.
When you recall an instrument setting, every field is reset to the base settings. The
saved settings are then used to re-establish the desired instrument setup.
CAUTION: Since each save/recall register only contains the differences between the setup being saved and
the present base register settings, changing the base settings causes all other saved setups to be
erased from memory (including the POWERON setting if one has been saved).
Unless you consistently change the same fields to the same value each time you use the
instrument, you should avoid creating your own BASE settings.
Memory Considerations
When the Save/Recall field of the I/O CONFIGURE screen is set to
Internal, programs are saved to the same non-volatile RAM used to create
RAM Disk(s) and run IBASIC programs. By saving a large number of instrument
setups, you reduce the amount of RAM available to run programs. If you get a
“memory overflow” message while trying to load a program, you must clear one
or more save/recall registers to free RAM space.
Instrument Hardware Changes

Recalling a saved register that uses a hardware option that has been removed
(such as an audio filter) results in unspecified operation. Re-install the needed
option before attempting to recall the associated register(s).
74

Using USER Keys
Using USER Keys

User keys instantly access instrument settings without using the knob. You can
use user keys to move quickly between fields on the same screen, and to access
field settings that are not normally available on the screen you are using.
Local user keys are used to move between settings on the screen that is displayed.
When the user key is pressed, the cursor instantly moves to, and selects, the
assigned field; eliminating the need to turn and push the knob. Five local user
keys are available for each screen: k1, k2, k3, k4, and k5.
Five factory-assigned local user keys are available in each screen; however, using
these keys removes any other local user keys you may have already set up.
Global user keys are used to access settings that are not available on the current
screen. Three global user keys are available: k1’, k2’, and k3’. (These are shifted
functions of the local user keys.)
When defining user keys, the ASSIGN function is used to create key definitions;
the RELEASE function removes the definitions. Re-assigning a user key to a
different field setting automatically releases it from the setting it was previously
associated with.
75

Using USER Keys
To Use the Pre-Assigned Local USER Keys

1. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the k4 key to access the ASSIGN function; then
press the ENTER key. The numbers 1 through 5 appear in front of various fields. (See
figure 9 .)
2. Press the different local user keys (k1 to k5) and notice how the cursor immediately
moves to the corresponding field.
3. To stop using the default local user keys, press and release the SHIFT key, then the k5
key to access the RELEASE function; then press the ENTER key.
scnusr.wmf
Figure 9 An Example of Pre-Assigned Local User Keys
76

Using USER Keys
To Assign Local USER Keys

1. Move the cursor to the field you want to assign a local user key to.
2. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the k4 key to access the ASSIGN function. Then
press a local USER key (k1-k5). The user key number appears in front of the field you
assigned it to.
Example of Assigning a Local USER Key

Use this example to assign local USER key k1 to the Filter 1 field in the RX
TEST screen.
1. Access the RX TEST screen and position the cursor in front of the Filter 1 field.
2. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the k4 key to access the ASSIGN function; then
press k1. A small 1 appears next to the field indicating that USER key k1 has been as-
signed to it.
3. Move the cursor to any other field on the screen and press k1. The cursor immediately
returns to the Filter 1 field. The field is also highlighted to change the entry using
the CURSOR CONTROL knob or arrow keys.
To Release Local USER Keys

1. Display the screen containing the user key assignment to be removed.
2. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the k5 key to access the RELEASE function; then
press the USER key (k1-k5).
77

Using USER Keys
To Assign Global USER Keys

1. Move the cursor to the field you want to assign a global user key to.
2. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the k4 key to access the ASSIGN function. Then
press SHIFT and a global USER key (k1’ - k3’). Unlike a local user key, the user key
number does not appear at this field; instead, a prompt appears at the top of the screen
confirming the key assignment.
Example of Assigning a Global USER Key

Use this example to assign global USER key k1’ to the AF Anl In field, and then
access this field from the OSCILLOSCOPE screen.
1. Access the AF ANALYZER screen and position the cursor in front of the AF Anl In
field.
2. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the k4 key to access the ASSIGN function.
3. Press SHIFT, k1’. Notice the prompt Global User key 1 assigned. at the top
of the screen.
4. Access the OSCILLOSCOPE screen.
5. Press SHIFT, k1’.
AF Anl Input, FM Demod is displayed at the top of the screen (assuming the
present input is set to FM Demod). To change the input, use the arrow keys
(down-arrow or up-arrow), or press ENTER to access the Choices menu.
A field that is accessed using a global user key is only displayed at the top of the
screen while it is being accessed. Moving the cursor to any other field in the
screen causes the user key field to disappear until it is accessed again.
To Release Global USER Keys

1. Move the cursor to the field with the global user key assigned to it.
2. Press and release the SHIFT key, then the k5 key to access the RELEASE function.
Then press SHIFT and the USER key to be released (k1’-k3’).
78

Setting an RF Generator/Analyzer Offset
Setting an RF Generator/Analyzer Offset

You can set a fixed frequency offset between the RF Generator and the
RF Analyzer. This feature is convenient for testing radios with a fixed
transmit/receive frequency offset.
To Set an RF Offset
2. Position the cursor in front of the RF Offset field, and press the Cursor Control knob,
or press ENTER to turn the offset On or Off.
3. Select the (Gen)-(Anl) field and enter the frequency offset value.
Example of Setting an RF Offset

2. Set the RF Offset to On.
3. Enter an offset frequency ((Gen)-(Anl)) of 10 MHz.
4. Access the DUPLEX screen.
5. Set the Tune Mode to Manual. 1
6. Select the RF Gen Freq field, and rotate the Cursor Control knob to vary the RF Gen-
erator’s frequency.
7. Notice that the Tune Freq value changes to maintain the 10 MHz difference between
the generator and the analyzer.
1. Manual tuning is used in this example to prevent possible unexpected Tune

Frequency changes during the procedure.
79

Using Remote Control

The Test Set can be remotely controlled several ways:
• Using HP-IB control from a computer/controller.
• Using IBASIC programs on memory cards.
• Using an ASCII terminal connected to the serial port.
Using HP-IB Control

The Programmer’s Guide contains information on writing HP-IB control
programs for the Test Set. Programming examples and a syntax listing provide
general HP-IB operation guidelines.
Running IBASIC Programs from Memory Cards

The documentation shipped with HP 11807 software packages explains how to
run those programs from memory cards. Refer to the Programmer’s Guide for
detailed information on using memory cards with your own IBASIC programs.
80

Using an ASCII Terminal

Connecting an ASCII terminal to the serial port allows you to remotely operate
the Test Set by entering characters that represent each front-panel control.
Before you can use this feature, you must first set the required serial port settings
in the I/O CONFIGURE screen, and make any hardware connections.
The Serial Port connections are described in chapter 24, "Connector, Key, and
Knob Descriptions".
To Configure for Serial Port Operation

1. Access the I/O CONFIGURE screen.
2. Set the Serial In field to Inst.
3. Set the IBASIC Echo field to On.
4. Set the Inst Echo field to On.
5. Set the remaining serial communications fields according to your terminal/computer’s
serial communication requirements. These fields include:
• Serial Baud
• Parity
• Data Length
• Stop Length
• Rcv Pace
• Xmt Pace
6. The Test Set now responds to the equivalent characters sent to it by the terminal/com-
puter.
Equivalent Front-Panel Control Characters

Table 5 on page 82 lists the terminal/computer keystrokes that equate to front-
panel controls. Each sequence must be preceded by the Escape key.
For example, to remotely access the CONFIGURE screen, press the Esc key, then
press the C key on your terminal/computer. Be sure to use upper-case C for this
example.
81

Table 5 Equivalent Front-Panel Control Characters
Equivalent Equivalent
Function ESC Function ESC
Character Character
CANCEL ! A X
PERCENT MHZ_V ( EEX Z
S_KHZ_MV ) YES_ON_OFF [
BACKSPACE - NO_PPM_W ]
ENTER . RX a
RELEASE 0 TX b
K1 1 DUPLEX c
K2 2 PREV d
K3 3 TESTS_MAIN e
K4 4 LOCAL f
K5 5 RECALL g
K1_PRIME 6 MEAS_RESET h
K2_PRIME 7 PRESET i
K3_PRIME 8 INCR_DIV_10 j
ASSIGN 9 INCR_SET k
KNOB_TURN_CCW < INCR_TIMES_10 l
KNOB_TURN_CW > DOWN m
MSSG A UP n
HELP B SEVEN o
CONFIG C EIGHT p
HOLD D NINE q
PRINT E FOUR r
ADRS F FIVE s
SAVE G SIX t
REF_SET J ONE u
METER K TWO v
AVG L THREE w
LO_LIMIT M ZERO x
HI_LIMIT N POINT y
82

Table 5 Equivalent Front-Panel Control Characters (Continued)
Equivalent Equivalent
Function ESC Function ESC
Character Character
E R PLUS_MINUS z
F S OHM_PCT_DEL_DBUV
B U DB_GHZ_DBM |
C V MS_HZ_UV
D W
Alternate sequences for 5 commonly-used functions are also available. Hold

down the Cntl (control) key and select the corresponding key for the desired
function. Example: Cntl H moves the cursor to the left one space.
ENTER - J or M
CANCEL - C
BACKSPACE - H
KNOB_TURN_CW - R
KNOB_TURN_CCW - L
83

84

4
Adjacent Channel Power Screen
This screen is used to measure Adjacent Channel Power. This is a measurement of

the power of signals at a specific channel spacing above and below the RF
Analyzer’s center frequency. This screen is accessed by selecting AD CH PWR
from the To Screen menu.
85

Chapter 4, Adjacent Channel Power Screen
How the Test Set Measures Adjacent Channel Power (ACP)
How the Test Set Measures Adjacent Channel Power (ACP)

When you access this screen, the Test Set automatically starts a multi-step process
for measuring ACP:
1. AF Generator 1 is turned off if the Carrier Ref field is set to Unmod.
2. The amplitude of the center frequency (Tune Freq) is measured to establish a
reference.
3. AF Generator 1 is turned back on if it was previously turned off.
4. The power in each of the adjacent channels is analyzed.
5. Adjacent Channel Power is calculated and displayed. This value can be displayed as an
absolute power level or as a ratio referenced to the center frequency’s level.
Which Input Port to Use. The TX Power measurement is used to calculate absolute
Adjacent Channel Power. Since TX Power can only be measured using the RF IN/OUT
port, you must use this port to measure ACP Level. ACP Ratio can be measured using
either the RF IN/OUT or the ANT IN port.
Measuring ACP on AM Transmitters. When measuring AM signals, the reference level
must be measured on an unmodulated carrier; so the Carrier Ref field must be set to
Unmod. After the reference is measured, the power in the adjacent channels must be mea-
sured with modulation. This requires the modulating signal to be turned off and on repeat-
edly as measurements are being calculated and displayed. Since the Test Set automatically
turns AFGen1 on and off when the Carrier Ref field is set to Unmod, you must use
AFGen1 and the AUDIO OUT port as the modulation source for making AM ACP mea-
surements.
86

Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
adchpwr.wmf
Figure 10 The Adjacent Channel Power Screen
ACP Meas
This field selects the format for displaying upper and lower adjacent channel
power levels.
• Ratio displays the power levels relative to the power around the center frequency
(Tune Freq). Levels can be displayed in dB or as a percentage (%).
• Level displays the absolute power levels in mW, W, dBm, V, mV, and dBmV.
Operating Considerations
TX Power and ACP Level can only be measured through the RF IN/OUT port.
Four dashes are displayed for these measurements when the Input Port is set to
Ant (ANT IN).
ACP Ratio can be measured on either the ANT IN port or RF IN/OUT port.
For more information, refer to "How the Test Set Measures Adjacent Channel
Power (ACP)" on page 86.
87

Field Descriptions
AFGen1 Freq
This field sets the frequency for the first audio frequency sinewave generator.
AFGen1 To
This field sets two values:
• The upper field determines whether the AFGen1 signal modulates the RF Generator or
is output through the AUDIO OUT connector.
• The lower field sets the depth of modulation for FM and AM in kilohertz and amplitude
(including Off) for audio out. The AUDIO OUT level is always in volts rms.
This is a priority control field. Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen
overrides any changes made to this field in other screens.
See Also
"Interaction Between Screens" on page 54
Carrier Ref
Use the carrier reference field to indicate whether the carrier (Tune Freq) being
measured should be unmodulated or modulated when making the ACP reference
measurement. (For more information, refer to "How the Test Set Measures
Adjacent Channel Power (ACP)" on page 86.)
• FM transmitters can be measured with the carrier modulated or unmodulated.
• For AM transmitters, the carrier must be measured while unmodulated. AFGen1 and
the AUDIO OUT port must be used as the modulation source whenever Unmod is
selected.
Channel BW
Use the channel bandwidth field to specify the bandwidth of the carrier and
adjacent channels to be measured. (See figure 11 .)
88

Field Descriptions
adchpwr1.wmf
Figure 11 Relationship Between Tune Freq, Ch Offset, and Channel BW Fields
89

Field Descriptions
Ch Offset
Use the channel offset field to enter the frequency difference between the Tune
Freq setting and the center of the adjacent channels you want to measure. This is
an absolute value; only positive values can be entered. See figure 11 .
Ext TX key
This field controls a switch at the MIC/ACC connector. Use it to “key” an
external transmitter.
See Also
"MIC/ACC" on page 514
Input Atten
Input Attenuation sets the amount of input attenuation for the RF IN/OUT and
ANT IN connectors. This function controls two settings:
• The upper field determines if you want the instrument to set the attenuation automati-
cally (Auto), or if you want to set the value manually (Hold).
• The lower field displays the present attenuation value, and is used to set the desired at-
tenuation level when the upper area is set to Hold.
Input Attenuator autoranging can interfere with oscilloscope or signaling decoder
operation under certain conditions. See "Input Atten," in chapter 17, on page 421
for additional information.
90

Field Descriptions
Input Port
This field selects the RF IN/OUT or ANT IN port for making RF measurements.
The RF IN/OUT port must be used for making TX Power or ACP Level
measurements on this screen.
Power levels for each port are printed on the Test Set’s front panel. If the RF
power at the RF IN/OUT port exceeds allowable limits, a loud warning signal
sounds and a message appears at the top of the screen. If this occurs, disconnect
the RF power, press the MEAS RESET key, and allow the Test Set to cool off for
approximately two minutes before making any other measurements on this port.
The ANT IN (antenna input) connector provides a highly-sensitive input for very
low level signals (such as “off the air” measurements). You cannot measure TX
(RF) Power or ACP Level on this screen using the ANT IN port.
CAUTION: Connecting a signal of >200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage
(although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short-duration signal of 1 or
2 Watts).
If the overpower circuit is triggered (signified by a warning message at the top of
the screen), remove the signal from the ANT IN port, and press the MEAS
RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.
Lower and Upper ACP [Ratio:Level]

These two measurements display the amount of power in signals above and below
the Tune Freq signal. The level is displayed as a ratio (referenced to the power
around the Tune Freq) or as an absolute value.
See Also
ACP Meas field description, on page 87
91

Field Descriptions
Res BW
The resolution bandwidth field selects the IF filter used when measuring the
power of the carrier and the adjacent channels.
Using a narrower bandwidth filter (300 Hz) slows the measurement, but rejects
carrier leakage and out of channel spurs. Using a wider bandwidth filter
(1 kHz) speeds measurements, but may allow unwanted spurs and carrier leakage
to be integrated into the measurement when measuring at the edges of the selected
channel bandwidth.
Tune Freq
This field sets the center frequency for the RF signal to be analyzed.
See Also
Tune Mode field description (this page)
Tune Mode
This field selects Automatic or Manual tuning of the RF Analyzer.
Auto tuning causes the RF Analyzer to find the signal with the greatest amplitude
>-36 dBm, and to set the Tune Frequency for that signal.
Manual tuning requires the operator to set the Tune Frequency for the RF signal
to be analyzed.
Changing the Tune Mode also changes the RF frequency display. Automatic
tuning enables the TX Frequency measurement. Manual tuning enables the
TX Freq Error measurement.
92

Field Descriptions
TX Freq Error/TX Frequency

This measurement displays Transmitter Frequency Error or absolute Transmitter
Frequency.
See Also
TX Power
Transmitter Power measures RF power at the RF IN/OUT port.
Only the RF IN/OUT port can be used for measuring TX Power on this screen.
When the Input Port is set to Ant, four dashes (- - - -) appear in place of digits
for this measurement.
Use the Spectrum Analyzer to measure low-level RF power (≤200 mW) at the
ANT IN port.
93

Field Descriptions
TX Pwr Zero
The transmitter power zero function establishes a 0.0000 W reference for
measuring RF power at the RF IN/OUT port.
CAUTION: RF power must not be applied while zeroing. Set the RF Generator screen’s Amplitude
field to off to prevent internal cross-coupling into the power detector while zeroing.
When power is applied to the RF IN/OUT connector, the temperature of the
internal circuitry increases. This can cause changes in the TX Power measurement
when low power levels are measured immediately following high power
measurements.
When alternately making high and low power measurements, always zero the
power meter immediately before making the low power measurements; this
provides the best measurement accuracy.
94

5
AF Analyzer Screen
95

Chapter 5, AF Analyzer Screen
Block Diagram
Block Diagram
!& !NT )N
&- $EMOD
)NPUT 'AI N
DB !& #NT 'ATE
&- $EMOD &ILTER &I LTER

&ROM )& &IL TERS !- $EMOD
(Z (0& K(Z ,0&
33" $EMOD
&ROM !5$)/ /UT !UDIO /UT

#,+
&ROM 2ADIO )NTERFACE 2ADIO )NT !& &REQ #OUNT
2EAR PANEL -OD )N %XT -OD
&REQUENCY $ISPLAY
&ROM -)# !## -IC -OD #OUNTER
&ROM !-&- &- -OD
-ODUL ATORS !- -OD
!UDIO )N
&ROM !5$)/ )N (I
$E %MPHASI S $E %MP 'AIN

.OTCH 'AIN $ETECTOR
US/FF D"
D" 0K -AX
4O (I K(Z
!5$)/ )N ,O &LOAT
2-3
!5$)/ )N ,O 'ND 3).!$
'ND $ISTORTION
2-3
2-3
3124
$E %MP
4O )NTERNAL
0+
0+ 6OLTMETER
0+
&ILTERS 0+ -AX
!# ,EVEL
0+ (OLD
0+ (OLD
0+ (D
$# #URRENT 0+ -X (D
0K $ET 4O
&IL TERS
:ERO
&ILTERS
3COPE 4O
)NPUT
&ILTERS
- .OTCH
#URRENT 4O )NTERMAL
3ENSE !UDIO
6OLTMETER
$E %MP
+ &I LTERS
-ONITOR
/UTPUT
2EAR 0ANEL
)NPUT
U3 $# -EASUREMENT 4O /SCI LLOSCOPE
4O $ECODER
4O )NTERNAL
6OL TMETER
!,#
3PEAKER
3PEAKER !,# 6/,5-%

3PEAKER 6OL
/N/&&
0OT/FF
Figure 12 AF ANALYZER Functional Block Diagram
1
The Settling, Gain Cntl, and Ext Load R fields are not shown.
2VariableFrequency Notch if purchased.
96

Block Diagram
Field Descriptions
AC Level
This measurement displays either rms potential (voltage) or audio power (Watts
or dBm).
When the unit-of-measure is changed to measure AF power, the external load
resistance must be specified. Refer to the
Ext Load R field description, on page 102.
The input for the ac level measurement on this screen is always the AUDIO IN
connectors.
See Also
"Entering and Changing Numbers" on page 63
AF Anl In
The audio frequency analyzer input selects the input for the analyzer. When
selected, this field displays a list of choices.
Signals can be analyzed from three different types of inputs:
• The output of the AM, FM, or SSB demodulators.
• The AUDIO IN, RADIO INTERFACE, MODULATION INPUT, MIC/ACC, and
AUDIO OUT connectors.
• The signal present at the AM or FM modulators for the RF Generator.
See Also
"Displaying Measurements" on page 57
97

Block Diagram
AF Cnt Gate
Audio frequency counter gate specifies how long the AF counter samples the
signal before displaying the frequency. Specifying a shorter gate time may enable
you to see frequency fluctuations that might not be seen using a longer gate time.
AF Freq
This is the default measurement for this measurement field. Selecting this field
displays the following measurement choices:
SINAD
Distortion
SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio)
AF Frequency
DC Level
Current - DC only Operating Considerations

SNR Operation
• Selecting SNR turns off the other audio measurement.
• The RF Generator and AFGen1 must be set up to provide the radio’s carrier. AFGen1
is automatically turned on and off repeatedly during this measurement.
• AFGen2 must be turned off.
• The radio’s receiver’s audio output must be connected to the AUDIO IN port (set
the AF Anl In field to Audio In).
See Also
98

Block Diagram
AM Depth
This field displays the percent depth of modulation of the AM signal. The field is
only visible when the AF ANL In field is set to AM MOD or AM DEMOD
Audio In Lo
This field sets the AUDIO IN LO connector’s state.
• Gnd causes the center pin of the connector to be connected directly to chassis ground.
• Float isolates the center pin of the connector from ground, providing a floating input
to the AF Analyzer.
• 600 To Hi establishes a 600-ohm impedance between the center pins of the AUDIO
IN LO and AUDIO IN HI connectors. Also, the Ext Load R field is removed, since
the load is now fixed to 600 ohms.
Current
The Current field is found by selecting the SINAD field on the Test Set display
of the AF ANALYZER screen. This field only displays the DC current measured
at the DC input port on the back of the Test Set. Any offset can be removed by
selecting Zero from the DC Current field.
DC Current
DC current measurement zero removes any measurement offset present before
making a dc-current measurement. The measurement is zeroed by selecting Zero,
and pressing the ENTER key or the Cursor Control knob.
NOTE: The current source must be disconnected before zeroing for accurate operation.
See Also
"DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT" on page 511
"SINAD, Distortion, SNR, AF Frequency, DC Level, DC Current" on page 60
Chapter 24, "Connector, Key, and Knob Descriptions"
99

Block Diagram
DC Level
This field displays the DC voltage entering at the DC input port on the back of the
Test Set.
De-Emp Gain
De-emphasis gain displays and selects the desired AF analyzer de-emphasis
amplifier gain.
See Also
Gain Cntl field description, on page 103
De-Emphasis
This setting selects or bypasses the 750 ms de-emphasis networks in the audio
analyzer and speaker circuitry.
See Also
Distn
This field displays the percent of distortion. The Distortion measurement is only
for a 1 kHz signaling tone.
100

Block Diagram
Detector
This setting selects the type of detector used when measuring and displaying AF
signal levels.
Detector Types
• RMS displays the RMS value of signals.
• displays the RMS value of a signal multiplied by 2 .
• Pk+ displays the positive peak value.
• Pk− displays the negative peak value.
• Pk±/2 adds the positive and negative peak values, and divides the sum by 2.
• Pk±Max compares the positive and negative peaks and displays the greater value
(polarity is not indicated).
• Pk+ Hold displays and holds the positive peak value until the measurement is reset.
To reset, press the MEAS RESET key, select a different detector, or re-select the same
detector.
• Pk− Hold displays and holds the negative peak value until the measurement is reset.
detector.
• Pk±/2 Hold divides the sum of the positive and negative peak values by 2, and
displays the value until the measurement is reset. To reset, press the MEAS RESET
key, select a different detector, or re-select the same detector.
• Pk±Mx Hold compares the positive and negative peaks and displays the greater value
until the measurement is reset. To reset, press the MEAS RESET key, select a different
detector, or re-select the same detector.
See Also
101

Block Diagram
Ext Load R
External Load Resistance is used to calculate and display AF power. Power is
calculated using the voltage measured at the AUDIO IN connections and the
resistance value you enter into this field.
This field is not displayed when the Audio In Lo field is set to 600 To Hi; the
load resistance is internally fixed to 600 ohms.
See Also
AC Level field description, on page 97
Audio In Lo field description, on page 99
Filter 1 and Filter 2

Filters 1 and 2 select a variety of standard and optional filters. Selecting either
field lists the choices available for that field.
FM Deviation
This is the default measurement for this field. The FM Deviation field displays the
frequency deviation between the FM signal and the carrier. The FM Deviation
measurement field is only displayed when the AF Anl In field is set to FM
Demod or FM Mod.
See Also
AF Anl In field description, on page 97
102

Block Diagram
Gain Cntl
AF Analyzer Gain Control specifies whether the AF Analyzer’s gain settings are
controlled automatically by AF autoranging (Auto), or by manual control (Hold).
The following settings are affected by AF autoranging:
• Input Gain
• De-Emp Gain
• Notch Gain
The normal mode of operation for the Gain Cntl field is Auto, allowing the
instrument to adjust the AF gain settings for optimum measurement accuracy.
This field can be set to Hold to disable the autoranging routines to increase
measurement speed. However, this requires you to select the desired gain settings
manually for each measurement.
NOTE: Decoder and Oscilloscope Interference: The AF autoranging function (Auto)

takes a small amount of time to determine the attenuation settings for the AF
Analyzer. If you are decoding an encoded signal, and your transmitter begins sending
encoded information the instant it transmits, the initial encoded information may not
be decoded during the autoranging process.
Use the Auto setting to establish the initial gain settings while the encoded signal is
first being decoded, and then select Hold during the decoding process to retain the
gain settings. The decoder should capture all encoded information the next time you
transmit the signal.
Input Gain
This field displays and selects the gain of the AF Analyzer’s input amplifier.
Refer to the Gain Cntl field information.
103

Block Diagram
Notch Freq
This field sets the center frequency for the variable frequency notch filter.1 It is
typically used for distortion and SINAD measurements at frequencies below or
above the standard 1 kHz notch filter.
This field is not displayed if your Test Set does not have this feature.
When the Notch Coupl field on the CONFIGURE screen is set to AFGen1, this
filter and the AFGen1 Freq field match their settings. A warning message is then
displayed if you attempt to set the AFGen1 Freq value outside the 300 Hz to 10
kHz range of this filter. When the Notch Coupl field is set to None, this filter
and AFGen1 Freq operate independently.
Notch Gain
This field displays and selects the gain of the AF Analyzer’s notch filter amplifier.
This amplifier is only used for making SINAD and distortion measurements.
(Refer to the Gain Cntl field information.)
Pk Det To
Peak Detector To selects the signal source for the peak detectors. This allows you
to bypass certain sections of the AF analyzer’s circuitry when making ac-level
measurements.
See Also
Figure 12, "AF ANALYZER Functional Block Diagram," on page 96.
1. Optional on some Test Sets
104

Block Diagram
Scope To
Oscilloscope To selects the signal source for the Oscilloscope. This allows you to
bypass certain sections of the AF analyzer’s circuitry when viewing and
measuring a signal. It also allows you to select measurement paths that include
additional gain stages, improving the oscilloscope’s resolution when measuring
low-level signals.
See Also
Figure 12, "AF ANALYZER Functional Block Diagram," on page 96
Settling
This field selects the settling time for making AF measurements. Lower frequency
signals require additional settling time (Slow). Higher frequency measurements
require less settling time (Fast).
Use Slow for ≤200 Hz signals. Use Fast for >200 Hz signals.
If the signal being measured is a composite of different frequencies above and
below 200 Hz, select the appropriate filtering to analyze the desired signal
component.
105

Block Diagram
SINAD
This measurement field is used to select and display any one of the following
measurements:
SINAD
Distortion
AF Frequency
DC Level

SNR Operation
• The RF Generator and AFGen1 must be set up to provide the radio’s carrier. (AFGen1
is automatically turned on and off repeatedly during this measurement.)
• The radio’s receiver’s audio output must be connected to the AUDIO IN port (set the
AF Anl In field to Audio In).
See Also
SNR
The SNR field is found by selecting the SINAD field on the Test Set display of the
AF ANALYZER screen.This field displays the signal to noise ratio of the input
audio signal.
106

Block Diagram
Speaker ALC
Speaker Automatic Level Control enables/disables the ALC function for the
instrument’s internal speaker. When On is selected, the speaker volume is
independent of the signal level being measured. When Off is selected, the speaker
volume is dependent on the signal level being measured.
Speaker Vol
Speaker Volume enables/disables the instrument’s internal speaker. When Pot is
selected, the VOLUME control knob operates normally. When Off is selected,
the speaker is disconnected.
TX Freq Error/ TX Frequency

This measurement area is used to display transmitter frequency error or
transmitter frequency. The type of measurement displayed depends on the Tune
Mode setting in the TX TEST, DUPLEX TEST, or RF ANALYZER screen.
See Also
107

Block Diagram
TX Power
Transmitter Power measures RF power at the RF IN/OUT port.
Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel.
ANT IN port.
(although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short-duration signal of
1 or 2 Watts).
If the overpower circuit is triggered (signified by a warning message at the top of the
screen), remove the signal from the ANT IN port, and press the MEAS RESET key or
turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.
See Also
Input Port field description, on page 422
TX Power field description, on page 426
TX Pwr Zero field description, on page 427
108

6
Call Processing Subsystem
109

Chapter 6, Call Processing Subsystem
Description of the Call Processing Subsystem

The Call Processing Subsystem, which comprises five call processing screens,
allows the Test Set to simulate a cellular base station. The Call Processing
Subsystem provides, through host firmware control, the specific signals and
protocol messages necessary to automatically establish and maintain a cellular
link between the Test Set and a cellular phone (mobile station).
Once the link is established the operator can exercise the call processing functions
of the mobile station, such as
• the decoding of orders from the base station, such as orders to retune the transceiver to
a new channel, to alert the mobile station user to an incoming call, to adjust the
transceiver output power level, or to release the mobile station upon completion of a
call.
• the encoding of signaling information for transmission to the base station, such as
dialed digits for call origination, disconnect signal at the completion of a call, or mobile
identification number.
In addition, when the link is established the Test Set performs the following
functions automatically:
• measures some of the basic RF characteristics of the mobile station’s transmitted
carrier, such as; transmitter power, frequency accuracy, and modulation deviation
• decodes and displays various reverse control channel and reverse voice channel
signaling messages
When sending forward control channel and forward voice channel messages, you
can set the bit pattern to an industry standard or to a pattern of your choice. The
ability to set the bit patterns gives the operator the opportunity to interject errors
into the signaling message, and test the mobile station’s ability to find these
errors.
110

Operational Overview
The Test Set simulates a cellular base station by using its hardware and firmware
resources to initiate and maintain a link with a mobile station. Unlike a real base
station, the Test Set has only one transceiver (its signal generator and RF/AF
analyzer) and can support only one mobile station at a time. This means that the
Test Set’s transceiver can be configured as either a control channel or a voice
channel, but not both simultaneously.
To establish a link with a mobile station the Test Set’s transceiver is configured as
a control channel. Once a link has been established and the user wishes to test the
mobile station on a voice channel, the Test Set sends the appropriate information
to the mobile station on the control channel and then automatically re-configures
its transceiver to the voice channel assigned to the mobile station. Once the voice
channel link is terminated, the Test Set automatically re-configures its transceiver
back to being a control channel.
Handoffs are accomplished in a similar manner. When a handoff is initiated while
on a voice channel, the Test Set sends the necessary information to the mobile
station on the current voice channel. At the proper time, the Test Set automatically
re-configures its transceiver to the new voice channel.
Figure 13, "Call Processing State Diagram," on page 112 illustrates the primary call
processing functions available in the Call Processing Subsystem. Each box
represents a call processing state and includes the measurement information
available while in that state. Each box also includes the name of the annunciator
on the call processing screen that will be lit while in that call processing state.
Events which trigger transitions between the various states are shown on the
diagram. Events which are initiated from the Test Set are shown in solid lines and
events which are initiated from the mobile station are shown in dashed lines.
111

State: Idle State: Register

Annunciator: None Annunciator: Register
Meas: None Meas:RECCW A
RECCW B
RECCW C
Phone Number
ESN (hexadecimal)
Active SCM
Register
State: Active
Annunciator: Active
Meas: None SEND key pressed
while Roaming
Page or in Service mode
State: Page
Annunciator: Page
Meas:RECCW A
RECCW B State: Originate
RECCW C
Annunciator: None
Meas:RECCW A
RECCW B
RECCW C
State: Access RECCW D
RECCW E
Annunciator: Access Phone Number
ESN (hexadecimal)
Meas: None SCM
Called number
Release
State: Connected Order

Annunciator:
Connect
Meas:RVCOrdCon = event initiated from Test Set
TX Freq Error Handoff = event initiated from Mobile
END key pressed TX Power
FM Deviation Station
while on an active
voice channel
Figure 13 Call Processing State Diagram
112

Accessing the Call Processing Subsystem’s Screens

The Call Processing Subsystem screens are accessed by selecting CALL CNTL
from the To Screen menu on the Test Set’s CRT (you may have to choose the
More choice to display the CALL CNTL choice).
Call Processing Subsystem’s Screens
The Call Processing Subsystem consists of five screens.

• The CALL CONTROL is the primary Call Processing Subsystem screen. This screen
contains the fields used to configure the Test Set’s parameters such as SAT Tone fre-
quency, control channel number, and system identification number. Call processing
functions such as registration, page, and handoff can be activated from this screen. The
transmit power of the mobile station can be set from this screen. Data messages re-
ceived from the mobile station are displayed on this screen.
• The CALL DATA screen displays the decoded signaling messages received from the
mobile station on the reverse control channel and the reverse voice channel. Call pro-
cessing functions such as registration, page, and handoff can also be activated from this
screen. The transmit power of the mobile station can be set from this screen.
• The CALL BIT screen allows the advanced user to modify the contents of the forward
control channel and forward voice channel messages.
• The CALL CONFIGURE screen contains the fields used to configure various parame-
ters related to the Call Processing Subsystem, such as CMAX, Detector, and Input
Att.
NOTE: The ANALOG MEAS screen is used to make analog RF and audio measurements on the
mobile station while a link is active.
113

Using the Call Processing Subsystem

In order to use the Call Processing Subsystem, a mobile station must be powered
on, and connected to the Test Set.
Connecting A Mobile Station

Figure 14, "Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set," on page 115 shows a
typical example of how to connect a mobile station to the Test Set. You may need
a special fixture to access the mobile station’s antenna, audio in, and audio out
signals. These fixtures are available from the mobile station’s manufacturer.
If any audio testing is to be done on the mobile station, the audio input
(microphone input) to the mobile station and the audio output (speaker output)
from the mobile station must be connected to the Test Set. If no audio testing is to
be done only the antenna needs to be connected to the Test Set.
114

RF IN/OUT ANT IN AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN

HI LO
Speaker Out
Microphone In
Mobile Station
Antenna Manufacturer’s
Special Fixture
Figure 14 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set
NOTE: Do not connect the antenna of the mobile station to the ANT IN port on the front panel of the
Test Set; this will cause the overpower protection circuitry to trip when the mobile station is
transmitting. Refer to "ANT IN" on page 508 for further information.
115

Mobile Station Audio Out Impedance

If the mobile station’s speaker is disconnected when using the manufacturer’s
special fixture, the user must ensure that the proper load impedance is applied to
the audio output of the mobile station. The special fixtures supplied by the
manufacturer of the mobile station may or may not terminate the audio output in
its proper load impedance. Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation for
information on the termination supplied by the special fixture.
If a load impedance must be supplied, then it can be placed across the AUDIO IN
connector. Refer to "AUDIO IN" on page 509 and chapter 5, "AF Analyzer
Screen," on page 95 , for further information.
600 Ohm Impedance

Some industry standards require the audio out of the mobile station to be
terminated in 600 ohms for testing purposes. The AUDIO IN connector of the
Test Set can be terminated in 600 ohms internally. Refer to "AUDIO IN" on page
509 and chapter 5, "AF Analyzer Screen," on page 95, for further information.
116

Generalized Procedures Using the Call Processing Subsystem

For general procedures for using the Call Processing Subsystem, see the following
sections:
• "Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing" on page 130
• "Configure the Test Set" on page 131
• "Turn On The Test Set’s Control Channel" on page 132
• "Register a Mobile Station" on page 132
• "Page a Mobile Station" on page 133
• "Handoff a Mobile Station to a New Voice Channel" on page 135
• "Release A Mobile Station" on page 135
• "Change the Transmit Power Level of a Mobile Station" on page 136
• "Originate a Call from a Mobile Station" on page 137
• "Send an Alert Order to a Mobile Station" on page 138
• "Changing the Content of a Message Field" on page 190
• "Selecting The Message Content Generation Method" on page 187
• "To Make an RF Sensitivity Measurement" on page 196
• "To Make an FM Hum and Noise Measurement" on page 197
117

The CALL CONTROL Screen
Figure 15 The CALL CONTROL Screen
The CALL CONTROL screen is the primary Call Processing Subsystem screen. It
contains the most often used call processing configuration and command fields.
Figure 15 on page 118 shows the CALL CONTROL screen for AMPS, TACS, and
JTACS.
The top right-hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen is used to display the
following information:
• decoded data messages received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel
or the reverse voice channel
• modulation quality measurements made on the mobile station’s RF carrier while on a
voice channel
• raw data message bits, displayed in hexadecimal format, received from the mobile
station on the reverse control channel or reverse voice channel when a decoding error
occurs
The type of information to be displayed is selected using the Display field. Refer
to the Display field description, on page 121 for further information.
118

[] Access
When lit, the Access annunciator indicates the Test Set is signaling the mobile
station with command information on the forward voice channel. This is a
transitory state.
The Test Set’s speaker is turned off when in the access state. This is done to
eliminate any possible audio feedback which may occur if the mobile station’s
microphone is open.
Active
This field is used to turn on the forward control channel of the Test Set or to force
a return to the active state from any other state (register, page, access, connect). If
the forward control channel of the Test Set is already active, selecting this field
will deactivate and then reactivate the control channel.
[] Active
When lit, the Active annunciator indicates the control channel of the Test Set is
turned on.
If this annunciator is lit, the base station is transmitting system parameter
overhead messages on the assigned control channel. If the annunciator is not lit,
the base station is not active.
NOTE: The Test Set may still be outputting a modulated RF carrier but the Test Set’s firmware is not
active and no communication can occur between a mobile station and the Test Set.
AF Freq
The AF Freq field is displayed only when the Display field is set to Meas.
This field displays the audio frequency of the demodulated FM signal being
transmitted by the mobile station. Four dashes (----) indicate that no audio
frequency is present to measure. A numeric value would only be displayed when
the Test Set’s Connected annunciator is lit (connected state).
Amplitude
This field is used to set the output power of the Test Set’s transmitter (that is, the
output power of the Test Set’s RF Generator).
119

Called Number:
This field displays the called phone number, in decimal form, received from the
mobile station on the reverse control channel when the mobile station originates a
call. The Called Number: field is displayed only when the Display field is set
to Data and a reverse control channel message has been decoded when the mobile
originates a call.
Chan:
Chan: is divided into two fields:
• The left-hand field displays the voice channel number assignment being used by the
Test Set and the mobile station. A numeric value would only be displayed when the Test
Set’s Connected annunciator is lit (connected state). A “-” is displayed if a mobile
station is not actively connected on a voice channel.
• The right-hand field (highlighted field) is used to enter the voice channel number which
will be assigned to the mobile station by the Test Set as either an initial voice channel
assignment or as a handoff voice channel assignment.
Cntl Channel
This field is used to set the control channel number used by the Test Set.
The Cntl Channel field is an immediate action field. That is, whenever the
Cntl Channel field is changed, the change is reflected immediately in the
physical configuration of the Test Set (the control channel is immediately de-
activated, reconfigured, and then re-activated to reflect the change) and causes an
immediate change to the current state of the Call Processing Subsystem (the state
is set to Active).
[] Connect
When lit, the Connect annunciator indicates that the mobile station is connected
to the Test Set on a voice channel.
120

NOTE: When the CALL CONTROL screen is displayed and the Call Processing Subsystem is in
the connected state (Connect annunciator is lit), the Test Set constantly monitors the
mobile station’s transmitted carrier power. If the power falls below 0.0005 Watts the Test
Set will terminate the call and return to the active state (Active annunciator is lit). The
mobile station’s transmitted carrier power is monitored on all Call Processing Subsystem
screens except the ANALOG MEAS screen.
If the Test Set is in the connected state (Connect annunciator is lit) and a
change is made to the Cntl Channel field the connected state will be lost.
Display
This field is used to select the type of mobile station information to be displayed
in the upper right-hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen:
• Select Data to display information received from the mobile station on the reverse
control channel or reverse voice channel. If the data message(s) received from the
mobile station can be correctly decoded, the decoded message contents are displayed.
If the data messages cannot be correctly decoded, the raw data message bits are
displayed in hexadecimal format. Figure 16 on page 122 shows the layout of the CALL
CONTROL screen when a decoding error has occurred.
The decoded order confirmation message, origination message, and order message are
available from the reverse control channel. The following pieces of information are dis-
played when these messages are properly decoded: phone number, ESN (dec), ESN (hex),
the decoded Station Class Mark (SCM), and the called number. The decoded SCM con-
sists of: the mobile station power class (Class I, II, or III), the transmission type (continu-
ous/discontinuous), and the transmission bandwidth (20 MHz or 25 MHz).
• The decoded Order Confirmation Message is available from the reverse voice chan-
nel.
• Select Meas to display modulation quality measurements made on the mobile station’s
RF carrier while on a voice channel.
For system types AMPS, TACS, and JTACS four characteristics of the RF carrier are
measured: TX Freq Error, TX Power, FM Deviation, and AF Frequency. When set to the
Meas display, the AF Analyzer’s settings are 300 Hz HPF, 15 kHz LPF, De-Emphasis
Off, PK+ detector. The Meas information is available only when the Test Set’s Connect
annunciator is lit (connect state). Refer to the individual field descriptions for further
information. Figure 17 on page 122 shows the layout of the CALL CONTROL screen
when Meas is selected.
121

Figure 16 CALL CONTROL Screen with Decoding Error Message Display
Figure 17 AMPS, TACS, and JTACS CALL CONTROL Screen with Meas Selected
122

ESN (dec):
This field displays the electronic serial number (ESN), in decimal form, received
from the mobile station on the reverse control channel in response to a forward
control channel message. The ESN (dec): field is displayed only when the
Display field is set to Data and a reverse control channel message containing
this information has been decoded.
ESN (hex):
This field displays the electronic serial number (ESN), in hexadecimal form,
received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel in response to a
forward control channel message. The ESN (hex): field is displayed only when
the Display field is set to Data and a reverse control channel message
containing this information has been decoded.
FM Deviation
This field displays the measured FM deviation of the RF carrier being transmitted
by the mobile station on the reverse voice channel. Four dashes (----) indicate no
carrier is present to measure. A numeric value would only be displayed when the
Test Set’s Connected annunciator is lit (connected state). The FM Deviation
field is only displayed when the Display field is set to Meas.
NOTE: When the CALL CONTROL screen is displayed, the Test Set’s instrumentation is configured
for optimal performance of the signaling decoder. It is recommended that FM deviation
measurements be made using either the ANALOG MEAS screen. Using the CALL
CONTROL screen to make FM deviation measurements may result in slightly degraded
results.
Handoff
This field is used to initiate a handoff from the current voice channel assignments
to a new set of voice channel assignments. The voice channel number to hand the
mobile station off to, the initial power level to use on the new voice channel, and
the SAT tone frequency to transpond on the new voice channel are specified using
the Chan:, Pwr Lvl:, and SAT: fields in the Voice Channel Assignment
section of the CALL CONTROL screen.
123

MS Id
This field is used to enter the identification number of the mobile station. The
MS Id has two fields. The upper field is a one-of-many selection field and is used
to select the format for entering the identification number. The lower field is a
numeric entry field and is used to enter the identification number in the format
selected using the upper field. The contents of the lower field are automatically
updated upon successful completion of a mobile station registration.
There are two formats which can be used to enter the identification number. The
identification number can be entered as either the 10-digit phone number in
decimal (for example, 5095551212) or as the mobile identification number (MIN)
in hexadecimal (for example, AAABBBBBB). The first 3 characters (AAA) in the
field represent MIN2 and the last 6 characters (BBBBBB) represent MIN1.
To enter the identification number, select upper field and select the desired format
(Phone Num or MIN2 MIN1). Then select the lower field and enter the
information in the selected format. If the desired format is already selected then
simply select the lower field and enter the information in the selected format. The
formats are coupled, that is, if the Phone Num format is selected and the 10-digit
phone number is entered, the MIN2 MIN1 information is automatically updated,
and vice versa.
NOTE: The preset values for the MS Id fields are:

• Phone Num = 1111111111
• MIN2 MIN1 = 000000400
An all zero MIN number (000000000), which does not represent a valid phone
number, will be converted to the following phone number: 111111?111.
124

Order
This field is used to send an order on the forward voice channel to the Mobile
Station. A mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the
Test Set (that is, the Connect annunciator must be lit) before you can send an
order to a mobile station.
The Order field is a one-of-many selection field. To send an order to the mobile
station, select the Order field. A list of choices is displayed. Select the desired
order from the Choices: menu. The following orders are available:
Change Power to Power Level 0 - 7
• Maintenance (put the mobile station in maintenance mode)

• Alert (alert the mobile station)
Once the selection is made a mobile station control message is sent to the mobile
station. The Access annunciator will light momentarily while the Test Set is
sending the mobile station control message.
Pwr Lvl:
Pwr Lvl: is divided into two fields:
• The left-hand field displays the mobile station’s output power level assigned to the
voice channel being used by the Test Set and the mobile station. A numeric value is
displayed only when a mobile station is actively connected on a voice channel (that is,
the Connect annunciator must be lit). A “-” is displayed if a mobile station is not
actively connected on a voice channel.
• The right-hand field (highlighted field) is used to enter the Voice Mobile Attenuation
Code (VMAC). The VMAC determines the mobile station’s power level to be used on
the voice channel (See Chan: field description, on page 120 for more information
about the voice channel).
Page
This field is used to initiate a page to the mobile station that is connected to the
Test Set. The Test Set must be in the active state (that is, Active annunciator
must be lit) and the MS Id information must be entered before you can attempt to
page the mobile station.
125

[] Page
When lit, the Page annunciator indicates that the mobile station connected to the
Test Set is currently being paged on the forward control channel.
Phone Num:
This field displays the decoded MIN number received from the mobile station on
the reverse control channel in response to a forward control channel message. The
Phone Num: field is displayed only when the Display field is set to Data and a
reverse control channel message containing this information has been decoded.
CAUTION: Do not confuse the Phone Num: field, which is displayed in the upper right-hand portion of
the CALL CONTROL screen, with the Phone Num selection of the MS Id field.
NOTE: An all zero MIN number (000000000), which does not represent a valid phone number, will
convert to the following phone number: 111111?111.
Register
This field is used to initiate a registration of the mobile station that is connected to
the Test Set. The Test Set must be in the active state (that is, the Active
annunciator must be lit) before you can attempt to register the mobile station.
[] Register
When lit, the Register annunciator indicates that the mobile station connected
to the Test Set is being commanded to register with the Test Set.
Release
This field is used to terminate an active voice channel connection with the mobile
station. When the Release field is selected, a mobile station control message
with a release order is sent to the mobile station on the forward voice channel. A
mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the Test Set (that
is, the Connect annunciator must be lit) before you can attempt to send a release
order to the mobile station.
126

SAT:
SAT: is divided into two fields:
he left-hand field displays the SAT frequency assigned to the voice channel being used by
the Test Set and the mobile station. A numeric value would only be displayed when the
Test Set’s Connected annunciator is lit (connected state). A “-” is displayed if a mobile
station is not actively connected on a voice channel.
The right-hand field (highlighted field) is used to set the SAT Color Code (SCC) to be
used on the designated voice channel (Chan: field description, on page 120 for more
information about the voice channel).
SCM:
This field displays the decoded station class mark information received from the
mobile station on the reverse control channel in response to a forward control
channel message. The SCM: field is displayed only when the Display field is set
to Data and a reverse control channel message has been decoded.
SID
This field is used to set the system identification number (SID) of the Test Set.
The SID field is an immediate action field. If the field is selected and changed, the
signaling message(s) being sent on the forward control channel are immediately
changed. No change occurs to the current state (that is, active, register, page,
access, connect) of the Call Processing Subsystem.
127

System Type
This field is used to select the type of cellular system (AMPS, TACS, JTACS)
which will be simulated.
The System Type field is an immediate action field. That is, whenever the
System Type field is changed, the change is reflected immediately in the
physical configuration of the Test Set. The control channel is immediately de-
activated, reconfigured, and then re-activated to reflect the change. This change
causes the Test Set to enter the active state).
NOTE: If the Test Set is in the connected state (Connect annunciator is lit) and a change is made to
the System Type field, the connected state will be lost.
TX Freq Error
This field displays the frequency error (frequency error = assigned carrier
frequency - measured carrier frequency) of the RF carrier being transmitted by the
mobile station. Four dashes (----) indicate that no RF carrier is present to measure.
A numeric value would only be displayed in the connected state (that is, the
Connect annunciator is lit). The TX Freq Error field is displayed only when
the Display field is set to Meas.
TX Power
The TX Power field is displayed only when the Display field is set to Meas.
This field displays the measured RF power of the RF carrier being transmitted by
the mobile station. A non-zero value would only be displayed when the Test Set’s
Connect annunciator is lit).
When the CALL CONTROL screen is displayed and the Test Set is in the
connected state (Connect annunciator is lit), the mobile station’s transmitted
carrier power is constantly monitored. If the power falls below 0.0005 Watts, the
error message RF Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will
be displayed, and the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the active state
(Active annunciator is lit).
• In order to ensure that the Test Set makes the correct decisions regarding the presence
of the mobile stations’s RF carrier, the Test Set’s RF power meter should be zeroed
before using the Call Processing Subsystem. Failure to zero the power meter can result
in erroneous RF power measurements. See "Conditioning the Test Set for Call
Processing" on page 130 for information on manually zeroing the RF Power meter.
128

Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions

The CALL CONTROL screen provides multiple functions for testing a mobile
station. The following sections describe how to:
• Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing field description,
on page 130
• Configure the Test Set field description, on page 131
• Turn On The Test Set’s Control Channel field description, on page 132
• Register a Mobile Station field description, on page 132
• Page a Mobile Station field description, on page 133
• Handoff a Mobile Station to a New Voice Channel field description,
on page 135
• Release A Mobile Station field description, on page 135
• Change the Transmit Power Level of a Mobile Station field
description, on page 136
• Send an Alert Order to a Mobile Station field description, on page
138
129

Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing

Perform the following steps when first entering the Call Processing Subsystem
(that is, the first time the CALL CONTROL screen is selected during a
measurement session).
1. Zero the RF Power Meter.
Select the RF GEN from the To Screen menu.
a. Set the Amplitude field to off (use the ON/OFF key). This prevent cross-cou-
pling into the power detector while zeroing the power meter.
b. Select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu.
c. Select CALL CNFG from the To Screen menu.
d. Disconnect any cables from the RF IN/OUT port on the front panel of the Test Set.
e. Select the TX Pwr Zero field.
f. Select the RF Gen from the To Screen menu.
g. Set the Amplitude field to On.
There are two reasons for zeroing the RF power meter:
• When any Call Processing Subsystem screen is displayed (except the ANALOG
MEAS screen) and the Call Processing Subsystem is in the connected state (Con-
nect annunciator is lit), the Test Set constantly monitors the mobile station’s trans-
mitted carrier power. If the power falls below 0.0005 Watts, the error message RF
Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will be displayed
and the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the active state. Zeroing the
power meter cancels any inherent dc offsets that may be present within the power
meter under zero-power conditions. This ensures that the Test Set makes the correct
decisions regarding the presence of the mobile stations’s RF carrier.
• Zeroing the power meter establishes a 0.0000 W reference for measuring the mobile
station’s RF power at the RF IN/OUT port. This ensures the most accurate RF pow-
er measurements of the mobile station’s RF carrier at different power levels.
2. Couple the variable-frequency notch filter to AFGen1.
This step is only required if audio testing is to be done on the mobile station. This step
couples the variable-frequency notch filter to the output frequency of AFGen1 (audio
frequency generator1). The notch filter is used when making SINAD measurements.
AFGen1 is used to generate the audio tone for the SINAD measurement. Coupling the
notch filter to the audio source ensures the most accurate measurement.
a. Press and release the blue SHIFT key and then the DUPLEX key to display the
CONFIGURE screen.
b. Position the cursor on the Notch Coupl field and select AFGen1.
130

Configure the Test Set

1. Select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu. The CALL CONTROL screen will
be displayed.
2. Verify that the Test Set configuration information is appropriate for the mobile station
to be tested. Check the following fields:
a. System Type - Select the type of cellular system to be simulated (AMPS, TACS,
JTACS).
If the System Type field was modified in step2. a. the control channel will become
active since modifying this field automatically activates the control channel. Refer to the
System Type field description, on page 128.
b. Cntl Channel - Set the control channel number to be used by the Test Set.
NOTE: If the Cntl Channel field was modified in step 2.b. the control channel will become active
since modifying this field automatically activates the control channel. Refer to the Cntl
Channel field description, on page 120.
c. Amplitude - Set the output power of the Test Set’s transmitter (that is, the output
power of the Test Set’s RF Generator).
d. SID - Enter the system identification number of the Test Set as a decimal number.
e. Chan: (right-hand field) - Enter the voice channel number which will be assigned
to the mobile station by the Test Set as either an initial voice channel assignment or
as a handoff voice channel assignment.
f Pwr Lvl: (right-hand field) - Enter the Voice Mobile Attenuation Code (VMAC).
The VMAC determines the mobile station power level to be used on the voice chan-
nel (See Chan: field description, on page 120 for more information about voice
channel).
g. SAT: (right-hand field) - Enter the SAT frequency to be used on the voice channel
(See Chan: field description, on page 120 for more information about the voice
channel).
3. Select CALL CNFG from the To Screen menu. The CALL CONFIGURATION
screen will be displayed.
4. Verify that the Test Set’s configuration information is appropriate for the mobile station
to be tested. Check the following fields:
a. CMAX - Set the number of access channels in the system. This will determine how
many channels must be scanned by the mobile station when trying to access the Test
Set. The value of this field will affect the time required for the mobile station to con-
nect with the Test Set.
131

Turn On The Test Set’s Control Channel

1. If not already done, condition the Test Set. See "Conditioning the Test Set for Call
Processing" on page 130 for further information.
2. If not already done, configure the Test Set. See "Configure the Test Set" on page 131
for further information.
3. If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed, select CALL CNTL from the To
Screen menu. The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed.
4. Select the Active field. The Active annunciator will light when the control channel
is turned on.
Register a Mobile Station

1. Ensure that the Test Set is in the active state. See "Turn On The Test Set’s Control
Channel" on page 132 for information on how to activate the Test Set.
2. Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 14, "Connecting a Mo-
bile Station to the Test Set," on page 115.
3. Turn on the mobile station.
5. Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data.
6. Select the Register field. The Register annunciator will light while the registra-
tion is in process. If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel,
the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right-hand corner of
the CALL CONTROL screen and the mobile station phone number, ESN and decoded
SCM will be displayed in the upper right-hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen.
The information in the MS Id field will be updated. The Active annunciator will
light when the registration has successfully completed.
132

Page a Mobile Station

There are two methods that can be used to page a mobile station:
• Page a mobile station that has registered with the Test Set.
• Page a mobile station that has not registered with the Test Set.
Paging a Mobile Station that has Registered with the Test Set
6. Ensure that the mobile station has registered with the Test Set. See "Register a Mobile
Station" on page 132 for information on how to register the mobile station.
7. Select the Page field. The Page annunciator will light while the Test Set pages the
mobile on the forward control channel. If the mobile station responds properly on the
reverse control channel, the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the up-
per right-hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen. The Access annunciator will
then light while the Test Set sends the mobile station an alert order on the assigned
voice channel. The mobile station should ring.
8. Press the SEND key on the mobile station. The Connect annunciator will light if the
mobile station properly signals the Test Set when the SEND key is pressed. The mobile
station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel. The voice chan-
nel assignment section will be updated: that is, any “-” in the left-hand fields will be
replaced with appropriate information.
133

Paging a Mobile Station That Has Not Registered with the Test Set
4. If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed, select CALL CNTL under the To
6. Select the lower MS Id field. Enter the mobile station identification number, either the
phone number or the MIN number depending upon what the upper MS Id field is set to.
station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel. The Voice
Channel Assignment fields will be updated: that is, any “-” in the left-hand fields
will be replaced with appropriate information.
134

Handoff a Mobile Station to a New Voice Channel

1. Ensure that the Test Set is in the connect state. See "Page a Mobile Station" on page
133 for information on how to bring a mobile station up on a voice channel.
4. Select the Chan: field. Enter a new, valid voice channel number.
5. Select the Pwr Lvl: field. Enter a new, valid mobile station power level.
6. Select the SAT: field. Enter a new, valid SAT frequency.
7. Select the Handoff field. The Access annunciator will light while the Test Set sig-
nals the mobile station with the handoff information. If the mobile responds properly,
it will stop transmitting on the current voice channel, switch to the new voice channel,
and transpond the newly assigned SAT frequency. When the Test Set detects this has
happened the Connect annunciator is lit indicating that the handoff was successful.
The Voice Channel Assignment section will be updated; that is, any “−” in the
left-hand fields will be replaced with appropriate information.
Release A Mobile Station

1. Ensure that the Test Set is in the connected state. See "Page a Mobile Station" on
page 133 for information on how to bring a mobile station up on a voice channel.
3. Select the Release field. The Test Set will signal the mobile station with a release or-
der. The mobile station will respond to the release order and cease transmission. The
Test Set will terminate transmission on the forward voice channel, and the Connect
annunciator will turn off. The Test Set will then reconfigure itself for transmission on
the forward control channel, begin to transmit system parameter overhead messages,
and the Active annunciator will light.
135

Change the Transmit Power Level of a Mobile Station

3. Position the cursor on the Display field and select Meas. The upper right-hand por-
tion of the CALL CONTROL screen will display modulation quality measurements of
the mobile station’s RF carrier. The Test Set’s data functions, such as the average
(AVG) function, can be used with any of the measurements. Measurement units can
also be changed as desired.
4. Select the Order field and select it. A Choices: menu is displayed showing the var-
ious power levels which the mobile station can be set to. Select the desired power level
from the Choices: menu. The Test Set will then signal the mobile station with an or-
der to set its power level. If the mobile responds properly, the measured value in the TX
Pocwer field will change.
6. Select the Order field. Select the desired power level from the Choices: menu. The
Access annunciator will light while the Test Set signals the mobile station with an or-
der to set its power level. If the mobile responds properly, the message REVC Return
will flash momentarily in the upper right-hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen
and then the decoded order confirmation message received from the mobile station will
be displayed. The left-hand Pwr Lvl: field will be updated with the new power level
information. The Connect annunciator will light when signaling is complete.
136

Originate a Call from a Mobile Station

6. Dial the desired phone number on the mobile station and press the SEND key on the
mobile station’s handset. The mobile station signals the Test Set on the reverse control
channel with an origination message which includes the dialed phone number, the mo-
bile station’s MIN number and the mobile station’s ESN. If the mobile station transmit-
ted properly on the reverse control channel, the message RECC Return will flash
momentarily in the upper right-hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen and then
the mobile station phone number, ESN, decoded SCM, and the called phone number
will be displayed. The Test Set will then reconfigure itself to the voice channel assign-
ments set up in the Voice Channel Assignment section of the CALL CON-
TROL screen. The Access annunciator will then light while the Test Set signals the
mobile station on the assigned voice channel. The Connect annunciator will light if
the mobile station properly signals the Test Set on the reverse voice channel. The mo-
bile station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel. The left-
hand fields will be replaced with appropriate information.
137

Send an Alert Order to a Mobile Station

3. Select the Order field. A Choices: menu is displayed showing the various orders
which can be sent to the mobile station. Select the Mainten order from the list of
choices. The Test Set will then go into the Access state and signal the mobile station
with a maintenance order. If the mobile station is responding properly it will go into its
maintenance state as defined by the applicable cellular system standard. The left-hand
fields in the Voice Channel Assignment section will display a ‘-’ while the Test
Set is in the access state.
4. Select the Order field. A Choices: menu is displayed showing the various orders
which can be sent to the mobile station. Position the cursor next to the Alert order and
select it. The Test Set will then signal the mobile station with an alert order. If the mo-
bile station is responding properly it will alert (that is, it will ring). Press the SEND key
on the mobile station to respond to the alert order. The mobile station should exit the
maintenance state. The Test Set, upon detecting that the mobile station has exited the
maintenance state, will return to the Connect state and the left-hand subfields in the
Voice Channel Assignment section will be updated with the current voice chan-
nel assignment information.
NOTE: Applicable cellular system standards may specify a time-out period for the maintenance state.
If an Alert order is not received during this time-out period the mobile station may take some
action as defined by the standard. One such action might be to terminate the voice channel
connection. Refer to the applicable cellular system standard for specific information
138

CALL DATA Screen
CALL DATA Screen
Figure 18 The CALL DATA Screen
This screen displays the decoded reverse control channel and reverse voice
channel signaling messages received by the Test Set from the mobile station. Six
different decoded messages can be viewed on this screen. The message to be
viewed is selected using the Display Word field.
139

CALL DATA Screen
The messages which can be viewed are:

• Reverse Control Channel Messages for Paging, Origination, Orders, and Order Confir-
mation.
RECCW A - Word A - Abbreviated Address Word
RECCW B - Word B - Extended Address Word
RECCW C - Word C - Serial Number Word
RECCW D - Word D - First Word of the Called-Address
RECCW E - Word E - Second Word of the Called-Address
• Reverse Voice Channel Messages for Order Confirmation.
RVCOrdCon - Reverse Voice Channel Order Confirmation Message
The field descriptions for each of the decoded messages are given in the "CALL
DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions" on page 144.
When the CALL DATA screen is displayed and the Call Processing Subsystem is
in the connected state, the Test Set constantly monitors the mobile station’s
transmitted carrier power. If the power falls below 0.0005Watts, the error
message RF Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will be
displayed and the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the active state.
NOTE: In order to ensure that the Test Set makes the correct decisions regarding the presence of the
mobile stations’s RF carrier, the Test Set’s RF power meter should be zeroed before using the
Call Processing Subsystem. Failure to zero the power meter can result in erroneous RF power
measurements. See "Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing" on page 130 for
information on zeroing the RF Power meter manually.
140

CALL DATA Screen
[] Access
When lit, the Access annunciator indicates the Test Set is signaling the mobile
station with command information on the forward voice channel. This is a
transitory state.
microphone is open.
Active
[] Active
When lit, the Active annunciator indicates that the control channel of the Test
Set is turned on. If this annunciator is lit, the base station is transmitting system
parameter overhead messages on the assigned control channel. If the annunciator
is not lit the base station is not active.
NOTE: The Test Set may still be outputting a modulated RF carrier but the Test Set’s firmware is not
active and no communication can occur between a mobile station and the Test Set.
[] Connect
When lit, the Connect annunciator indicates the mobile station is connected to
the Test Set on a voice channel.
141

CALL DATA Screen
Display Word
This field is used to select the desired reverse control channel or reverse voice
channel message to be viewed.
Handoff
Order
This field is used to send an order on the forward voice channel to the mobile
station. The orders available are:
• Change Power to Power Level 0 - 7
Maintenance (puts the mobile station in maintenance mode)
• Alert (alerts the mobile station)
station select the Order field. A list of choices is displayed. Select the desired
order from the Choices: menu. Once the selection is made, a mobile station
control message is sent to the mobile station. The Access annunciator will light
momentarily while the Test Set is sending the mobile station control message.
NOTE: A mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the Test Set (that
is, the Connect annunciator must be lit) before you can attempt to send an order to a
mobile station.
Page
This field is used to initiate a page to the mobile station connected to the Test Set.
The Test Set must be in the active state (that is, the Active annunciator must be
lit) and the MS Id information field on the CALL CONTROL screen must be
correct before you can attempt to page a mobile station.
[] Page
142

CALL DATA Screen
Register
This field is used to initiate a registration of the mobile station connected to the
Test Set. The Test Set must be in the active state (that is, the Active annunciator
lit) before you can attempt to register a mobile station.
[] Register
to the Test Set is being commanded to register with the base station.
Release
This field is used to terminate an active voice channel connection to the mobile
143

CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions

This section describes the individual data fields contained in each of the decoded
reverse control channel and reverse voice channel messages.
RECCW A Message Fields
Figure 19 RECCW A Message Fields
F
This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station.
• A ‘1’ indicates that this is the first word.
• A ‘0’ is displayed for all subsequent words.
NAWC
This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile
station.
T
This field displays the message type received from the mobile station.
• Set to ‘1’ to identify the message as an origination or an order.
• Set to ‘0’ to identify the message as an order response or page response.
144

S
This field displays whether the serial number word is received from the mobile
station.
• Set to ‘1’ if the serial number word is sent.
• Set to ‘0’ if the serial number word is not sent.
E
This field displays the extended address word received from the mobile.
• Set to ‘1’ if the extended address word is sent.
• Set to ‘0’ if the extended address word is not sent.
RSVD
This field is reserved for future use.
SCM
This field displays the mobile station’s received station class mark.
MIN1
This field displays the first part of the mobile identification number received from
the mobile station.
Parity
This field displays the parity of the transmitted data.
145

RECCW B Message Fields
Figure 20 RECCW B Message Fields
F
NAWC
This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile.
LOCAL
This field displays the local control field. This field is specific to each system. The
ORDER field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted by the Test
Set.
ORDQ
This field displays the received order qualifier. The field qualifies the order
confirmation to a specific action.
ORDER
This field displays the Order field and identifies the order type received by the
Test Set.
146

LT
This field displays the last-try code field.
RSVD
Reserved for future use.
MIN2
This field displays the second part of the mobile identification number received by
the Test Set.
Parity
This field displays the parity of the received data.
147

RECCW C Message Fields
Figure 21 RECCW C Message Fields
F
NAWC
Serial
This field displays the serial number of the mobile station.
Parity
148

RECCW D Message Fields
Figure 22 RECCW D Message Fields
F
NAWC
Dig 1 through Dig 8

These fields display digits 1 through 8 of the phone number dialed on the mobile
station.
Parity
149

RECCW E Message Fields
Figure 23 RECCW E Message Fields
F
NAWC
Dig 9 through Dig 16

These fields display digits 9 through 16 of the phone number dialed on the mobile
station.
Parity
150

RVCOrdCon Message Fields
Figure 24 RVCOrdCon Message Fields
F
NAWC
T
This field displays the message type received from the mobile station.
• Set to ‘1’ to identify the message as an origination or an order.
• Set to ‘0’ to identify the message as an order response or page response.
Local
This field displays the local control field. This field is specific to each system. The
ORDER field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted by the Test
Set.
151

ORDQ
This field displays the received order qualifier. The field qualifies the order
confirmation to a specific action.
Order
This field displays the Order field and identifies the order type received by the
Test Set.
RSVD
Parity
152

Using the CALL DATA Screen
To View the Decoded Reverse Channel Words from a Mobile Station Registration
2. If not already done, ensure that the Test Set is properly configured. See "Configure the
Test Set" on page 131 for further information.
5. If the CALL DATA screen is not displayed, select CALL DATA from the To Screen
menu. The CALL DATA screen will be displayed.
is turned on.
7. Select the Register field. The Register annunciator will light while the registra-
tion is in process. If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel,
the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right-hand corner of
the CALL CONTROL screen. The Active annunciator will light when the registra-
tion has successfully completed.
8. Select the Display Word field. A list of reverse channel words which can be dis-
played will appear in a Choices: menu. Select the desired word from the list of
choices. The decoded contents for each of the fields in the selected word will be dis-
played in the lower portion of the display.
9. If a word is chosen which was not part of the decoded reverse channel message stream,
all the fields will be blank when it is displayed.
10. See "CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions" on page 144 for a descrip-
tion of each of the available reverse channel words.
Step 7. and Step 8. in the above procedure can be reversed, that is, the desired
word can be selected first, then the mobile station can be registered. If the
registration is successful, the contents of each display word contained in the
reverse control channel’s message stream will be updated when the decoding is
complete.
The registration does not have to happen while you are viewing the CALL DATA screen.
When the CALL DATA screen is viewed, the contents of the display words will be the
decoded data from the last successful call processing function (registration, origination,
page, release, order).
153

To View the Decoded Reverse Channel Words from a Mobile Station Page
There are two methods that can be used to view the decoded RVCC words from a
mobile station page:
• View the decoded RVCC words from a page for a mobile station that has registered
with the Test Set
• View the decoded RVCC words from a page for a mobile station that has not registered
with the Test Set
Viewing the Decoded Reverse Channel Words from a Page to a Mobile Station that
has Registered with the Test Set
2. If not already done, ensure that the Test Set is properly configured. See "Configure the
Test Set" on page 131 for further information.
5. If the CALL DATA screen is not displayed, select CALL DATA under the To Screen
is turned on.
7. Ensure that the mobile station has registered with the Test Set. See "Register a Mobile
Station" on page 132 for information on how to register the mobile station.
station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel.
10. Select the Display Word field. A list of reverse channel words appears in a Choic-
es: menu. Select the desired word from the list of choices. The decoded contents for
each of the fields in the selected word will be displayed in the lower portion of the dis-
play.
NOTE: If a word is chosen which was not part of the decoded reverse channel’s message stream, all
the fields will be blank when it is displayed.
See "CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions" on page 144 for a descrip-
154

word can be selected first, then the mobile station can be paged. If the page is
successful, the contents of each display word contained in the reverse control
channel’s message stream will be updated when the decoding is complete.
The page does not have to happen while you are viewing the CALL DATA
screen. When the CALL DATA screen is viewed, the contents of the display
words will be the decoded data from the last successful call processing function
(registration, origination, page, release, order).
Viewing the Decoded Reverse Channel Words from a Page to a Mobile Station That
Has Not Registered with the Test Set
2. If not already done, configure the Test Set See "Configure the Test Set" on page 131
6. Select the lower MS Id field. Enter the mobile station identification number, either the
phone number or the MIN number depending upon what the upper MS Id field is set to.
7. Select CALL DATA from the To Screen menu. The CALL DATA screen will be
displayed.
is turned on.
station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel.
155

Step 9. and step 11. in the above procedure can be reversed, that is - the desired
word can be selected first, then the mobile station can be paged. If the page is
The page does not have to happen while you are viewing the CALL DATA
words will be the decoded data from the last successful call processing function
(registration, origination, page, release, order).
To View the Decoded Reverse Channel Words From a Mobile Station Handoff
5. Ensure that the Test Set is in the Connect state. See "Page a Mobile Station" on
6. If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed, Select CALL CNTL from the To
7. Select the Chan: field and enter a new, valid voice channel number from the choices
provided.
8. Select the Pwr Lvl: field and enter a new, valid mobile station power level.
9. Select the SAT: field and enter a new, valid SAT frequency.
10. Select CALL DATA from the To Screen menu. The CALL DATA screen will be
displayed.
it will stop transmitting on the current voice channel, switch to the new voice channel
assignment, and transpond the new SAT frequency assignment. When the Test Set de-
tects this has happened, the Connect annunciator lights indicating the handoff was
successful.
156

13. If a word is chosen which was not part of the decoded reverse channel’s message
stream, all the fields will be blank when it is displayed.
See "CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions" on page 144 for a
description of each of the available reverse channel words.
Step 11. and step 12. in the above procedure can be reversed, that is - the desired
word can be selected first, then the mobile station can be handed off. If the
handoff is successful, the contents of each display word contained in the reverse
control channel’s message stream will be updated when the decoding is complete.
The handoff does not have to happen while you are viewing the CALL DATA
words will contain the decoded data from the last successful call processing
function (registration, origination, page, release, order).
157

To View the Decoded Reverse Channel Words from a Mobile Station Release
6. Select CALL DATA under the To Screen menu. The CALL DATA screen will be
displayed.
7. Select the Release field. The Test Set will signal the mobile station with a release or-
der. The mobile station will respond to the release order and cease transmission. The
Test Set will terminate transmission on the forward voice channel and the Connect
annunciator will turn off. The Test Set will then reconfigure itself for transmission on
the forward control channel, begin to transmit system parameter overhead messages
and the Active annunciator will light.
played will appear in a Choices: menu. Select the desired word from the list of choices.
The decoded contents for each of the fields in the selected word will be displayed in the
lower portion of the display.
Step 7. and step 8. in the above procedure can be reversed, that is, the desired
word can be selected first, then the mobile station can be released. If the release is
The release does not have to happen while you are viewing the CALL DATA
158

To View the Decoded Reverse Channel Words from an Order to Change the Transmit Power
Level of a Mobile Station
6. If the CALL DATA screen is not displayed, select CALL DATA under the To Screen
7. Select the Order field and select it. A Choices: menu is displayed showing the var-
ious power levels which the mobile station can be set to. Select the desired power level.
The Access annunciator will light while the Test Set signals the mobile station with
an order to set its power level. If the mobile responds properly, the message REVC Re-
turn will flash momentarily in the upper right-hand corner of the CALL CONTROL
screen. The Connect annunciator will light when signaling is complete.
played will be presented. Position the cursor on the desired word and select it. The de-
coded contents for each of the fields in the selected word will be displayed in the lower
portion of the display.
word can be selected first, then the mobile station can be sent an order to change
transmit power level. If the order is successful, the contents of each display word
contained in the reverse control channel’s message stream will be updated when
the decoding is complete.
The ordered to change transmit power does not have to happen while you are
viewing the CALL CONTROL screen. When the CALL DATA screen is viewed,
the contents of the display words will be the decoded data from the last successful
call processing function (registration, origination, page, release, order).
159

To View The Reverse Channel Words From a Mobile Station Origination

is turned on.
7. Dial the desired phone number on the mobile station and press the SEND key on the
mobile station’s handset. The mobile station signals the Test Set on the reverse control
channel with an origination message which includes the dialed phone number, the mo-
bile station’s MIN number and the mobile station’s ESN. If the mobile station transmit-
ted properly on the reverse control channel, the message RECC Return will flash
momentarily in the upper right-hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen. The Test
Set will then reconfigure itself to the voice channel assignments set up in the Voice
Channel Assignment section of the CALL CONTROL screen. The Access an-
nunciator will then light while the Test Set signals the mobile station on the assigned
voice channel. The Connect annunciator will light if the mobile station properly sig-
nals the Test Set on the reverse voice channel. The mobile station is now connected to
the Test Set on the assigned voice channel.
played will be presented. Position the cursor on the desired word and select it. The de-
coded contents for each of the fields in the selected word will be displayed in the lower
portion of the display.
word can be selected first, then a mobile station origination can performed. If the
origination is successful, the contents of each display word contained in the
reverse control channel’s message stream will be updated when the decoding is
complete.
The origination does not have to happen while you are viewing the CALL DATA
screen.When the CALL DATA screen is viewed, the contents of the display
160

CALL BIT Screen
CALL BIT Screen
Figure 25 The CALL BIT Screen
The CALL BIT screen is designed to give an advanced user the capability to
modify the contents of the forward control channel and forward voice channel
signaling messages that are used in all processing messaging protocol. A
messaging protocol is defined as the sequence of messages sent from the Test Set
to the mobile station to perform a desired action, such as registering a mobile
station. Modifying the contents of one or more messages may be required for
testing the robustness of a mobile station’s call processing algorithms or for new
product development.
Using the CALL BIT screen requires expert knowledge of the call processing
messaging protocols used in the system selected in the System Type field on the
CALL CONTROL screen.
161

CALL BIT Screen
The CALL BIT screen should not be used to change any parameter that can be set
on any other Call Processing Subsystem screen. The contents of the applicable
fields on the CALL CONTROL screen and the CALL CONFIGURE screen are
not updated to reflect any changes made while using the CALL BIT screen. There
is no coupling between the CALL BIT screen and the Test Set.
For example: changing the value of the SAT color code field (SCC) in the forward
control channel mobile station control message (MS IntVCh) does not change the
setting of the SAT: field on the CALL CONTROL screen.
When using the CALL BIT screen the user is responsible for setting the contents
of all messages used in a messaging protocol. When using the CALL BIT screen,
the Call Processing Subsystem sends the correct messages at the correct times as
defined in the applicable industry standard. Message content is the responsibility
of the user.
When the CALL BIT screen is displayed and the Call Processing Subsystem is in
the connected state, the Test Set constantly monitors the station’s transmitted
carrier power. If the Power falls below 0.0005 Watts, the error message RF
Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will be displayed and the
Test Set will terminate the call and return to the active state.
information on manually zeroing the RF Power meter.
The field descriptions for each of the messages are given in the "CALL BIT
Screen Message Field Descriptions" on page 167.
162

CALL BIT Screen
Message Contents that can be Modified Using the CALL BIT screen
The contents of eleven different messages can be modified from this screen. The
message to be modified is selected using the Set Message field. The eleven
messages whose contents can be modified are:
• Forward Control Channel Messages for Paging, Origination, Order Confirmation, and
Orders.
• SPC WORD1 - System Parameter Overhead Message Word 1
• SPC WORD2 - System Parameter Overhead Message Word 2
• ACCESS - Access Type Parameters Global Action Message
• REG INC - Registration Increment Global Action Message
• REG ID - Registration ID Message
• C-FILMESS - Control-Filler Message
• MS WORD1 - FCC mobile station control message Word 1- Abbreviated Address
Word
• MS IntVCh - FCC mobile station control message Word 2- Extended Address-
Word - Voice Channel Assignment
• MSMessOrd - FCC mobile station control message Word 2- Extended Address
Word - Order
• FVC V Mes - FVC Mobile Station Control Voice Channel Assignment Message
• FVC O Mes - FVC Mobile Station Control Order Message
[] Access
When lit, the Access annunciator indicates that the Test Set is signaling the
mobile station with command information on the forward voice channel. This is a
transitory state.
microphone is open.
Active
163

CALL BIT Screen
[] Active
When lit, the Active annunciator indicates that the control channel of the Test
Set is turned on. If this annunciator is lit the base station is transmitting system
parameter overhead messages on the assigned control channel. If the annunciator
is not lit the base station is not active (note that the Test Set may still be outputting
a modulated RF carrier but the Test Set’s firmware is not active and no
communication can occur between a mobile station and the Test Set).
[] Connect
When lit, the Connect annunciator indicates that the mobile station is connected
to the Test Set on a voice channel.
Data Spec
This field is used to determine how the contents of the signaling messages are
built.
• Std -Use the signaling formats defined in the applicable industry standard to build the
forward control channel and forward voice channel signaling messages. Use the
contents of the applicable fields on the CALL CONTROL screen and the CALL
CONFIGURE screen to obtain information necessary to build the messages. Whenever
a signaling message is used, update the contents of all fields in that message on the
CALL BIT screen.
• Bits -Use the bit patterns as set on the CALL BIT screen to build all forward control
channel and forward voice channel signaling messages. For any call processing
function (that is, setting the message stream on the active control channel, registering
the mobile station, paging the mobile station, handing off the mobile station or releasing
the mobile station) the user is responsible for setting the contents of all signaling
messages used in that function. The Call Processing Subsystem uses the messaging
protocol as defined in the applicable industry standard.
164

CALL BIT Screen
NOTE: The contents of the applicable fields on the CALL CONTROL screen and the CALL
CONFIGURE screen are not updated to reflect any changes made while in the Bits mode.
There is no coupling between the Bits mode and the Test Set. For example: if a mobile station
was actively connected to the Test Set on a voice channel and the user changed the CHAN field
on the forward voice channel mobile station control message (FVC V Mes) and sent that
message to the mobile station, the mobile station would change its voice channel assignment.
However, the Test Set will stay on the voice channel assignment specified in the Chan: field
on the CALL CONTROL screen. This situation will result in a dropped call. The Bits mode
should not be used to change any parameter that can be set on any other Call Processing
Subsystem screen.
Handoff
This field is used to initiate a handoff from the current voice channel assignments
to a new set of voice channel assignments. The voice channel number to hand the
mobile station off to, the initial power level to use on the new voice channel, and
the SAT tone frequency to transpond on the new voice channel are specified using
the Chan:, Pwr Lvl:, and SAT: fields in the Voice Channel Assignment
section of the CALL CONTROL screen.
Order
This field is used to send an order type mobile station control message on the
forward voice channel to the mobile station. The orders available are:
• Change Power to Power Level 0 - 7
• Maintenance (put the mobile station in maintenance mode)
• Alert (alert the mobile station)
station select the Order field. A list of choices is displayed. Select the desired
order from the Choices: menu. Once the selection is made, a Mobile Station
Control Message is sent to the mobile station. The Access annunciator will light
momentarily while the Test Set is sending the mobile station control message.
165

CALL BIT Screen
NOTE: A mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the Test Set (that
is, the Connect annunciator lit) before you can attempt to send an order to a mobile
station.
Page
This field is used to initiate a page to the mobile station connected to the Test Set.
The Test Set must be in the active state (that is, Active annunciator must be lit)
and the MS Id information field on the CALL CONTROL screen must be correct
before you can attempt to page a mobile station.
[] Page
Register
This field is used to initiate a registration of the mobile station connected to the
Test Set. The Test Set must be in the active state (that is, the Active annunciator
must be lit) before you can attempt to register a mobile station.
[] Register
to the Test Set is being commanded to register with the base station.
Release
This field is used to terminate an active voice channel connection to the mobile
Set Message
This field is used to select the desired forward control channel or forward voice
channel message to be modified.
166

CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions

This section describes the individual data fields contained in each of the forward
control channel and forward voice channel messages.
SPC WORD1 Message Fields
Figure 26 SPC WORD1 Message Fields
T1T2
This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation, an order, or a
called address message.
DCC
This field sets the digital color code.
SID1
First part of the system identification field. The field contains the decimal
equivalent of the 14 most significant bits of the system identification number.
RSVD
167

NAWC
This field displays the number of additional words coming.
OHD
This field displays the overhead message type.
• A ‘100’ indicates a global action message.
• A ‘110’ indicates that this is the first word of the system overhead parameter message.
• A ‘111’ indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message.
Parity
Parity field. The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user. The Test Set
calculates the parity bits.
168

SPC WORD2 Message Fields
Figure 27 SPC WORD2 Message Fields
T1T2
DCC
Digital color code field.
S
This field displays whether the serial number word is sent to the mobile station.
• Set to ‘1’ if the serial number word is sent.
• Set to ‘0’ if the serial number word is not sent.
E
This field displays the extended address word sent to the mobile.
• Set to ‘1’ if the extended address word is sent.
• Set to ‘0’ if the extended address word is not sent.
REGH
Registration field for home stations.
169

REGR
Registration field for roaming stations.
DTX
Discontinuous transmission field.
N-1
N is the number of paging channels in the system.
RCF
Read-control-filler field.
CPA
Combined paging/access field.
CMAX-1
CMAX is the number of access channels in the system.
END
End indication field.
• Set to 1 to indicate the last word of the overhead message train.
• Set to 0 if not the last word.
OHD
• A ‘110’ indicates that this is the first word of the system overhead parameter message.
Parity
170

ACCESS Message Fields
Figure 28 ACCESS Message Fields
T1T2
DCC
ACT
Global Action Field.
BIS
Busy-Idle status field.
171

RSVD
Reserved for future use, all bits must be set as indicated.
END
OHD
• A ‘110’ indicates this is the first word of the system parameter overhead parameter
message.
Parity
172

REG INC Message Fields
Figure 29 REG INC Message Fields
T1T2
DCC
ACT
Global Action Field.
REGINCR
Registration increment field.
RSVD
173

END
OHD
message.
Parity
174

REG ID Message Fields
Figure 30 REG ID Message Fields
T1T2
DCC
REGID
Registration ID field.
END
175

OHD
message.
Parity
176

C-FILMESS Message Fields
Figure 31 C-FILMESS Message Fields
T1T2
DCC
F1
Control filler message field 1. All bits must be set as indicated.
CMAC
Control mobile attenuation field. Indicates the mobile station power level
associated with reverse control channel.
RSVD1
F2
177

RSVD2
F3
WFOM
Wait-for-overhead-message field.
F4
OHD
message.
Parity
178

MS WORD1 Message Fields
Figure 32 MS WORD1 Message Fields
T1T2
DCC
MIN1
First part of the mobile identification number field.
Parity
179

MSMessOrd Message Fields
Figure 33 MSMessOrd Message Fields
T1T2
SCC
SAT color code field.
MIN2
Second part of the mobile identification number field.
RSVD
180

LOCAL
This field is specific to each system. The ORDER field must be set to local control
for this field to be interpreted.
ORDQ
The order qualifier field qualifies the order confirmation to a specific action.
ORDER
This field identifies the order type.
Parity
181

MS IntVCh Message Fields
Figure 34 MS IntVCh Message Fields
T1T2
SCC
SAT color code field.
MIN2
Second part of the mobile identification number field.
VMAC
This field displays the voice mobile attenuation code. It shows the mobile
station’s power level associated with the designated voice channel.
CHAN
Channel number field. Indicates the designated voice channel.
Parity
182

FVC O Mes Message Fields
Figure 35 FVC O Mes Message Fields
T1T2
SCC
SAT color code for new channel.
PSCC
Present SAT color code. Indicates the SAT color code associated with the present
channel.
RSVD
LOCAL
Local control field. This field is specific to each system. The ORDER field must
be set to local control for this field to be interpreted.
183

ORDQ
Order qualifier field. Qualifies the order to a specific action.
ORDER
Order field. Identifies the order type.
Parity
184

FVC V Mes Message Fields
Figure 36 FVC V Mes Message Fields
T1T2
SCC
SAT color code for new channel.
PSCC
Present SAT color code. Indicates the SAT color code associated with the present
channel.
RSVD
VMAC
This field displays the voice mobile attenuation code. It shows the mobile station
power level associated with the designated voice channel.
185

CHAN
Channel number field. Indicates the designated voice channel.
Parity
186

Using the CALL BIT Screen
Selecting The Message Content Generation Method

The contents (i.e. bit patterns) of the signaling messages sent to the mobile station
on the forward control channel and the forward voice channel are generated using
one of two methods. Method 1 uses the formats defined in the applicable industry
standard to build the contents of the signaling messages. Method 2 uses the bit
patterns which the user defines on the CALL BIT screen to build the contents of
the signaling messages.
The Data Spec field on the CALL BIT screen determines which method will be
used to build the contents of the signaling messages.
• Std -The Test Set will use the signaling formats defined in the applicable industry
standard to build the forward control channel and forward voice channel signaling
messages. The Test Set will use the contents of the applicable fields on the CALL
CONTROL screen and the CALL CONFIGURE screen to obtain information
necessary to build the messages. Whenever a signaling message is used, the Test Set
will update the contents of all fields in that message on the CALL BIT screen.
• Bits -Use the bit patterns as set on the CALL BIT screen to build all forward control
channel and forward voice channel signaling messages. For any call processing
function (that is, setting the message stream on the active control channel, registering
the mobile station, paging the mobile station, handing off the mobile station or releasing
the mobile station) the user is responsible for setting the contents of all signaling
messages used in that function. The Call Processing Subsystem uses the messaging
protocol as defined in the applicable industry standard.
NOTE: The contents of the applicable fields on the CALL CONTROL screen and the CALL
CONFIGURE screen are not updated to reflect any changes made while in the Bits mode.
There is no coupling between the Bits mode and the Test Set. For example: if a mobile station
was actively connected to the Test Set on a voice channel and the user changed the CHAN field
on the forward voice channel mobile station control message (FVC V Mes) and sent that
message to the mobile station, the mobile station would change its voice channel assignment.
However, the Test Set will stay on the voice channel assignment specified in the Chan: field
on the CALL CONTROL screen. This situation will result in a dropped call. The Bits mode
should not be used to change any parameter that can be set on any other Call Processing
Subsystem screen.
187

System Operation When Data Spec Field Set to Std

When the Data Spec field is set to Std the Test Set builds the signaling
messages by first examining the fields which contain the information needed to
build the messages (i.e. SID, BIS, SAT Tone, VMAC, etc.). After obtaining the
necessary information the Test Set builds the bit patterns according to the
signaling formats specified in the applicable industry standard.
For example: if the type of cellular system being emulated is AMPS and the SID
field on the CALL PROC screen was set to 231, the SID1 field in the System
Parameter Overhead Message (SPC WORD1) would be set to 00000001110011
(the 14 most significant bits of the system identification number) as defined by the
EIA/TIA-553 Mobile Station - Land Station Compatibility Specification.
When the Data Spec field is set to Std, the contents of the applicable
message(s) on the CALL BIT screen are updated with the bit patterns generated
using the signaling formats defined in the applicable industry standard whenever
that signaling message is sent to the mobile station. This feature allows a user to
set the Data Spec field to Std, select a message of interest, perform a call
processing function, and view the bit patterns generated using the signaling
formats defined in the applicable industry standard.
It is important to note individual messages can be used more than once during a
messaging protocol. The contents of any message viewed on the CALL BIT
screen when the Data Spec field is set to Std will reflect the message contents
for the last time the message was used in a messaging protocol.
For example: if the Call Processing Subsystem is in the active state and the user
selects the Register field, a registration message will be sent to the mobile
station. When the registration completes the Call Processing Subsystem returns to
the active state. The contents of some messages (such as the System Parameter
Overhead Message Word 1) will reflect the correct settings for the active state, not
the register state, since the messages are currently being used in the active state.
188

System Operation When Data Spec Field Set to Bits

When the Data Spec field is set to Bits, the Test Set builds the signaling
messages using only the bit patterns set on the CALL BIT screen whenever a call
processing function is executed which uses any of the available messages. The
Test Set calculates the contents of the Parity field using the coding algorithms
specified in the industry standard for the selected system (that is, the system
specified in the System Type field on the CALL CONTROL screen).
By definition, the Test Set must meet the timing requirements of the industry
standard for the selected system. Therefore, depending upon the state of the Call
Processing Subsystem (i.e. Active, Register, Page, Access, or Connect) and the
frequency with which a particular call processing protocol uses a particular
message, it may not be possible to modify the contents of more than one field in a
message before it is sent to the mobile station.
For example: in the AMPS system, the system parameter overhead message must
be sent every 0.8 +/- 0.3 seconds on the forward control channel. Given this
timing requirement it is highly unlikely that, while in the active state, a user could
modify more than one field before the message was sent to the mobile station.
There is no functionality in the Test Set to allow an entire message to be modified
and then inserted into a messaging protocol at a specific location at a specific
time. This functionality requires a protocol analyzer.
When in the Bits mode the Test Set provides the messaging protocol for the user
(that is, for a desired call processing function the correct message(s) will be sent at
the correct time(s) according to the standard). It is the responsibility of the user to
generate the contents of all the messages which will be used in a particular call
processing function.
For example: if the Call Processing Subsystem was in the active state and the
operator wished to register the mobile station from the Bits mode, the user would
have to set the contents of all the messages used in the registration before
selecting the Register field to start the registration process.
NOTE: No error checking is done on the bit patterns. The bit patterns are used but are not checked
against any industry standard. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the bit patterns
set in the CALL BIT screen are correct when the Data Spec field is set to Bits.
Unexpected operation of the mobile station can occur if the contents of the signaling messages
are incorrect.
189

Changing the Content of a Message Field

Perform the following steps to change the contents of a message field:
1. Position the cursor on the Data Spec field and select Bits.
2. Select the Set Message field. A Choices: menu is displayed listing the available
messages. Select the desired message. The message fields will be displayed on the
screen.
3. Select the desired bit field. A Choices: menu will be displayed. Using the Choic-
es: menu enter the desired bit pattern. Select Done from the Choices: menu when
the desired bit pattern has been entered.
When a message field is being modified the original contents of the field (that is -
the contents of the field before modification was started) is sent whenever the
message is used in a messaging protocol. The new contents are not used until
Done is selected from the Choices: menu. Use the CANCEL key to abort a
modification. If the CANCEL key is selected the original field contents are
restored.
NOTE: If a message field is modified while the Data Spec field is set to Std the modified contents
will be overwritten with the bit patterns generated using the signaling formats defined in the
applicable industry standard immediately after Done is selected from the Choices: menu.
190

Typical Example
The following example illustrates the use of the CALL BIT screen. In this
example an AMPS mobile station is brought up on a voice channel and then
handed off to a new voice channel assignment. The contents of the FVC V Msg
message, which was set when the first handoff occurred, is then modified from the
CALL BIT screen. The mobile station is then handed off again by sending the
modified message to the mobile station from the CALL BIT screen.
4. Select the Chan: field and enter a new, valid voice channel number.
5. Select the Pwr Lvl: field enter a new, valid mobile station power level.
6. Select the SAT: field and enter a new, valid SAT frequency.
it will stop transmitting on the current voice channel, switch to the new voice channel
assignment, and transpond the new SAT frequency assignment. When the Test Set de-
tects that this has happened the Connect annunciator is lit indicating that the handoff
was successful. The left-hand fields in the Voice Channel Assignment section
will be updated with the new voice channel assignment information.
8. Select CALL BIT from the To Screen menu. The CALL BIT screen will be dis-
played.
9. Position the cursor on the Data Spec field and select Bits.
10. Select the Set Message field and select FVC V Msg.
11. Select the VMAC field in the FVC V Msg and set it to 101 (this corresponds to a mobile
station power level of 5 - reference EIA/TIA-553 Mobile Station - Land Station Com-
patibility Specification, September 1989, page 2-2, Table 2.1.2-1).
it will stop transmitting on the current voice channel, and start transmitting on the same
channel with a power level of 5 (note that the channel assignment and SAT assignment
were not modified in this example, the mobile station simply switched to the same
channel with the same SAT assignment). When the Test Set detects that this has hap-
pened, the Connect annunciator is lit indicating that the handoff was successful. The
mobile station power level after the handoff should be power level 5.
13. Position the cursor on the Data Spec field and select Std.
191

ANALOG MEAS Screen
ANALOG MEAS Screen
Figure 37 The ANALOG MEAS Screen
This screen is used to make RF and audio measurements on the mobile station
connected to the Test Set while on an active voice channel.
The Test Set does not monitor the mobile station’s transmitted carrier power while
the ANALOG MEAS screen is displayed. If the power falls below 0.0005 Watts
no error message is displayed nor will the Test Set terminate the call while on the
ANALOG MEAS screen.
AF Anl In
This field selects the input for the Audio Frequency analyzer. Refer to the AF Anl
In field description, on page 97 for further information.
192

ANALOG MEAS Screen
AF Freq
This field is a one-of-many field used to select the type of measurement to be
made by the Audio Frequency Analyzer on the audio signal being measured.
Refer to the SINAD field description, on page 106 for descriptions of the
measurements available.
AFGen1 Freq
This field sets the output frequency of Audio Frequency Generator 1. Refer to the
AFGen1 Freq field description, on page 432 for further information.
AFGen1 To
This field has two fields:
• the upper field sets the destination port for Audio Frequency Generator 1
• FM -RF Generator FM modulator
• AM -RF Generator AM modulator
• Audio Out -AUDIO OUT connector on front panel of Test Set
• the lower field sets the:
• FM modulation deviation if the upper field set to FM
• AM modulation depth if the upper field set to AM
• amplitude of audio signal (volts RMS) at the AUDIO OUT connector if upper field
is set to Audio Out
For testing mobile stations, the upper field is normally set to FM, and the lower
field set to the desired FM deviation in kHz. Refer to the AFGen1 Freq field
description, on page 432 for further information.
Amplitude
This field sets the output power of the Test Sets’s transmitter (that is, the output
power of the Test Set’s RF Generator). Refer to the Amplitude field description,
on page 433 for further information.
De-Emphasis
This field is used to select or bypass the 750 µs de-emphasis filter network used to
condition the audio signal before being analyzed by the Audio Frequency
Analyzer. Refer to the De-Emphasis field description, on page 100 for further
information.
193

ANALOG MEAS Screen
Detector
This field is used to select the type of detector used to measure the amplitude of
the audio signal being measured. Refer to the Detector field description, on page
101 for descriptions of the detectors available.
Filter 1
This field selects one of several standard or optional audio frequency filters which
can be used to condition the audio signal before being analyzed by the Audio
Frequency Analyzer. Refer to the Filter 1 and Filter 2 field description, on
page 102 for further information.
Filter 2
This field selects one of several standard or optional audio frequency filters which
can be used to condition the audio signal before being analyzed by the Audio
Frequency Analyzer. Refer to the Filter 1 and Filter 2 field description, on
page 102 for further information.
FM Deviation
This field displays the measured FM deviation of the carrier being transmitted by
the mobile station. Four dashes (----) indicate that no carrier is present to measure.
TX Freq Error
This field displays the frequency error (error = assigned carrier frequency -
measured carrier frequency) of the carrier being transmitted by the mobile station.
Four dashes (----) indicates that there is no carrier frequency present to measure.
TX Power
This field displays the measured RF power of the carrier being transmitted by the
mobile station. Four dashes (----) indicates that there is no carrier present to
measure.
194

Using the ANALOG MEAS Screen

The ANALOG MEAS screen combines some of the Test Set’s Audio Analyzer
fields and some of the Test Set’s RF Generator fields onto one screen for the
purpose of testing the audio characteristics of the mobile station. Only those fields
which are pertinent to testing the mobile stations audio characteristics have been
combined onto the ANALOG MEAS screen. The Test Set must be in the
connected state (that is, the Connect annunciator is lit) in order to use the
ANALOG MEAS screen.
The mobile station’s speaker output must be connected to the Test Set’s AUDIO
IN connector and the mobile station’s microphone input must be connected to the
Test Set’s AUDIO OUT connector in order to use the ANALOG MEAS screen.
Refer to figure 14, "Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set," on page 115 for
connection information. If the mobile station does not have audio connections the
ANALOG MEAS screen cannot be used.
There are a wide variety of audio measurements which can be made from the
ANALOG MEAS screen. The following examples illustrate how to make a
typical mobile station receiver measurement (RF Sensitivity) and a typical mobile
station transmitter measurement (FM Hum and Noise). Refer to the HP 8920A RF
Communications Test Set Applications Handbook, section “Testing FM Radios”
for further information on using the Test Set’s Audio Analyzer to make audio
measurements.
195

To Make an RF Sensitivity Measurement

NOTE: The mobile station’s speaker output must be connected to the Test Set’s AUDIO IN and the
mobile station’s microphone input must be connected to the Test Set’s AUDIO OUT in order
to use the ANALOG MEAS screen.
6. If the ANALOG MEAS screen is not displayed, select the ANLG MEAS field from the
To Screen menu. The ANALOG MEAS screen will be displayed.
7. The following example illustrates how to make a 12 dB SINAD Receiver Sensitivity
measurement:
a. Select the AFGen1 Freq field and set it to 1 kHz.
b. Select the upper AFGen1 To field and set it to FM.
c. Select the lower AFGen1 To field and set it to 8 kHz.
d. Select the AF Anl In field and select Audio In.
e. Select the Filter 1 field and select C MESSAGE.
f. Select the Filter 2 field and select >99kHz LP.
g. Position the cursor on the De-Emphasis field and select Off.
h. Select the Detector field and select RMS.
i. Select the AF Freq measurement field and select SINAD.
j. Select the Amplitude field and begin to lower the transmitted base station voice
channel power until 12 dB SINAD is reached.
k. The mobile station might mute or drop off the air before a 12 dB SINAD is reached.
The performance of the mobile station at low RF levels is dependent upon the char-
acteristics of the mobile station (that is, what type of system it is designed for). Un-
like a real base station, the Test Set does not perform any protocol functions on the
voice channel.
196

To Make an FM Hum and Noise Measurement

NOTE: The mobile station’s speaker output must be connected to the Test Set’s AUDIO IN and the
mobile station’s microphone input must be connected to the Test Set’s AUDIO OUT in order
to use the ANALOG MEAS screen.
Ensure that the Test Set is in the connected state. See "Page a Mobile Station" on page
133 for information on how to bring a mobile station up on a voice channel.
5. If the ANALOG MEAS screen is not displayed, select the ANLG MEAS field from the
To Screen menu. The ANALOG MEAS screen will be displayed.
NOTE: It is recommended that the mobile station’s microphone be muted, if possible, when making
measurements on the mobile stations RF carrier. If the microphone is not muted it is possible
for extraneous noise to be picked up by the microphone and adversely affect the
measurements.
6. The following example illustrates how to make a FM Hum and Noise measurement:
a. Select the Amplitude field and set it to −47 dBm.
b. Select the AFGen1 Freq field and set it to 1 kHz.
c. Select the upper AFGen1 To field and set it to Audio Out.
d. Select the AF Anl In field and select FM Demod.
e. Select the Filter 1 field and select C MESSAGE.
f. Select the Filter 2 field and select >99kHz LP.
g. Position the cursor on the De-Emphasis field and select 750 us.
h. Select the Detector field and select PK+.
i. Select the measurement field and select AF Freq.
j. Select the lower AFGen1 To field and adjust the signal level until the FM Devi-
ation field on the upper portion of the CRT reads 8 kHz.
k. Select the Detector field and select RMS.
l. Select the FM Deviation field.
m. Press the blue SHIFT key, the INCR -10 key, then the ENTER key. This sets a zero
reference point.
n. Select the lower AFGen1 To field and press the ON/OFF key. This turns off the
modulating signal to the mobile station transmitter.
o. The FM Hum and Noise figure is displayed in the FM Deviation field.
197

CALL CONFIGURE Screen
Figure 38 The CALL CONFIGURE Screen
This screen is used to set some of the less commonly used Test Set configuration
parameters.
When the CALL CONFIGURE screen is displayed and the Call Processing
Subsystem is in the connect state, the Test Set constantly monitors the mobile
station’s transmitted carrier power. If the power falls below 0.0005Watts, the
error message RF Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will
be displayed and the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the active state.
198

information on zeroing the RF Power meter manually.
CMAX
The CMAX field sets the number of access channels in the system. This will
determine how many channels must be scanned by the mobile station when trying
to access the Test Set. The value of this field will affect the time required for the
mobile station to connect with the Test Set.
Detector
This field is used to select the type of detector used to measure the amplitude of
the audio signal being measured. Refer to the Detector field description, on page
101 for descriptions of the detectors available.
TX Pwr Zero
The TX Pwr Zero function establishes a 0.0000 W reference for measuring RF
power at the RF IN/OUT port. See "TX Pwr Zero" on page 427 for further
information.
CAUTION: RF power must not be applied while zeroing. Set the RF GENERATOR screen’s Amplitude
field to off to prevent internal cross-coupling into the power detector while zeroing.
199

200

7
Configure Screen
The CONFIGURE screen defines a number of general operating functions, such as date
and time, screen intensity, and beeper volume. It is also used to define some RF signal
parameters, such as RF Generator/Analyzer offset, channel standards and characteristics,
and signal loss/gain compensation.
201

Chapter 7, Configure Screen
Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
cnfgscrn.wmf
Figure 39 The Configure Screen
Antenna In
This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the ANT IN port and the
device-under-test.
Enter a positive value to indicate a gain (such as an amplifier). The Spectrum
Analyzer’s marker level (Lvl) measurement is automatically reduced by that
amount. The Spectrum Analyzer’s Ref Level is automatically decreased by the
same amount, so the trace position does not appear to change.
Enter a negative value to indicate a loss (such as cable loss). The Spectrum
Analyzer Marker’s Level (Lvl) measurement is automatically increased by that
amount. The Spectrum Analyzer’s Ref Level is automatically increased by the
same amount, so the trace position does not appear to change.
202

Field Descriptions
This field is only used when the RF Level Offset field is set to On.
See Also
RF Level Offset field description, on page 211
Base Freq (User Defined)
The Base Frequency field sets the RF Generator reference for channel 0 (zero)
when the RF Chan Std field is set to USER-DEF, and the RF Display field is
set to Chan.
Channel frequencies are calculated using the following formula:
Channel N = Base Frequency + (N)(Channel Spacing)
The Base Frequency is calculated using the following formula:
Base Frequency = Channel 1 Frequency - Channel Spacing
For example, if your multi-channel radio’s lowest receive channel frequency is

870.030 MHz and the system channel spacing is 30 KHz, you would enter 870
MHz in this field. You would also use the Chan Space and (Gen)-(Anl) fields
to tell the Test Set where other transmit and receive channel frequencies are in
relation to the base frequency, and whether or not the system is duplex.
The value of this field is only used if the RF Display field is set to Chan, and the
RF Chan Std field is set to USER-DEF.
See Also
Chan Space (User Defined) field description, on page 204
(Gen)-(Anl) field description, on page 206
RF Chan Std field description, on page 209
RF Display field description, on page 210
203

Field Descriptions
Beeper
This field changes the audio beeper volume by selecting the desired level from a
list of choices. The beeper always beeps when the instrument is turned on,
regardless of this setting.
The beeper alerts you any time a message is displayed. Since a message may be
removed from the screen before you notice it, it is better to leave the beeper on to
alert you to errors during operation.
The beeper’s volume setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Chan Space
(User Defined)
This field specifies the RF channel spacing when the RF Display field is set to
Chan, and the RF Chan Std field is set to USER-DEF.
For example, entering 25 kHz causes a 25 kHz spacing between each channel. If
the receive frequency for channel 1 is 150.500 MHz, channel 2’s receive
frequency would be 150.525 MHz.
See Also
Base Freq (User Defined) field description, on page 203
204

Field Descriptions
Date
This field specifies the current date for the internal clock. The date can be read by
a controller using HP-IB and printed on test results.
The format is MMDDYY (Month Day Year), using two digits for each term.
When entering months January through September (01-09), the leading zero is not
displayed when entered. Example; May 5, 1993 is entered as 050593, but is
displayed as 50593.
The internal clock still functions when the instrument is turned off.
Duplex Out
This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the DUPLEX OUT port and
the device-under-test.
• Enter a positive value to indicate a gain (such as an amplifier gain). The RF Generator’s
level is automatically set that amount below what is indicated in the RF Generator’s
Amplitude field. (Example; if this value is 10 dB, and the Amplitude field shows
0 dBm, the actual level out this port is −10 dBm.) The value at the output of the external
amplifier should then be at the level indicated in the Amplitude field.
• Enter a negative value to indicate a loss (such as cable loss). The RF Generator’s level
is automatically set that amount above what is indicated in the RF Generator’s Ampli-
tude field to compensate. The value at the opposite end of the cable (loss) should then
be at the level indicated in the Amplitude field; unless the resulting RF Generator
setting exceeds the maximum output level, then an error occurs: Input value out
of range. In that case, reduce the Amplitude setting, or decrease the Duplex
Out value.
Firmware
This field displays the current firmware revision for your Test Set. The revision
number is automatically changed when updated firmware is installed.
205

Field Descriptions
(Gen)-(Anl)
This field is used with the RF Offset field to specify the amount of frequency
offset between the RF Generator and RF Analyzer.
This field is not displayed when the RF Display field is set to Chan (the offset is
automatically set when using channel tuning).
See Also
"Setting an RF Generator/Analyzer Offset" on page 79
(Gen)-(Anl)
(User Defined)
This field defines the receiver-transmitter frequency offset when using User
Defined channel operation.
Use a positive value when the radio’s receive frequency is higher than the transmit
frequency (such as 45 MHz)
Use a negative value when the radio’s receive frequency is lower than the transmit
frequency (such as −45 MHz).
See Also
RF Display field description, on page 210
206

Field Descriptions
Intensity
This field adjusts the screen intensity from a setting of 1 (very dim) to 8 (bright).
If the setting is set too low, the screen can no longer be read. If you can’t read the
screen, and you don’t know where the cursor is (or even what screen is displayed),
press [PRESET], and re-access the CONFIGURE screen. The cursor
automatically goes to this field at that point. Press [8], [ENTER] to set the
maximum intensity, and re-adjust if desired.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Low Battery
This setting is used during battery (dc) operation to alert you when no front-panel
controls are used within the specified amount of time. The setting is changed by
selecting this field, then choosing the setting from a list of choices.
Notch Coupl
This field selects if the Notch Freq setting of the AF ANALYZER screen is
coupled to the AF Gen1 Freq setting. When set to None, the notch filter and AF
Generator 1 do not interact. When set to AFGen1 (coupled), the settings track each
other unless the AF Generator’s frequency is set outside the 300 Hz to 10 kHz
limits of the notch filter1
1. Optional for the HP 8921A.
207

Field Descriptions
Range Hold
These fields enable/disable several autoranging and autotuning routines.
Auto All enables these routines, providing automatic adjustment when making
AF or RF measurements.
Hold All disables these routines, requiring you to manually set the affected
settings.
The following fields are affected by the Range Hold field:
• RX/TX Cntl in the CONFIGURE screen.
• Tune Mode in the TX TEST, DUPLEX TEST, and RF ANALYZER screens.
• Input Atten in the RF ANALYZER and SPECTRUM ANALYZER screens.
• Gain Cntl in the AF ANALYZER screen. This field controls three AF gain setting
fields:
Input Gain
De-Emp Gain
Notch Gain
The Hold All setting is primarily used when the instrument is operated by
remote control, such as in an automated test system.
Unless you have very specific reasons for disabling the automatic functions, you
should set this field to Auto All when operating the instrument manually.
See Also
Programmer’s Guide
208

Field Descriptions
RF Chan Std
Use the RF channel standard field to select the channel standard for the radio-
under-test. The RF Generator’s and the RF Analyzer’s frequencies are
automatically set to correspond to the channel number entered in the RF Channel
field. RF Channel replaces the Amplitude and Tune Freq fields on several
screens when channel tuning is used.
Each standard has a prefix code that indicates what type of radio to test; mobile
station (MS) or land station (LS). For example, if you are testing an AMPS
mobile, select MS AMPS.
For the NAMPS standards, a third letter is added indicating which frequency band
is used: upper, middle, or lower. For example, when testing a mobile station using
the lower band, choose MSL NAMPS. Testing a land station using the upper band
you would select LSU NAMPS.
The USER-DEF selection is used to define your own channel assignments. When
selected, you enter the Base Freq, Chan Space, and (Gen)-(Anl) settings.
See Also
Base Freq (User Defined) field description, on page 203
209

Field Descriptions
RF Display
This field selects the format for entering the RF Generator’s and RF Analyzer’s
frequencies:
• When Freq is selected, you enter the RF Generator’s and the RF Analyzer’s
frequencies directly using the keypad or knob.
• When Chan is selected, the RF Gen Freq and Tune Freq fields on all screens are
replaced by the RF Channel field, and only the channel number is entered and
displayed.
Channel tuning eliminates the need to enter transmit and receive frequencies
directly into the Test Set. Once your radio’s RF channel standard is selected, you
only have to enter the channel number to automatically set the RF Generator and
RF Analyzer to the correct frequencies.
When channel tuning is used, the RF Analyzer is set to manual tuning. The Tune
Mode field on the TX TEST, DUPLEX TEST, and RF ANALYZER screens is no
longer displayed. As a result, the TX Freq Error measurement is displayed
(since the TX Frequency measurement is only displayed when the Tune Mode
field is set to Auto).
See Also
RF Gen Volts
This field specifies whether you want RF voltages expressed as the voltage across
a 50 ohm load, or the open circuit voltage (emf).
This setting affects the RF Generator’s and the Tracking Generator’s amplitudes.
210

Field Descriptions
RF In/Out
This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the RF IN/OUT port and the
device-under-test.
• Enter a positive value to indicate a gain (such as an amplifier gain). When the
RF IN/OUT port is used as an output, the RF Generator’s (or Tracking Generator’s) lev-
el is automatically set the specified amount below what is indicated in the RF Genera-
tor’s Amplitude field. Example; if this value is 10 dB, and the Amplitude field
shows 0 dBm, the actual level out of this port is −10 dBm.
When this port is used as an input, the TX Power measurement and Spectrum Ana-
lyzer’s Marker Level (Lvl) are automatically reduced by that amount.
• Enter a negative value to indicate a loss (such as cable loss). The RF Generator’s (or
Tracking Generator’s) level out this port is automatically set that amount above what is
indicated in the RF Generator’s Amplitude field.
When used as an input, the TX Power and the Spectrum Analyzer’s marker level
(Lvl) measurements are increased by that amount.
See Also
RF Level Offset field description, on page 211
RF Level Offset
This field enables/disables the RF level offsets entered in the RF In/Out,
Duplex Out, and Antenna In fields below it.
• When set to On, the RF Generator’s amplitude and RF Analyzer’s power measurement
are offset by the values entered in these fields.
• When set to Off, the values in these fields are ignored.
See Also
Antenna In field description, on page 202
Duplex Out field description, on page 205
211

Field Descriptions
RF Offset
This field is displayed when the RF Display field has Freq selected.
This field enables/disables the RF Generator−RF Analyzer frequency offset
specified in the (Gen)-(Anl) field below it.
When an RF offset is used, changing the RF Generator’s frequency or RF
Analyzer’s tune frequency automatically alters the other setting. On screens
where both fields are not shown (such as the RX TEST and TX TEST screens),
you will not see the corresponding field change.
See Also
"Setting an RF Generator/Analyzer Offset" on page 79
212

Field Descriptions
RX/TX Cntl
This function controls automatic screen changes between the RX TEST and TX
TEST screens during radio testing. It is divided into two fields:
The Auto/Manual field enables/disables automatic switching between the RX
TEST and TX TEST screens under certain testing conditions.
• Auto allows automatic screen changes between the RX TEST and TX TEST screens
while testing radios.
• Manual requires you to select the RX TEST or TX TEST screen when performing ra-
dio tests.
The Carrier/PTT field specifies the condition that will cause automatic screen
changes.
• Carrier causes the instrument to automatically switch from the RX TEST screen to
the TX TEST screen when an RF carrier is detected. The screen returns to RX TEST
when the carrier is no longer detected.
• PTT (Push-To-Talk) causes the instrument to automatically switch from the TX TEST
screen to the RX TEST screen when a microphone connected to the MIC/ACC connec-
tor is keyed. The screen changes back to TX TEST when the microphone is no longer
keyed.
CAUTION: The Test Set can be damaged by connecting a reverse-power signal to the DUPLEX OUT port
of >200 mW.
If Auto and Carrier are used together, the screen may continuously change
between RX TEST and TX TEST. This only occurs if the RF IN/OUT port is used
with the RF Generator Amplitude set ≥ 35 dBm (a much higher level than is
typically used for receiver tests). To prevent this problem, set the Amplitude
≤35 dBm or Off, or use the DUPLEX OUT port for the RF Generator’s output.
213

Field Descriptions
Serial No.
This field displays the serial number of the Test Set.
Time
This field sets the time-of-day for the instrument’s 24 hour clock.
(Example, 4:53 PM is entered 16:53)
The internal clock still functions when the instrument is turned off.
Total RAM
This field displays the total amount of RAM available for IBASIC programs and
save/recall registers.
214

8
Signaling Decoder Screen
215

Chapter 8, Signaling Decoder Screen
Field Descriptions for Decoder Modes
Field Descriptions for Decoder Modes

The Signaling Decoder analyzes different data-encoded signaling formats. The
format is selected in the Mode field in any of the decoder’s screens.
A list of standards for each format is displayed by selecting the Standard field in
any screen.
Separate screen and field descriptions are given for each screen. The descriptions
are listed in the following order:
• AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTACS
• CDCSS (Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System)
• Digital Paging
• DTMF (Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency) Sequence
• EDACS (Enhanced Digital Access Communications System)
• Function Generator
• LTR (Logic Trunked Radio: Registered Trademark of EF Johnson Company)
• MPT 1327
• NMT (Nordic Mobile Telephone) encoder and decoder
• Tone Sequence
The Decoder’s Signal Source

The decoder always gets its signal immediately after the de-emphasis network of
the AF Analyzer. De-emphasis can be turned on or off on the AF ANALYZER
screen, or can be controlled while using the decoder by assigning a global USER
key to the De-Emphasis field. Refer to the AF ANALYZER screen’s field
descriptions and functional block diagram in chapter 5, "AF Analyzer Screen," on
page 95.
Decoder Frequency Measurements

The decoder uses a different timebase for frequency counting than the AF
Analyzer. Therefore, their measurements may be different when measuring the
same signal (by a very small amount).
216

AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS Decoder

The AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS decoder acts like a base station receiver by
analyzing Reverse Control Channel (RECC) and Reverse Voice Channel (RVC)
message streams for various cellular telephone formats.
The decoder can also be used to analyze Forward Control Channel (FOCC) and
Forward Voice Channel (FVC) data from the base station.
Decoder Mode Differences

The AMPS-TACS and NAMPS-NTACS Decoder modes are essentially the same
for analyzing Reverse Control Channel (RECC) information. However, the Voice
Channel (RVC) information for NAMPS-NTACS is displayed differently than
AMPS-TACS information. Fields and decoder measurements that are only used
for either mode are noted in their descriptions.
Figure 40 AMPS-TACS Control/Voice and NAMPS/NTACS Control Channel Decoder
217

nmps-de1.wmf
Figure 41 The NAMPS-NTACS Voice Channel Decoder
AF Anl In
Audio frequency analyzer input selects the source of the signal to be analyzed.
overrides any changes made to this field in this screen.
Arm Meas
Arm measurement prepares the decoder to be triggered by an incoming signal.
Channel
This field selects the type of data to decode: Reverse Control Channel (Cntl), or
Reverse Voice Channel (Voice).
218

Data (hex)
(AMPS-TACS)
This display field lists the decoded data serially as it is received. This field is
labeled RECC Data (hex) for the NAMPS/NTACS mode, but performs the
identical function.
Gate Time
This field specifies how long the decoder analyzes a signal after it has been
triggered. The longer the gate time, the greater the number of bits analyzed.
If the gate time is too long, the decoder’s data buffer becomes full. A message is
displayed instructing you to decrease the gate time.
This function is not used with the NAMPS/NTACS RVC decoder.
See Also
Arm Meas field description, on page 218
Num of Bits field description, on page 220
Input Level
This field specifies the expected data signal level (after de- emphasis if used). The
higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer, the higher the trigger level is
set.
The unit-of-measure is determined by the AF Anl In setting.
The input level should be set high enough to prevent false triggering, but low
enough to allow triggering for valid signals. This you to set the input level well
below the expected level.
Also, when using de-emphasis, the Input Level setting may need to be reduced
significantly to properly decode the incoming signal. De-Emphasis is enabled/
disabled using the De-Emphasis field on the AF ANALYZER screen.
See Also
Trig Level field description, on page 221
219

Measure
(NAMPS-NTACS: RVC)
This field selects the type of decoded data to display: DSAT or DST codes,
Message data, or DTMF (Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency) tone data.
Num of Bits
This field lists the total number of bits displayed. This number is dependent on
Data Rate of the signal being decoded, the Gate Time of the decoder, and the
size of the decoder’s data buffer.
The buffer has a maximum capacity of:
• 1584 bits for decoding Reverse Voice Channel (RVC) data streams.
• 1583 bits for decoding Reverse Control Channel (RECC) data streams.
This measurement is not available for NAMPS-NTACS RVC decoding.
See Also
Gate Time field description, on page 219
Polarity
This setting is used to match the polarity of the encoded signal being analyzed.
Normal Operation. When this field is set to Norm, a logical high (1) is displayed
when a positive peak in the received signal is detected. A negative peak displays a
logical low (0).
Inverted Operation. When this field is set to Invert, a logical high (1) is
displayed when a negative peak in the received signal is detected. A positive peak
displays a logical low (0).
RECC Data (NAMPS-NTACS: RECC)

This display field lists the decoded data serially as it is received. This is the same
information that the AMPS-TACS Data (hex) measurement displays.
220

Single/Cont
This field specifies how long you want the analyzer to decode incoming signals:
• Single tells the analyzer to display the information received during one Gate Time
(or after one measurement for NAMPS-NTACS RVC data).
• Cont is used to automatically re-arm the analyzer and display the measurements on a
continual basis until Single is selected.
Stop Meas
Selecting this field stops the analyzer when making single measurements.
Trig Level
The trigger level indicates the minimum signal level required to begin a
measurement that has been “armed.” The level is adjusted by changing the Input
Level field’s setting.
enough to allow triggering for valid signals. This may require you to set the input
level well below the expected level.
Trigger Pattern (bin)

This field allows you to enter a specific bit pattern to filter displayed information.
The decoder only displays the received data when this binary pattern is
encountered immediately after triggering. This is helpful when you only want to
display messages containing very specific information.
The trigger pattern is entered as a sequence of ones, zeros, and dots. A dot will
cause the decoder to trigger for either a one or a zero in that bit position in the
received data stream.
This function is not available for decoding NAMPS-NTACS RVC information.
221

Using the AMPS/TACS, NAMPS/NTACS Decoder
Interaction With the Encoder

The encoder screen’s Data Rate field tells the decoder how fast the incoming
message is being sent. Set that field’s value before using the AMPS-TACS or
NAMPS-NTACS Decoder.
amps-de2.wmf
Figure 42 Decoding the Reverse Control Channel (RECC) Data
222

amps-de3.wmf
Figure 43 Decoding AMPS-TACS Reverse Voice Channel (RVC) Data
nmps-de2.wmf
Figure 44 Decoding NAMPS-NTACS Reverse Voice Channel (RVC) Data
223

Interpreting Decoded Data

The following information refers to all Reverse Control Channel (RECC)
measurements, and the AMPS-TACS Reverse Voice Channel (RVC)
measurements. See the next section for information about NAMPS-NTACS RVC
measurements.
After being armed, the measurement begins when the last bit of Word Sync has
been received. All RECC measurements, and the AMPS-TACS RVC
measurement, last for the period specified in the Gate Time field.
The received bits are displayed as hexadecimal (hex) characters. If the last bits
received do not complete the last hex character, the received bits are used as the
most significant bits in the character, and the remaining bit positions are filled
with zeros.
For example; if the last bits received are “01”, two zeros are added to the right to
produce the binary number 0100. The hexadecimal equivalent, 4, is displayed.
The first two hex characters of the RECC data displayed contain the 7-bit Digital
Color Code of the Seizure Precursor. The characters are right-justified so the
farthest bit to the left for the first hex character is always 0. The first word of the
RECC message begins in the third hex character of the displayed data.
All bits of the RECC and RVC data streams received after the initial Word Sync
are displayed, including Parity and additional Dotting and Word Sync sequences.
The decoder does not check for any errors in the received data stream.
224

NAMPS-NTACS Reverse Voice Channel Measurements

Three types of RVC information can be decoded; selected using the Measure
field.
• DSAT displays the 6-digit DSAT (Digital Supervisory Audio Tone) or DST (Digital
Signaling Tone) number, depending on the type of signal being received. If the received
number is not one of the 14 standard combinations (7 DSAT or 7 DST), the decoder
displays a constantly changing number until one of the standard values is detected.
• Data displays the 36 message bits and 12 parity bits of the RVC message. The mea-
surement begins when the last sync word bit is received, and ends after the last parity
bit is received. The measurement is re-triggered when the next sync word is received:
there is no gate time function for this decoder mode.
• DTMF displays Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency tone pair frequencies and on/off times.
These are tones that may be used to trigger connected equipment after a mobile-to-base
station connection has been made (such as an answering machine or voice-mail sys-
tem).
225

Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System Decoder

The Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System (CDCSS) Decoder analyzes
digital data streams used to turn squelch on and off on digitally-controlled-squelch
radios.
cdcs-de1.wmf
Figure 45 The CDCSS Sequence Decoder Screen
AF Anl In
See Also
226

Arm Meas
Arm measurement prepares the decoder to be triggered by an incoming signal
when Single is selected.
Code (oct)
This field displays all of the code word combinations from the received data
stream.
The top entry in this column is always 1 of the 83 standard (primary) industry
codes or NPC (No Primary Code). All other possible code combinations are listed
in numerical order after this entry.
If a Turn-Off Code (TOC) is measured for a full sampling period, TOC is
displayed with no other codes listed.
Data (bin)
This measurement field displays a 23-bit segment of the data stream being
received.
After 23 bits have been received, the decoder shifts the bit sequence 23 times until
all possible bit patterns have been analyzed. Any possible code words are
displayed in the Codes (oct) column. Even if no code words are found, this
field will still display the bit sequence that was received.
This field is blank if the only signal received during the decoder’s latest sampling
period is a turn-off-code.
The final bit pattern displayed will not necessarily match any of the displayed
codes, since the bits are shifted 23 times during decoding.
Data Rate
This measurement field displays the data rate in bits-per-second for the data
stream being received.
For accurate measurements, the Data Rate for the CDCSS encoder should be set
to the expected data rate for the signal being analyzed by the CDCSS decoder.
227

Input Level
This field specifies the signal level that you input (after de-emphasis if used). The
set.
enough to detect all valid zero-crossings of the incoming signal.
When using de-emphasis, the Input Level setting may need to be reduced
significantly to properly decode the incoming signal. De-emphasis is enabled/
disabled using the De-Emphasis field on the AF ANALYZER screen.
See Also
Polarity
This field is used to match the polarity of the encoded signal being analyzed.
logical low (0).
Inverted Operation. When this field is set to Invert, a logical low (0) is
displayed when a positive peak in the received signal is detected. A negative peak
displays a logical high (1).
Inverting amplifiers used in transmitters, receivers, and repeaters can cause an
inversion of the modulating digital data. If the decoded signal does not display the
expected results, change this field’s setting to see if the signal may be getting
inverted before being decoded.
228

Single/Cont
This field specifies how you want the analyzer to be armed:
• Single is used to analyze and display the decoded information once each time
Arm Meas is selected.
Stop Meas
Selecting this field stops the analyzer when making a single measurement.
Trig Level
measurement that has been “armed”. The level is adjusted by changing the
Input Level field’s setting.
229

Using the CDCSS Decoder
Using the CDCSS Decoder
AF Analyzer Settings
For proper CDCSS decoder operation, make the following AF ANALYZER
screen settings:
• Filter 1 to <20Hz HPF (Required)
• Filter 2 to 3kHz LPF (Recommended)
• Settling to Slow (Recommended)
Interpreting Decoded Data

Because CDCSS uses a continuously-repeating data stream, and there is no
framing information to tell the receiver when the code word is going to be sent,
the decoded data can result in several possible code combinations. This is why
more than one code word may be listed in the Codes (oct) column after
decoding.
230

Digital Paging Decoder

The is used to test paging system transmitters using various formats, such as
POCSAG and GSC (Golay Sequential Code). The Tune Freq field of the TX
TEST screen is typically used to tune to the pager channel to be decoded.
digi-de1.wmf
Figure 46 The Digital Paging Decoder Screen
AF Anl In
This is typically set to FM Demod for off-the air decoding of pager transmitters.
Arm Meas
Arm measurement prepares the decoder to be triggered by an incoming signal.
231

Data Display
This field displays up to three different decoded parameters after a message has
been analyzed:
Pager code - the unique pager code number or address.
Function - number representing one of the four types of signals that can be
sent.
Pager data - information sent as a numeric or alpha-numeric message. This

parameter is not displayed when tone-only formats are decoded.
Data Rate
This display field lists the data rate of the received signal in bits-per-second (bps).
This measurement relies on the digital paging encoder screen’s data rate setting.
Set the encoder’s Data Rate field to the expected incoming data rate for
accurate measurements.
See Also
Data Rate field description, on page 320
Display Page
This field is used to select a specific page of decoded data. More than one page of
decoded data may be available when a batch of messages is received during the
specified gate time. The Number of Pages field indicates how many pages were
decoded.
232

Gate Time
triggered. Up to 65 seconds of gate time can be specified. The minimum gate time
should be set long enough to allow the preamble and all necessary data bits to be
captured.
If too much data is decoded during the gate time, the decoder buffer will overflow
(an error message is displayed when this happens). Decrease the gate time if this
error is displayed.
Input Level
Enter the expected data signal level in this field. The higher the level of signal
expected by the analyzer, the higher the trigger level is set.
enough to allow triggering for valid signals (typically about 3 kHz).
De-emphasis should not be used with this signaling format. Access the AF
ANALYZER screen and set the De-Emphasis field setting to Off.
See Also
Number of Pages
See the Display Page field description, on page 232
233

Polarity
logical low (0).
Single/Cont
• Single tells the analyzer to display the information received during one gate time.
Measurements are displayed until Arm Meas is selected again.
• Cont is used to automatically re-arm the analyzer and display new measurements on a
continual basis until Single is selected. Previous measurement results are over-writ-
ten by subsequent measurements.
Stop Meas
Trig Level
measurement that has been “armed.” The level is adjusted by changing the Input
Level field setting.
234

Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Decoder

The DTMF Sequence Decoder analyzes Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency tone
sequences and displays the associated parameters.
dtmf-de2.wmf
Figure 47 The DTMF Decoder Screen
AF Anl In
Arm Meas
when making single measurements.
235

Gate Time
triggered.
Hi Tone
This for the high frequency tone in each tone pair. The measurement type is
selected by selecting the Freq field to display a list of measurement choices.
Frequency error is calculated by comparing the DTMF Encoder’s frequency
settings for each tone pair with the decoded frequencies.
See Also
"Using the DTMF Decoder" on page 240
236

Input Level
This field specifies the signal level that you input (after de-emphasis if used). The
set.
enough to allow triggering for fluctuating signal levels.
De-emphasis Effects
De-emphasis is a single-pole, low-pass filter with a 212.2 Hz corner frequency. It
is enabled/disabled using the De-Emphasis field on the AF ANALYZER screen.
(Refer to Figure 12, "AF ANALYZER Functional Block Diagram," on page 96.)
The Input Level is the expected level at the output of the de-emphasis network.
Assuming a mean DTMF frequency of approximately 1 kHz, decoding with de-
emphasis on (set to 750 µs) requires the input level to be set to 212/1000 = 0.212
times the peak deviation, or about 1/5 the incoming level of the tone.
Examples of Input Level Settings

Example 1
Peak deviation 3 kHz, De-emphasis off. Set the input level to 3 kHz.
Example 2
Peak deviation 3 kHz, De-emphasis 750 ms. Set the input level to 3×0.212 =
636 Hz
237

Lo Tone
This measurement field lists the frequency or frequency error for the low
frequency tone in each tone pair. The measurement type is selected by selecting
the Freq field to display a list of measurement choices.
Frequency error is calculated by comparing the DTMF Encoder’s frequency
settings for each tone pair with the decoded frequencies.
See Also
"Using the DTMF Decoder" on page 240
Off Time
This measurement column lists the length of time each tone pair was “off” prior to
the next tone being received.
On Time
This measurement column lists the length of time each tone pair was “on.”
Single/Cont
238

Stop Meas
Sym
The symbol column corresponds to the DTMF Encoder’s symbols assigned for
each tone pair. As each tone pair is analyzed, the corresponding symbol is listed in
this column.
The symbol assigned is based on the closest symbol frequencies to that tone pair.
239

Using the DTMF Decoder
Using the DTMF Decoder
Measurement Limits
Lo Tone: 680 - 960 Hz
Hi Tone: 1190 - 1660 Hz
Actual limits are typically slightly wider than this. However, the crossover point
between Hi and Lo tone decoding is approximately 1.1 kHz. If incoming tones
approach this point, unreliable measurements may be displayed (frequency
measurement errors and spurious off times).
240

EDACS Decoder
EDACS Decoder
This screen decodes the digital signaling data from an Ericsson GE EDACS®
(Enhanced Digital Access Communications System) transmitter. This function is
provided to test mobile radios, but it is not designed to test EDACS base stations.
Before transmitter measurements can be made, the EDACS Encoder must be set
up to provide the necessary system information. (Refer to "Using the EDACS
Encoder" on page 334 for information on setting up the EDACS Encoder.)
Four types of calls can be decoded: group, individual, emergency, and voice
guard.
edac-de1.wmf
Figure 48 The EDACS Trunked Radio Decoder Screen
AF Anl In
This field selects the source of the signal to be decoded. FM Demod is normally
used, since the data being decoded is usually the demodulated signaling data from
an EDACS transceiver.
241

EDACS Decoder
Arm Meas
Select this field to prepare the decoder to be triggered by transmitted signaling
data. When selected, the Status: field indicates Armed.
Data
This area displays the decoded call request signaling data from your transmitter.
The type of data displayed depends on the Radio/Repeater setting and the type
of message decoded.
Input Level
This field is used to set the trigger level for the decoder. The displayed Trig
Level changes as the Input Level is adjusted. This field is normally set to
1 kHz for EDACS decoding (assuming the AF Anl In field is set to FM Demod).
The units displayed (kHz, %, V) depends on the AF Anl In setting.
Polarity
This field is used to match the polarity of the data to be decoded. This field is
usually set to Norm.
See Also
Polarity field description, on page 331
242

EDACS Decoder
Radio/Repeater
This field specifies whether the decoder will trigger on the received sync word of
a mobile signal (Radio), or on the sync word from a repeater (Repeater). It also
specifies how the received data will be interpreted.
The repeater function is not fully implemented at this time to provide base station
decoding.
RX Test
When Send is selected, the Control Channel Site ID message is output at the RX
Frequency specified in the Control Channel settings on the EDACS Encoder
screen.
Single/Cont
This field specifies how you want to arm the decoder.
• Single requires you to manually arm the decoder (using the Arm Meas field) before
each measurement is made.
• Cont automatically arms the decoder to make a measurement, and re-arms the decoder
after a measurement is made.
To dis-arm the decoder in single mode, select the Stop Meas field. The Stop
Meas function is disabled when Cont is selected.
Standard
The encoder’s Data Rate field must be set to the data rate expected from the
radio or the repeater being decoded. This is best done by selecting the
corresponding standard on the encoder’s screen.
See Also
Standard field description, on page 332
Stop Meas
This field is used to dis-arm the decoder when making single measurements. It is
not used when making continuous (Cont) measurements.
243

Using the EDACS Decoder
EDACS Transmitter Testing

When the mobile is turned on, it automatically tunes to its pre-programmed
control channel frequency. The Test Set generates the control channel signal using
the RF Generator and the Control Channel fields of the EDACS Encoder.
When the mobile is receiving the control channel, the transmitter can be keyed to
send a call request message to go to a working channel. (The working channel
settings are specified in the EDACS Encoder.)
After the mobile starts transmitting, the EDACS Decoder displays the decoded
signaling data. You can then access the DUPLEX TEST screen to make
modulation and RF carrier measurements.
Transmitter Test Procedure

This procedure establishes a control channel connection between the Test Set and
your mobile. After the mobile locks to the control channel, the decoder is armed
and the mobile’s transmitter is keyed to make measurements.
NOTE: Each EDACS radio is pre-programmed to access a specific control channel and one or more
working channels. Other mobile and system identification information is also programmed
into the radio. You cannot test an EDACS mobile without first entering these values into the
EDACS Encoder screen.
CAUTION: Before testing your transmitter, read the MAX PWR limit printed under the Test Set’s RF IN/
OUT port. Exceeding this limit could damage your Test Set.
Preset the Test Set

Press the PRESET key on the Test Set to set all controls to a known state and
display the RX TEST screen.
Connect the Mobile to the Test Set

Connect the antenna port of the mobile to the RF IN/OUT port of the Test Set.
244

Define the Control Channel Settings

1. Turn AF Generator 1 off by positioning the cursor in front of the 3.00 value of the
AFGen1 To field and pressing the ON/OFF key.
2. Select ENCODER from the To Screen menu.
3. Select the EDACS Mode to display the EDACS Encoder.
4. Select the Data Rate using the Standard field. (4800 or 9600 bps)
5. Enter the Control Channel settings.
• The Number is your system’s control channel number.
• The RX Frequency is the control channel’s receive frequency for your mobile.
• The TX Frequency is the control channel’s transmit frequency for your mobile.
6. Enter the Working Channel settings.
• The Number is the working channel number you want the mobile to be sent to.
• The RX Frequency is the mobile’s receive frequency for the selected working
channel.
• The TX Frequency is the mobile’s transmit frequency for the selected working
channel.
7. Enter the Logical ID number.
8. Enter the Group ID number.
9. Enter the Site ID number.
Prepare the Decoder for Transmitter Measurements

1. Turn the SQUELCH control on the Test Set fully clockwise.
2. Select DECODER from the To Screen menu to access the EDACS Decoder.
3. Set the AF Anl In field to FM Demod to demodulate the signal from your transmit-
ter.
4. Set the Input Level field to about one third of the expected deviation. (For example,
if your transmitter’s deviation is 3 kHz, set the Input Level to about 1 kHz.)
5. Select the Arm Meas field to prepare the decoder. The Status: field should indicate
Armed.
6. Select the Send field (under RX Test). This outputs the control channel information
specified in the EDACS Encoder.
The mobile should indicate that it is receiving the control channel data.
245

Make Basic Transmitter Measurements

1. Key the mobile’s transmitter and verify that its transmit indicator is on. The call type,
Group ID, and Logical ID information transmitted by your mobile is displayed under
the Data field.
2. With the transmitter still keyed, press the DUPLEX key to access the DUPLEX TEST
screen. TX Frequency and TX Power are displayed.
Making Other Transmitter Measurements

By connecting Audio Frequency Generator 1 (AFGen 1) to your transmitter’s
microphone input, you can make calibrated modulation measurements; such as
microphone sensitivity, modulation limiting, and transmitter frequency response.
1. Connect the AUDIO OUT port of the Test Set to your mobile’s microphone input.
2. Access the DUPLEX TEST screen.
3. Set the upper part of the AFGen1 To field to Audio Out.
4. Use the lower part of the AFGen1 To field to adjust the output level into the micro-
phone line.
5. Use the AFGen1 Freq field to adjust the audio generator’s frequency.
246

Function Generator Decoder
func-dec.wmf
Figure 49 The Function Generator Decoder Screen
AF Anl In
See Also
247

Arm Meas
when making single measurements.
Frequency
This measurement displays the decoded signal’s frequency.
Gate Time
This field specifies the minimum time the decoder analyzes a signal after it has
been triggered.
Input Level
This field specifies the signal level that you input (after de-emphasis if it is turned
on). The higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer, the higher the trigger
level is set.
If de-emphasis is used (by setting the AF Analyzer’s De-Emphasis field to
750 µs), the Input Level should be set to about 1/5 of the measured signal’s
level. For example, a 1 kHz, 1 Vpeak sinewave into the AF Analyzer’s input
requires an Input Level of approximately 0.212 V to trigger correctly.
See Also
248

Stop Meas
Single/Cont
Trig Level
measurement that has been “armed”. The level is adjusted by changing the
Input Level field setting.
249

Using the Function Generator Decoder
Using the Function Generator Decoder
Decoding Considerations
Frequency measurements are affected by the Filter1, Filter2, Settling,
and De-Emphasis settings in the AF ANALYZER screen.
Four dashes (- - - -) are displayed if the incoming signal is out of range, or if the
Gate Time is too long for the frequency being measured.
250

LTR Decoder
LTR Decoder
This decoder mode displays trunked signaling data for mobile radios and repeaters
using the EF Johnson LTR® (Logic Trunked Radio) format.
Itr-de1.wmf
Figure 50 The LTR Trunked Radio Decoder Screen
AF Anl In
Audio frequency analyzer input selects the source of the signal to be analyzed
(almost always FM Demod for LTR decoding).
Arm Meas
when set to make a single measurement.
Data
This field displays decoded LTR data. The LTR display setting determines
what type of data is decoded.
251

LTR Decoder
Data Rate
This display field lists the data rate of the received signal.
This measurement relies on the LTR Encoder screen’s data rate setting. Set the
encoder’s Data Rate field to the expected incoming data rate for accurate
measurements (typically 297.6 bps).
Gate Time
triggered.
Input Level
Enter the expected data signal level in this field (typically 1 kHz for LTR data).
The higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer, the higher the Trigger
Level is set.
The unit-of-measure is determined by the AF Anl In setting (kHz when the input
is FM Demod).
enough to allow triggering for valid signals.
See Also
252

LTR Decoder
LTR Display
• Radio - displays the mobile’s transmitted trunking data. An example display might
look like this:
Area : 0
Goto : 2
Home : 2
ID : 128
Free : 31
• Repeater - lists the 20 possible repeater numbers in an LTR system. The data from
the monitored repeater is displayed. If multiple radios try to access the repeater during
decoding, the data sent to those radios by that repeater is also displayed.
The data is displayed as a series of digits next to the number of the repeater that sent it.
For example, a decoded message with a Goto number of 02 may look like this:
01: 02: 0020212806

03: 04:
04: 05:
~ ~
This is interpreted as follows:
02: 0 02 02 128 06
Repeater Area Goto Home ID Free
Polarity
logical low (0).
253

LTR Decoder
Single/Cont
• Single tells the analyzer to display valid LTR information received during one gate
time.
Stop Meas
Trig Level
measurement that has been “armed.” The level is adjusted by changing the
Input Level field setting.
254

Using the LTR Decoder
Decoding Mobile Radio Signaling Data

A transmit channel must be established before a mobile radio is tested (otherwise
the transmitter will attempt to transmit but time-out and de-key automatically). A
procedure for establishing a trunked transmit channel is provided in "Using the
LTR Encoder" on page 346.
After establishing a trunked transmit channel, keep the transmitter keyed and
perform the following steps.
1. Access the DECODER screen, and select LTR for the Mode.
2. Set the LTR display field to Radio.
3. Set the Single/Cont field to Single.
4. Set the AF Anl In field to FM Demod.
5. Set the Input Level to 1 kHz.
6. Select Arm Meas to prepare the decoder for triggering. The transmitted data should be
displayed after being computed.
An End of Data reached during decode. message may be displayed at

the top of the screen during decoding. Four conditions usually cause this message
to be displayed:
• The Gate Time is too short to decode all the data. Increase this setting.
• The Input Level is set too low or too high. Change the level.
• The trunking data is inverted. Select Invert in the Polarity field.
• The LTR radio is not transmitting. Re-establish a transmit channel.
255

Decoding Repeater Signaling Data

Press the PRESET key.

2. Set the Tune Mode to Manual.
3. Enter your repeater’s transmit frequency in the Tune Freq field.
4. Select the Input Port (RF IN/OUT for direct transmitter-to-Test Set connections;
Ant (ANT IN) for off-the-air measurements).
5. Attach an antenna to the Test Set if you are making off-the-air measurements.
6. Access the DECODER and select the LTR mode.
7. Set the LTR display field to Repeater.
8. Select the triggering mode.
• Select Single to decode and display only the first valid transmitter data received.
The decoder must be re-armed before another measurement can be made.
• Select Cont to continuously monitor a repeater and display its transmitted data.
10. Set the Input Level to 1 kHz.
11. Select Arm Meas if you are using single triggering. The transmitted data is displayed
after computing is displayed in the Status field.
If no decoded data is displayed

• The repeater may not be transmitting.
• The RF signal may be too low for off-the-air measurements. Use a better antenna,
or set the RF ANALYZER screen’s Sensitivity field to High.
• The Gate Time may be too short. Increase the value.
• The received data may be inverted. Set the Polarity field to Invert.
• The trigger level may be too low or too high. Change the Input Level setting.
256

MPT 1327 Decoder
MPT 1327 Decoder

The MPT 1327 Decoder screen is used with the MPT 1327 Encoder screen to
decode and display MPT 1327 data streams. Like the MPT 1327 Encoder, the
MPT 1327 Decoder is primarily intended to be controlled using IBASIC programs
running on the Test Set’s IBASIC controller or on an external controller.
mpt-de1.wmf
Figure 51 The MPT 1327 Decoder Screen
257

MPT 1327 Decoder
Manually Decoding MPT 1327 Signals

To manually test MPT 1327 radios using this decoder, you must first set up the
MPT 1327 Encoder to provide the necessary protocol to get the radio up on the
correct channel. This requires a thorough knowledge of the MPT 1327 Encoder
operation, including using the undisplayed controls accessed using IBASIC
commands.
For these reasons, the following information generally assumes you are operating
the decoder under IBASIC control.
Decoder Triggering
For MPT 1327 signaling detection, the decoder should be configured for
repetitive retriggering using the HP-IB command:
TRIGger:MODE:RETRigger REPetitive
When the decoder is armed it is triggered whenever it receives the
synchronization sequence appropriate to the test mode (selected on the MPT 1327
Encoder screen). Refer to table 6.
258

MPT 1327 Decoder
Table 6 Triggering the MPT 1327 Decoder
Test Mode Decoder Synchronization Sequence
Off -
Control SYNC
Traffic SYNT
1200Hz 1111
1800Hz 0000
Dotting 1010
The SYNC and SYNT patterns are those defined for the MPT 1327 Encoder. (The
defaults are C4D716 and 3B2816 respectively.)
When a synchronization sequence is recognized, the message is placed (timeslot
aligned) into the receive buffer. The receive buffer is organized as 16 × 128 bit
timeslots.
Decoder repetitive retriggering is used to minimize the decoder down-time
between messages. It is therefore important to extract the messages from the
decoder buffer as soon as possible after their arrival. This avoids the messages
being overwritten by further signaling.
259

MPT 1327 Decoder
Detecting and Querying Messages

IBASIC can be informed about the arrival of a message in the decoder buffer. To
do this, configure the HP-IB status registers to cause a service request (SRQ) on
the negative transition event of bit 12, “Decoder Result Available” in the
Hardware Status Register #1.
For further information on the Hardware Status Register refer to the
Programmer’s Guide.
The message is read from the decoder buffer by the command:
MEASure:DECoder:MPT1327:BUFFer?
This query returns a quoted string comprising the contents of one or more
timeslots. The string is disassembled into mnemonic form. If more than one
message is received, the individual messages are separated by semicolons. If a
timeslot contains data codewords, it is disassembled into the DCW extension.
Examples of this are:
• Simple RQS from RU. RQS 0,1,5,0
• Cleardown from RU sent in three consecutive timeslots.
MAINT 0,1,283,3,0;MAINT 0,1,283,3,0;MAINT 0,1,283,3,0
• SAMIS response to AHYC giving PSTN digits for call.
SAMIS 14391,83782;DCW #H080000000000,#H000000000000
There are two other measurements available on the decoder screen:
• The Signaling Data Rate. The signaling data rate measurement is the measured baud
rate of the received message. It is most accurately measured on a “dotting” pattern.
• The Received Message Timing. This measures the timing of the received message rel-
ative to the timeslots in the forward control channel. It has two modes of operation:
•Slot timing mode. This works in the Control test mode only, it is disabled in
all other modes. This is the default mode.
•The timing counter is reset at the end of every control channel timeslot. If a mes-
sage is received, the time from the most recent slot end, to the start of the received
message’s preamble, is reported as the timing measurement result.
260

MPT 1327 Decoder
•In the slot timing mode it is not possible to determine whether the message was
returned in the “correct” timeslot. (For example, if it is a response that should re-
turn in the timeslot immediately following the requesting forward message.) It is
possible to check that the timing offset from the forward channel slot boundaries
is within specification.
•This mode is selected with the following HP-IB with the command:
•DECoder:MPT1327:TIME:MODE ’SLOT
• works in the Control and Traffic test modes, it is disabled in all other modes.
•In Control mode the timing counter is reset at the end of each message transmitted
from the control channel message buffer. It is not affected by the on-going trans-
mission of the control channel filler pattern.
•In the Traffic mode the timing counter is reset at the end of each message trans-
mitted from the traffic channel message buffer. There is no background filler pat-
tern.
•In the response timing mode both next slot and slot offset timing can be checked.
The received message must however, be solicited by a forward message so that
the timer is reset and the measurement is meaningful.
•This mode is selected via the HP-IB with the command:
•DECoder:MPT1327:TIME:MODE ’RESPONSE’
261

NMT Decoder
NMT Decoder
The NMT Encoder and Decoder work together to test Nordic Mobile Telephone
equipment used in a number of countries using different NMT standards. As each
standard is selected, the Test Set configures the encoder and decoder to create and
measure the corresponding RF carrier and digital data structure.
The following terms are used throughout the NMT sections of the manual:
DUT - Device-Under-Test: The device being tested (MS, BS, or MTX).
Frames - Groups of digital information that comprise an NMT signal. (This manual as-
sumes you understand the frame structure for the signals you need to create or analyze;
any frame information provided is for reference purposes.)
MS - Mobile Station: The equipment used by a mobile subscriber.
BS - Base Station: The unit that provides the radio interface between one or more Mo-
bile Stations and the Mobile Telephone Exchange.
MTX - Mobile Telephone Exchange: The unit that provides the interface between one or
more Base Stations and the telephone network.
Standard - The set of frequency and data format standards used by different countries.
The NMT Decoder screen is used to load and run NMT test programs you create.
The programs are used to transmit NMT-encoded signals to a device, and to
evaluate received NMT signals.
262

NMT Decoder
nmt-de1.wmf
Figure 52 The NMT Decoder Screen
AF Anl In
Audio frequency analyzer input selects the input for the analyzer. When selected,
this field displays a list of choices:
• The AUDIO IN, RADIO INTERFACE, MODULATION INPUT, MIC/ACC, and AU-
DIO OUT connectors.
• The signal present at the AM or FM modulators for the RF Generator.
See Also
Exit Status
This field indicates which EXIT n command caused the program to stop running.
See Also
EXIT n command in the "Program Command Syntax" on page 277 .
263

NMT Decoder
Frame Log
The Frame Log area lists the recorded frame information generated by the encoder
and received by the decoder. Field descriptions for this area are listed together.
D
The Direction column tells if a frame was transmitted by the encoder (T), or
received by the decoder (R).
Frame Digits
This column lists the information part of the recorded frames, displayed as
hexadecimal digits.
Num
This column lists the reference numbers assigned to the recorded frames in the
order they were transmitted and received.
Time
The times in this column indicate when each frame was transmitted or received
after Run Test was selected. The times are listed in bit intervals that are
dependent on the data rate set in the NMT Encoder.
For example, at a data rate of 1200 bps, one bit interval is equivalent to 0.833 ms
(1/1200).
Type
This column lists the NMT standards frame type for each frame.
The received frame type is determined using the decoder’s Standard field
setting, and the encoder’s DUT field setting. If these settings do not agree with the
actual DUT and its standard, the received (R) frame types may not be correctly
identified.
The transmitted frame type is determined by the Send f commands used in the
NMT test program being executed.
264

NMT Decoder
Input Level
This field specifies the signal level that you input. The higher the level of signal
expected by the analyzer, the higher the trigger level is set.
De-emphasis can greatly affect the input level required for proper decoding.
When decoding NMT data streams, you should turn de-emphasis off (controlled
by the De-Emphasis field on the AF ANALYZER screen.)
See Also
Load Test
This double field is used to select and load NMT tests from a variety of mass
storage devices. After the appropriate Mass Storage device is selected using the
field on the right, the desired NMT test is selected using the field on the left.
nmt-load.wmf
Directly entering a command into the NMT Test Entry field automatically
removes from memory any NMT test previously loaded using the Load Test
field.
NMT Test Entry

See "Using Direct Command Entry" on page 274.
265

NMT Decoder
Run Test
Selecting this function executes (runs) the NMT test specified in the Load Test
field or entered directly into the NMT Test Entry field.
Single/Cont
This field specifies how you want the test to be run:
• Single executes the NMT program and displays the decoded information once each
time Run Test is selected.
• Cont continually re-runs the program, and displays the decoded information, until
Single is selected.
Stop Test
Selecting this field interrupts the NMT test while running. If Cont is selected, the
program automatically re-runs from the beginning.
Standard
This field specifies the NMT standard for the signal being decoded.
This setting alters the decoder’s function by specifying the expected frame
structure and channel range for the incoming signal.
Trying to run a test with the wrong standard selected will result in incorrect
decoded data, or will display an operating error message.
See Also
"Standard Equivalents" on page 269
Trig Level
Trigger level indicates the minimum signal level required to begin a
measurement. This level is adjusted by changing the Input Level field setting.
266

Using the NMT Decoder/Encoder
General Encoder Operation

The following are fields that are typically used for testing different types of NMT
equipment.
Refer to the individual field descriptions for detailed information on each field’s function
and operating parameters.
Testing Mobile Stations

These fields are typically used to test an MS:
• Calling Channel: Number and Power
• Traffic Channel (Main): Number and Power
• Traffic Channel (Alt): Number and Power
• Traffic Area: Main and Alt
• DUT
• TCI (Tariff Class Information)
• MSN (Mobile Subscriber Number)
• Data Rate
• Access Channel: Number and Power
• Batt Save
• Area #
• Add Info
• SIS Challenge
Testing A BS or MTX
These fields are typically used to test a BS or MTX:
• Mgmt/Maint
• Meas Ch #
• Phi Signal
• Meas Field Strength
• Password
• BS Identity
• Alarm Level High and Low
• SIS Response
Fields Used with Different Standards

Fields in the upper part of the screen are used with all NMT standards. Fields in
the lower part of the screen are only used with the STD900 standard.
267

General Decoder Operation

The NMT Decoder screen has several uses:
• Entering NMT programming commands.
• Loading existing NMT tests from a variety of storage media.
• Running NMT tests.
• Decoding received NMT signals.
Operating Steps
Manual NMT radio tests generally follow four basic steps:
1. Write your test program to send encoded information and evaluate received frames.
2. Enter the necessary information into the various encoder and decoder fields.
3. Make the required Test Set AF Analyzer, RF Analyzer, and RF Generator settings.
4. Load and run your program from the decoder.
Changing Standards: Each NMT standard affects several operating parameters for the
encoder and decoder screens; however, there are no visual changes to the contents of
either screen when standards are changed. You must be aware of these changes when
manually testing radios using these screens.
Refer to the Standard and Calling Channel Number field descriptions for expla-
nations on the effects of these fields
268

Standard Equivalents
Only two standards are referred to in this section: STD450 and STD900. All other
national standards are based on these two. If a field description says “only used
with the STD900 standard”, the field can also be used with other national
standards listed under the STD900 equivalents below.
The following list identifies which national standards are based on STD450 and
STD900:
STD450 Equivalents
• Austria
• Benelux
• Bulgaria
• Cro-Slav (Croatia-Slovenia)
• Hungary
• Malaysia
• Saudi 1
• Saudi 2
• Spain
• Thailand
• Turkey
STD900 Equivalents
• France (Uses the STD900 protocol at STD450 frequencies)
Manual Testing of NMT Radios

NMT signals contain complex groupings of digital data that vary in format and
function, depending on a number of system operating needs.
To be able to test NMT radios using these screens, you must be familiar with the
theory, applications, and specifications of the NMT systems. The large volume of
information required to explain the NMT system is beyond the scope of this
manual.
Documents explaining the structure and specifications for the different NMT
standards should be obtained from the radio communications regulatory agency of
the appropriate country.
269

Required Test Set Settings

The following Test Set settings should be made before using the NMT Encoder/
Decoder screens. These settings assume the Test Set is in its preset state.
RF Generator Settings
AFGen1 To: Audio Out and Off
AFGen2 To: FM and 3.5 kHz
RF Analyzer Settings
Tune Mode: Manual
Input Atten: Hold and 0 dB
Squelch: Fixed
AF Analyzer Settings
AF Anl In: FM Demod
Filter 1: 300Hz HPF
Filter 2: 15kHz LPF
De-Emphasis: Off
Initial NMT Encoder Settings

Mode: NMT
DUT: MS (for testing Mobile Stations)
Initial NMT Decoder Settings

Input Level: 3.0 kHz
270

Special Frame Suffixes

Some frame designations include a suffix to identify specific encoder screen fields
(such as TC2 for Alternate Traffic Channel) or to indicate special frame values
affected (such as the S suffix that indicates Battery Save information; example -
1aS).
The following suffixes are appended to some frame designations:
AC = Access Channel
CC = Calling Channel
S = Battery Save
TA1 = Main Traffic Area
TA2 = Alternate Traffic Area
TC1 = Main Traffic Channel
TC2 = Alternate Traffic Channel
271

Creating NMT Tests
Creating NMT Tests

The NMT Encoder outputs signals using programs running in the NMT Decoder.
This differs from the Test Set’s other signaling encoder functions that have a
“send” function to directly output their signals (such as DTMF and Tone
Sequence).
To use the NMT Encoder and Decoder functions, you must first understand how
tests are written.
Programming Overview
Special program commands are used by the Test Set to test NMT radios. These
commands are used to send frames, perform simple branching and looping
operations, change RF channels, and test received frame types.
The NMT Decoder has its own RAM to run programs. All NMT program
commands must be entered into the decoder’s RAM before they can be executed.
This can be done directly by entering commands one at a time into the NMT Test
Entry field, or by loading a test program that has been created and saved on mass
storage.
NOTE: NMT Format: When storing NMT tests you have created, you must save them as ASCII files
using the BASIC command SAVE (and use the GET command to retrieve them). Non-ASCII
files cannot be retrieved using the NMT Decoder screen’s Load Test field, and therefore
cannot be run.
272

Creating NMT Tests
Creating NMT Tests

Tests can be created and saved using any of these methods:
• Writing programs on a connected external controller, downloading them into the Test
Set’s IBASIC RAM, and then storing them on mass storage.
• Using the TESTS screen’s IBASIC Controller and the cursor-control knob to enter pro-
grams line-by-line into IBASIC RAM, and then saving them on mass storage.
• Using the TESTS screen’s IBASIC Controller and a connected terminal to enter pro-
grams line-by-line into RAM, and then saving them on mass storage.
• Using an IBASIC program that creates a file to output program commands.
Entering Tests Into The Decoder’s RAM

NMT commands are entered into the decoder’s RAM using any of these methods:
• Using the Load Test field to load an existing test from mass storage.
• Using a connected terminal or cursor-control knob to directly enter commands into the
decoder’s NMT Test Entry field.
• Using an IBASIC program that outputs commands to the NMT Test Entry field.
The most efficient method is to use a connected computer to write the program,
store the program on a memory card, and then select the test from the memory
card using the decoder’s Load Test field.
273

Creating NMT Tests
Using Direct Command Entry

The decoder’s NMT Test Entry field allows you to directly enter program
commands into the decoder’s RAM. Program line numbers are not used, and no
LIST or EDIT function is available for programs entered this way. This capability
is provided to allow direct entry of small programs without the need of external
equipment or the need to store the program for future use.
Program Example
This example program can be entered line-by-line into the NMT Test Entry
field, and then run by selecting Run Test:
begin
set 1 5
10 send 1a
send 2a
repeat 1 10
exit 0
end
NOTE: Entering commands directly into the NMT Test Entry field causes any existing
programs you have loaded to be removed from the decoder’s memory.
Also, programs entered into the NMT Test Entry field cannot be saved on
mass storage.
274

Creating NMT Tests
Programming Using an External Computer

Writing programs on an external computer using BASIC allows you to write and
edit the NMT program, and then store it on mass media (memory card, RAM disk,
external disk).
Since some NMT syntax used are not valid BASIC language commands, a special
program structure is required.
Program Structure
The following rules must be followed when writing NMT programs to be stored
on mass media:
• All statements in the program must appear as BASIC comments, beginning with an ex-
clamation point (!) following the line number. REM statements cannot be substituted
for the (!) symbol.
• All statements desired as comments in the NMT program are indicated by a double ex-
clamation point (!!) as the first entry following the line number.
• The first line of all NMT programs must have !!NMT following the line number.
• When storing NMT programs, file names must begin with the letter n (either lower or
upper case). The n is removed before the filename is shown in the menu for the Load
Test field. (For example, a file saved as nNMT1 appears as NMT1.) Program Exam-
ple
The following example can be saved on mass storage, and then retrieved and run
using the decoder’s Load Test field:
10 !!NMT
20 !BEGIN
30 !SET 1 5
40 !10 SEND 1A
50 !SEND 2A
60 !REPEAT 1 10
70 !EXIT 0
80 !END
275

Creating NMT Tests
Downloading Programs
Once programs are entered into the Test Set’s IBASIC Controller’s RAM and
saved on mass storage, they can be retrieved and run from the NMT Decoder.
Downloading A Program Into IBASIC Controller RAM

To copy a program from your BASIC computer to the Test Set’s RAM, follow
these steps:
1. Connect an HP-IB cable from your BASIC computer to the Test Set.
2. Load the program into your computer.
3. Set the HP-IB Mode field in the I/O CONFIGURE screen to Talk&Listen.
4. Enter the following commands on your computer:
OUTPUT Addr;"PROG:DEL"
OUTPUT Addr;"PROG:DEF #0"
LIST #Addr
OUTPUT Addr;" "END
Addr is the HP-IB address of the Test Set.
The END statement indicates that EOI is asserted with the last byte sent. (Refer to
IEEE 488.2 standards for more information.)
NOTE: Although your NMT program is now in the Test Set’s IBASIC program RAM, it cannot be
run from the TESTS (IBASIC Controller) screen, since IBASIC does not recognize the NMT
commands. You must copy the program to mass storage before it can be run in the decoder.
Copying Programs to Mass Storage

Programs copied to RAM disk, external disk, or memory cards require specific
initialization and configuration procedures for proper storage and retrieval. Refer
to the Programmer’s Guide
276

Creating NMT Tests
Program Command Syntax

The following list describes the NMT command syntax and parameters.
Commands can be entered directly into the decoder’s NMT Test Entry field, or
used in test programs saved on mass storage.
All commands can be preceded by an integer as a label for branching purposes.
These labels can range from 0 to 255.
BEGIN
Begin description of NMT test. This must always be the first command entered to
describe a new NMT test program. It will initialize all internal memory associated
with the NMT test and prepare the Test Set to accept the rest of the test program.
It has no parameters.
END
End of the NMT test. This must always be the last command entered to describe
an NMT test. It causes the program to be checked for valid label references and
terminates the test entry process.
EXIT n
Stop the test and report exit status n.
Valid entries for the parameter n are integers from 0 to 10 and the following
words (these may be in upper or lower case): PASSED, FAILED, ACCEPTED,
REJECTED, INCOMPLETE.
All NMT test programs must contain an EXIT n, EXITX n, or GOTO l statement
immediately before the END statement.
EXITX n
Stop the test and report exit status n. Exchange the settings in the main and
alternate traffic channel number fields and the power field.
Valid entries for the parameter n are integers from 0 to 10 and the following
words (these may be in upper or lower case): PASSED, FAILED, ACCEPTED,
REJECTED, INCOMPLETE.
277

Creating NMT Tests
GOTO l
Unconditionally jump to the label reference l.
Valid entries for the parameter l are integers from 0 to 255. The label reference
must exist within the program or an error will occur after the END statement is
entered.
RCHAN c
Set the RF Analyzer to the correct frequency for NMT channel c.
Valid entries for the parameter c are as follows: CC, TC1, TCM, TC2, TCA and AC. TC1
and TCM are synonyms as are TC2 and TCA.
The frequency setting is determined by the channel number in the appropriate encoder
field, the selected DUT, and the selected standard.
The parameter CC refers to the calling channel; TC1 and TCM refer to the main traffic
channel; TC2 and TCA refer to the alternate traffic channel; AC refers to the access
channel.
TCHAN c
Set the RF Generator to the correct frequency for NMT channel c.
Valid entries for the parameter c are as follows: CC, TC1, TCM, TC2, TCA and AC. TC1
and TCM are synonyms as are TC2 and TCA.
The frequency setting is determined by the channel number in the appropriate encoder
field, the selected DUT, and the selected standard.
The parameter CC refers to the calling channel; TC1 and TCM refer to the main traffic
channel; TC2 and TCA refer to the alternate traffic channel; AC refers to the access
channel.
278

Creating NMT Tests
SEND f
Send the designated frame f.
Valid entries for the parameter f are as follows: 1A, 1A’ or 1AP, 1A’’ or 1APP, 1AS, 1A’S
or 1APS, 1A’’S or 1APPS, 1B, 1BS, 1BTA1, 1BTA2, 2A, 2A’ or 2AP, 2A’’ or 2APP, 2B,
2B’ or 2BP, 2B’’ or 2BPP, 2C, 2C’ or 2CP, 2C’’or 2CPP, 2D, 2D’ or 2DP, 2D’’ or 2DPP, 2E,
2F, 3A, 3A1, 3A2, 3B, 3BTA2, 3BTC2, 3C, 3D, 3DTA2, 4, 4TA2, 4B, 4BTA2, 5B, 6, 7,
10A, 10AAC, 10B, 10C, 10D, 11, 11A, 11B, 12, 13B, 15, 16, 21B, 21C, 22, 26, 27, 28
and 30.
Some of these frame types are only valid for certain NMT Standards. This will be checked
when the program is run.
SEND f n
Send the designated frame f with the signal n. Valid entries for the parameter f with
parameters n are as follows:
Table 7 Valid Channel Assignments
f n
5a, 13a Line signal number: 0 to 15, or 0 to F (hex)
14a, 14b Digit signal value: 0 to 13, A to D(10 to 13), * and #.
20 Channel activation order: 0 to 15, or 0 to F (hex)
25 Channel status information: 0 to 15, or 0 to F (hex)
IF f l
If the received frame register contains the frame f, go to label l.
Valid entries for the parameter f include all the valid entries for f in the two SEND
statements; however, the special suffixes discussed in "Special Frame Suffixes" on
page 271 are ignored by this instruction.
Valid entries for l are integers from 0 to 255. The specified label l must appear
somewhere before the END statement of the program.
279

Creating NMT Tests
CLEAR
Clear the received frame register. This statement should appear before an IF f l
statement in the test program.
SET n m
Set the counter n to the value m.
Valid entries for the parameter n are integers 1 and 2. Valid entries for m are
integers from 0 to 255.
REPEAT n l
Decrement the counter n by one and go to the label l if the counter value is still
greater than 0.
Valid entries for n are 1 and 2. Valid entries for l are integers from 0 to 255. The
specified counter n must have been set with a SET n m statement previously in the
test program. The label l must appear somewhere in the test program before the
END statement.
WAIT n
Wait n bits with no data being sent.
Valid entries for the parameter n are integers from 0 to 4095. The actual wait time
depends on the data rate setting, in bits-per-second, on the NMT ENCODER.
280

Tone Sequence Decoder

The Tone Sequence Decoder analyzes sequential tone signals and displays the
associated parameters.
tone-dec.wmf
Figure 53 The Tone Sequence Decoder Screen
AF Anl In
Arm Meas
when Single is selected.
281

Freq
This measurement column lists the tone frequency for each symbol received in the
tone sequence.
Freq Error
This measurement column lists the frequency difference between the tone
frequency specified for each symbol in the Tone Sequence Encoder screen and the
frequency measured for each symbol in the Tone Sequence Decoder screen.
The decoder and encoder Standard fields are interactive. The standard you
choose in either field is automatically selected for the other.
Gate Time
triggered.
Input Level
This field specifies a tone’s “on” signal level that you input (after de-emphasis if
used). The higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer, the higher the
trigger level is set.
enough to allow triggering for every desired tone received.
If de-emphasis is used (by setting the AF Analyzer’s De-Emphasis field to
750 µs), the Input Level should be set to about 1/5 of the measured signal’s
level. For example, a 1 kHz, 1 Vpeak sinewave into the AF Analyzer input
requires an Input Level of approximately 0.212 V to trigger correctly.
See Also
282

Off Time
This measurement column lists the length of time each tone was “off” prior to the
next tone being received.
On Time
This measurement column lists the length of time each tone was “on.”
Single/Cont
Stop Meas
Sym
The symbol column corresponds to the Tone Sequence Encoder’s symbols
assigned for each tone. As each tone is analyzed, the symbol that represents each
tone is listed in this column.
The symbol assigned to a received tone is based on the closest symbol frequency
to that tone. If the frequency of the received tone is exactly half-way between two
symbol frequencies, the symbol associated with the higher of the two frequencies
is displayed.
Trig Level
Trigger level indicates the minimum signal level required to begin a measurement
that has been “armed.” The level is adjusted by changing the Input Level field
setting.
283

284

9
Duplex Test Screen
285

Chapter 9, Duplex Test Screen
Block Diagram
Block Diagram
)NPUT 0ORT
)& &ILTER
2& ).!RT
K(Z
!.4 ).
2& )&
2& )&
34!'%3 34!'%3
,/
2& ).
(IGH 0OWER
!TTENUATOR
4UNE -ODE 4UNE &REQ
!UTO -ANUAL
-(Z
48 0OWER !& !NL )N

&- $EMOD
-EASUREMENT
48 0WR :ERO
2EFERENCE
:ERO
&- $ENOD
&IL TER &IL TER
!- $EMOD
(Z (0& K(Z ,0&
33"$EMOD
&ROM !5$)/ ). !UDIO )N
&ROM 2ADIO )NTERFACE 2ADIO )NT
2EAR 0ANEL -OD ). %XT -OD
&ROM -)# !## -IC -OD
&ROM !-&- &- -OD

-ODULATORS !- -OD
$E %MPASLS -EASUREMENTS $ISPLAY !REA

US/FF
$ETECTOR 4UNE -ODE
!& !NL ).
0K -AX !UTO-ANUAL
&- $EMOD
/&&
2-3 48 &REQ %RROR &- $EV IATION

2-3
3124
48 &REQUENCY !- $EPTH
0K !# ,EVEL
0K
U3 48 0OWER
0K 3).!$ 3.2
0K -AX 6OLTMETER
$ISTN
0K (OLD !& &REQ
0K (OLD $# ,EVEL
0K (D #URRENT
0K -X HD
!& 'EN 4O !& &REQ

!& 'EN &REQ
&-
!MPLITUDE
2& 'EN &REQ
K(Z

K(Z
-(Z D"M
&- 2& /UT
!& 'EN &REQ !& 'EN 4O

$UPLEX /UT
&-
/FF
K(Z /UTPUT 0ORT
!- !TTEN (OL D
2& /UT$UPL
/N/FF
!UDIO /UT
Figure 54 DUPLEX TEST Functional Block Diagram
286

Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
dxscrn.wmf
Figure 55 The Duplex Test Screen
AC Level
This is the default measurement for this field. The type of measurement shown is
dependent on the AF Anl In settings.
See Also
287

Field Descriptions
AF Anl In
Audio frequency analyzer input selects the input for the analyzer. When selected,
this field displays a list of choices.
• the output of the AM, FM, or SSB demodulators
• the AUDIO IN, RADIO INTERFACE, MODULATION INPUT, MIC/ACC, and AU-
DIO OUT connectors
• the signal present at the AM or FM modulators for the RF Generator
Changing this field causes the upper AF measurement to change.
See Also
FM Deviation field description, on page 294
288

Field Descriptions
AF Freq
This is the default measurement for this field. Selecting this field displays the
following measurement choices:
SINAD
Distortion
AF Frequency
DC Level
Current - DC only
SNR Operation
• The RF Generator and AF Generator 1 must be set up to provide the radio’s carrier.
(AFGen1 is automatically turned on and off repeatedly during this measurement.)
See Also
289

Field Descriptions
AFGen1 Freq
This field sets the frequency for the first audio frequency sinewave generator.
AFGen1 To
This field is used to set two values for the first audio frequency generator:
• The upper field determines whether the AF signal modulates the RF Generator, or is
output through the AUDIO OUT connector.
• The lower field sets the amplitude (including Off). The AUDIO OUT level is always
in volts RMS.
See Also
290

Field Descriptions
Amplitude
This field adjusts the amplitude of the RF Generator.
If a microphone is connected, and the amplitude is set to Off, keying the
microphone causes the amplitude to turn on to its previous level until the
microphone is no longer keyed.
See Also
Atten Hold field description, on page 291
Atten Hold
Attenuator hold prevents the fixed RF output attenuators from switching in and
out, eliminating the loss of the output signal as the level is changed. This function
is helpful when making squelch measurements.
When this function is set to On, the RF output level is restricted to a range of
15 dB around the present Amplitude setting. Attempting to set an amplitude
outside the allowed range results in an error message and beep (if the beeper is
on). RF output level accuracy is greatly degraded outside the allowed range.
291

Field Descriptions
Audio Out
This field selects ac or dc coupling to the AUDIO OUT connector.
De-Emphasis
analyzer and internal speaker circuitry.
See Also
292

Field Descriptions
Detector
signal levels.
Detector Types
• displays the RMS value of a signal multiplied by the square-root-of-2.
• Pk±/2 adds the positive and negative peak values, and divides the sum by 2.
• Pk±Max compares the positive and negative peaks and displays the greater value (po-
larity is not indicated).
detector.
detector.
• Pk±/2 Hold divides the sum of the positive and negative peak values by 2, and dis-
plays the value until the measurement is reset. To reset, press the MEAS RESET key,
select a different detector, or re-select the same detector.
detector, or re-select the same detector.
See Also
293

Field Descriptions
Ext TX Key
This field controls a switch at the MIC/ACC connector. Its intended use is to
“key” an external transmitter.
See Also
FM Coupling
This field selects ac or dc coupling between the RF Generator’s frequency
modulator and the rear-panel MODULATION INPUT connector. This field also
alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and external modulation
sources.
FM Deviation
This is the default measurement for this field. The type of measurement listed here
is dependent on the AF Anl In settings.
See Also
294

Field Descriptions
IF Filter
This field selects the desired IF filter bandwidth for modulated signals being
analyzed.
Input Port
This field selects the RF IN/OUT or ANT IN connector for making RF
measurements. The RF IN/OUT port must be used for making TX Power
measurements on this screen.
If the RF power at the RF IN/OUT port exceeds allowable limits, a loud warning
signal sounds and a message appears at the top of the screen. If this occurs,
disconnect the RF power, press the MEAS RESET key, and allow the Test Set to
cool off for approximately 2 minutes before making any other measurements on
this port.
low-level signals (such as “off-the-air” measurements). You cannot measure TX
(RF) Power on this screen using the ANT IN port. However, low-level RF power
at the ANT IN port can be measured using the Spectrum Analyzer.
CAUTION: Connecting a signal of >200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage (although
internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short-duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts).
295

Field Descriptions
Output Port
This field selects the RF Generator’s output port.
CAUTION: Applying reverse RF power to the DUPLEX OUT connector can damage the
instrument. (A message is displayed when an overpower conditions occurs.)
Whenever possible, use the RF IN/OUT connector when testing transceivers to
prevent damage from accidental transmitter keying.
If a reverse-power condition triggers the internal protection circuit, remove the
reverse-power signal and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off
and on to reset it.
RF Gen Freq
This field sets the RF Generator’s frequency.
296

Field Descriptions
Tune Freq
RF analyzer tune frequency sets the center frequency for the RF signal to be
analyzed.
If the Tune Mode field is set to Auto, the frequency is set by the instrument.
If the Tune Mode is set to Manual, the operator must enter the desired frequency.
See Also
Tune Mode field description, on page 297
Tune Mode
This field selects automatic or manual tuning of the RF Analyzer.
Auto tuning causes the RF Analyzer to find the signal with the greatest amplitude
above −36 dBm, and set the tune frequency for that signal.
Manual tuning requires the operator to set the tune frequency for the RF signal to
be analyzed.
tuning enables the TX Frequency measurement. Manual tuning enables the
TX Freq Error measurement.
After autotuning to the desired signal, select Manual tuning to prevent the
Tune Freq from changing when the signal is no longer applied.
297

Field Descriptions

This measurement displays transmitter frequency error or absolute Transmitter
Frequency, depending on the Tune Mode setting.
See Also
TX Power
Transmitter power measures RF power at the RF IN/OUT port.
ANT IN port.
See Also
Input Port field description, on page 295 (Operating Considerations)
TX Pwr Zero field description, on page 427.
298

10
Signaling Encoder (AF Generator 2)
299

Chapter 10, Signaling Encoder (AF Generator 2)
Field Descriptions for Encoder Modes
Field Descriptions for Encoder Modes

The Encoder (AF Generator 2) uses several screens to generate various signaling
formats. These screens are accessed by selecting ENCODER from the To Screen
menu, and then selecting the Mode field.
The screen and field descriptions for each Encoder screen are listed in the
following order:
• AMPS/NAMPS-TACS/NTACS
• CDCSS (Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System)
• Digital Paging
• DTMF (Dual-Tone-Multi-Frequency Signaling Encoder)
• EDACS (Enhanced Digital Access Communication System)
• Function Generator
• LTR (Logic Trunked Radio: Registered trademark of EF Johnson Company)
• MPT 1327 Trunked Radio
• NMT (Nordic Mobile Telephone)
• Tone Sequence
When the Test Set is turned on, AFGen1 defaults to 3 kHz FM at a

1 kHz rate. This can interfere with many Encoder signaling formats also being used as an
FM source. Therefore, we recommend you turn AFGen1 off on the RX TEST, DUPLEX
TEST, or RF GENERATOR screen before using the encoder.
300

AMPS-TACS NAMPS-NTACS Encoder

• AMPS = Advanced Mobile Phone Service.
• NAMPS = Narrowband Advanced Mobile Phone Service.
• TACS = Total Access Communications Systems.
• JTACS = Total Access Communications System for Japan.
• NTACS = Narrowband Total Access Communications Systems (NTACS is an exten-
sion of JTACS).
The AMPS/TACS and NAMPS/NTACS Encoder modes use the same Forward
Control Channel (FOCC) settings and output format. However, the Forward
Voice Channel (FVC) information is different.
Control and Voice Channel Identifiers

The Control and Voice channel fields are available in separate menus. The
Channel field is used to select the Cntl (FOCC) or Voice (FVC) menu.
Fields available only in the Forward Control Channel menu have (FOCC) printed
in the field title.
Fields available only in the Forward Voice Channel menu have (FVC) printed in
the field title.
1 f
Figure 56 AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTACS Mode Forward Control Channel (FOCC)
301

amps-en3.wmf
Figure 57 AMPS-TACS Mode Forward Voice Channel (FVC)
nmps-en1.wmf
Figure 58 NAMPS-NTACS Mode Forward Voice Channel (FVC)
AFGen2 To
This field determines whether the data stream modulates the RF Generator, or is
Audio Out
Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the AF Generator to the
AUDIO OUT connector when AFGen2 To is set to Audio Out.
302

Busy/Idle (FOCC)
This field selects the busy/idle status information to be included in the signaling
sequence.
• Idle sets the busy/idle bits of the forward control channel information to indicate an
idle state.
• Busy sets the busy/idle bits of the forward control channel information to indicate a
busy state.
• WS Delay, word sync delay, prevents a busy/idle change until the word sync
information has been received and a defined number of delay bits has been counted.
The delay bit value is set in the B/I Delay field.
• 1stBitDly, first bit delay causes the busy/idle bit to be set after a bit has been
received and a defined number of delay bits has been counted. The delay bit value is set
in the B/I Delay field.
B/I Delay (FOCC)

Busy/idle delay determines the number of bits that are counted before a busy/idle
bit changes from the Idle state to the busy state. This function is used with the WS
Delay and 1stBitDly settings in the Busy/Idle field.
Bursts
This field defines the number of times the message data is output when Send is
selected. This function only works when the Send Mode field is set to Burst.
Channel
This field selects the forward control channel (FOCC) or forward voice control
(FVC) menus.
Data Level
This setting determines the signal level change that occurs when a logical high (1)
or low (0) is output. The unit-of-measure used depends on the AFGen2 To setting.
The direction of the output level change depends on the Polarity setting.
303

Data Rate
This setting determines the rate that the FOCC and FVC information are output.
This field specifies the data rate for the signal being decoded, and must be set
before using the AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTACS Decoder.
DSAT (FVC)
This field is available only in NAMP-NTAC mode.
This field is used to specify the 24-bit digital supervisory audio tone (DSAT)
sequence. The seven standard sequences are: 2556CB, 255B2B, 256A9B,
25AD4D, 26AB2B, 26B2AD, and 2969AB. (These codes are the inverse of the
seven DST codes.)
DSAT is output continuously when Send DSAT is selected, and is only stopped
when Stop DSAT is selected. If message or DST information is sent using Send,
the DSAT signal is temporarily interrupted until that information has been sent.
(The Status: field in the upper-right corner of the screen indicates what type of
data is being sent.)
304

Filler (FOCC)
4HE DATA YOU ENTER HERE
&/##
3TREAM ! 3TREAM "
&ILLER &ILLER
-ESSAGE -ESSAGE
4 4
0ARITY
4 4 0ARITY
)NFORMATION
"ITS "ITS "ITS
#ONTENTS OF THE -ESSAGE OR &ILLER &IELD
7/2$ "
7/2$ !
IS OUTPUT IN THIS SEQUENCE
"ITS "ITS "ITS "ITS "ITS
7/2$ 2%0%!4 2%0%!4 2%0%!4
$/44).' /& /& /&
39.# 7/2$ ! 7/2$ " 7/2$ !
"USY)DLE "ITS
"ITS "ITS "ITS "ITS
2%0%!4 2%0%!4 2%0%!4
/& /& /& $/44).'
7/2$ " 7/2$ ! 7/2$ "
Figure 59 AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTACS FOCC Message and Filler Data Format
305

Each Filler field contains 7 hexadecimal characters representing the 2 type bits
and 26 information bits of the control filler/message word. The dotting, word
sync, and parity bits are generated automatically.
The control filler is sent continuously when Send Filler is selected, or after a
control message has been sent using Send. The control message is stopped
whenever Stop Filler, Filler, Channel, Data Rate, Polarity, or
AFGen2 To is selected.
Both filler fields must be full (seven digits) for the forward control channel
information to be structured correctly. Do not leave any blank spaces.
FM Coupling
This field alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and external
modulation sources. This field also selects ac or dc coupling between the RF
Generator’s frequency modulator and the rear-panel MODULATION INPUT
connector.
306

Message (FOCC)
&/##
3TREAM ! 3TREAM "
&ILLER &ILLER
-ESSAGE -ESSAGE
4 4
0ARITY
4 4 0ARITY
)NFORMATION
"ITS "ITS "ITS
#ONTENTS OF THE -ESSAGE OR &ILLER &IELD
7/2$ "
7/2$ !
"ITS "ITS "ITS "ITS "ITS
7/2$ 2%0%!4 2%0%!4 2%0%!4
$/44).' /& /& /&
39.# 7/2$ ! 7/2$ " 7/2$ !
"USY)DLE "ITS
"ITS "ITS "ITS "ITS
2%0%!4 2%0%!4 2%0%!4
/& /& /& $/44).'
7/2$ " 7/2$ ! 7/2$ "
Figure 60 AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTACS FOCC Message and Filler Data Format
Message streams A and B specify various forward control channel parameters.
Like the filler information, the message information can only be input in full
(seven digit) lines. Also, message streams A and B must have the same number of
lines in them.
307

Message (FVC)
& 6 #
4 4 0ARTTY
-ESSAGE )NFORMATION

"ITS "ITS "ITS
#ONTENTS OF THE -ESSAGE OR &IELD
-ESSAGE 7ORD
"I TS "I TS "I TS "I TS "I TS "I TS
2%0%!4 2%0%!4
$/44).' 73 /& $/44).' 73 /&
7/2$ 7/2$
737ORD 3YNC
"ITS "ITS "ITS "ITS "I TS "I TS "ITS "ITS "I TS
2%0%!4 2%0%!4 2%0%!4
$/44).' 73 $/44).' 73 $/44).' 73

/& /& /&
7/2$ 7/2$ 7/2$
Figure 61 AMPS-TACS FVC Message Data Output Format
This description applies to the AMPS-TACS mode.

The 7 hexadecimal characters of the FVC Message field represent the 2 type bits
and 26 information bits in the FVC message word.
The generation of dotting, word sync, parity, and the 11 repetitions of these
parameters in the FVC message stream is done automatically.
The entire field must contain data, no blank spaces are allowed. SAT is turned off
while the FVC message stream is being sent.
308

Message (FVC)
&6#
-ESSAGE $3!4
"
3END
$3!4 $3!4 $3!4 $3!4
3YNC WORD -ESSAGE ) NFO 0ARITY

BITS BITS BITS BITS
BITS BITS BI TS
$ATA $IRECTI ON
Figure 62 NAMPS-NTACS FVC Message Data output Format
This description applies to the NAMP-NTAC mode.

The 7 hexadecimal characters (28 bits) of this FVC message are combined with 12
parity bits calculated by the encoder to output a 40-character data stream. This
information is output when the Message/DST field is set to Message, and Send
is selected.
The entire field must contain data, no blank spaces are allowed. DSAT is turned
off while the FVC Message Stream is being sent.
309

Message/DST (FVC)
This field determines what type of data is sent when Send is selected:
1. Selecting Message causes the contents of the Message field to be output.
2. Selecting DST causes the digital signaling tone sequence to be output. The sequence
sent is the inverse of the sequence entered in the DSAT field, and is automatically de-
termined by the Encoder.
The DST values are: DAA934, DAA4D4, DA9564, DA52B2, D954D4, D94D52, and
D69654.
Polarity
This setting determines the relationship between the signaling logic levels and the
effect on the modulated signal.
Normal Operation. When this field is set to Norm, a logical high (1) causes the
output level of the AF Generator to be more positive. The peak level is listed in
the Data Level field. A logical low (0) causes the level to become negative by
the same amount.
Inverted Operation. When this field is set to Invert, a logical high (1) causes
the output level of the AF Generator to be more negative. The peak level is listed
in the Data Level field. A logical low (0) causes the level to become positive by
the same amount.
310

SAT Freq (FVC)

This field is available only in AMPS-TACS mode.
This field sets the supervisory audio tone’s frequency. This signal is sent
continuously whenever the FVC is selected, except while the Message is being
sent.
SAT Level (FVC: AMPS-TACS)

This field sets the supervisory audio tone’s level. The unit-of-measure depends on
the AFGen2 To setting.
SAT is turned off while the FVC message stream is being sent.
Send
Selecting this field causes the FVC or FOCC message to be output.
When sending an FOCC message stream, the contents of the Filler are
continuously output after the message data has been sent. Stop Filler is used
to stop the output.
Send Filler (FOCC)

Selecting this field causes the contents of the Filler fields for Stream A and
Stream B to be output. The fillers continue to be output until Stop Filler is
selected.
Send DSAT (FVC)

Selecting this field causes the contents (24 bits) of the DSAT field to be
continuously output until Stop DSAT is selected. If a message or DST is sent by
selecting Send, the DSAT data is output continuously after the message is output.
311

Send Mode
This field selects the mode used when Send is selected to output the message.
• Single outputs the entire message once.
• Burst outputs the Message the number of times specified in the Bursts field.
• Cont causes the message to be output continuously until Stop is selected.
• Step is not used in the AMPS-TACS mode.
Standard
This field selects the signaling standard used for your radio. The standard values
used for each signaling format are automatically filled-in when the standard is
selected.
Stop
Selecting this field stops the message being output.
Stop DSAT (FVC)

Selecting this field stops the digital supervisory audio tone being output.
Stop Filler (FOCC)

Selecting this field stops the Filler information from being output after
Send Filler or Send is used.
312

Using the AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS Encoder
Using the AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS Encoder
Using This Information

This screen is used to create various types of cellular telephone data streams.
Selecting the Standards field displays a list of the supported signaling formats.
The theory and applications of cellular telephone systems are beyond the scope of
this manual. The field descriptions describe their basic functions, and are not
intended to be used as tutorial information.
If additional information is needed, refer to the many technical manuals available
on the subject of cellular telephones.
Automated Test Software

Hewlett-Packard offers software packages to test your cellular phone in a fraction
of the time normally required for manual testing. You can choose any
combination of tests, from full parametric testing, to a single test. The software is
shipped on a memory card that inserts directly into your Test Set, and it comes
with complete documentation and a blank SRAM memory card for storing your
test procedures and test data.
Encoder/Decoder Interaction
The AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTACS Encoder acts like a base station transmitter,
creating Forward Control and Voice channel information (FOCC/FVC). The
AMPS-NAMPS-TACS/NTACS Decoder acts like a base station receiver,
analyzing Reverse Control and Voice channel signals (RECC/RVC).
The decoder uses the encoder’s Data Rate setting to specify how fast the
incoming message is being sent. Therefore, when using the decoder, you must
first specify the data rate in the encoder.
313

CDCSS Encoder
CDCSS Encoder
The Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System (CDCSS) Encoder generates
signals to test radios that use a digitally-encoded signal to turn squelch on and off.
The encoder can be used to modulate the RF Generator, or it can be output
through the front-panel AUDIO OUT connector.
cdcsen1.wmf
Figure 63 The CDCSS Encoder Mode Screen
314

CDCSS Encoder
AFGen2 To
This audio frequency generator control contains two fields:
• The upper field determines whether the CDCSS Encoder modulates the RF Generator,
or is output through AUDIO OUT.
• The lower field sets the amplitude (including Off).
Audio Out
Audio out coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the encoder to the AUDIO OUT
connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out.
The CDCSS encoder creates data streams using squarewaves. For optimum
waveform quality, set this field to DC when using the AUDIO OUT connector.
This is especially beneficial at low data rates.
Bursts
This field defines the number of data streams output each time Send is selected.
This function works only when the Send Mode field is set to Burst.
Code
This field defines the 3-digit octal code used to identify the radio being accessed.
Data Rate
This field specifies how fast the data stream is output in bits-per-second.
This setting is also used to determine the Turn Off Code frequency
(TOC frequency Hz = Data Rate in bps). Example: 1000 bps = 1 kHz
This field is also used by the CDCSS Signaling Decoder screen to approximate
the data rate for the signal being decoded.
315

CDCSS Encoder
FM Coupling
connector.
This field should be set to DC whenever the AFGen2 To field is set to FM; this
provides better modulation response at low data rates.
Polarity
This setting determines the relationship between the data stream’s logic levels and
the effect on the modulated signal.
This function is helpful to restore the proper data polarity when the transmitter,
repeater, or receiver used in your communications system has an odd number of
inversions; causing the received data to be inverted when decoded. (This is
common when a signal is translated to a lower frequency using an LO whose
frequency is higher than the signal’s frequency; or when inverting amplifiers are
used.)
output level of the AF Generator to be more positive. A logical low (0) causes the
level to become negative by the same amount.
the output level of the AF Generator to be more negative. A logical low (0) causes
the level to become positive by the same amount.
Send
Selecting this field causes the data stream to be output.
316

CDCSS Encoder
Send Mode
This field selects the output format used when Send is selected to output a
sequence.
• Single outputs the entire sequence once.
• Burst outputs the sequence the number of times specified in the Bursts field.
• Cont causes the sequence to be output continuously until Stop is selected.
Standard
This field selects the digitally-coded squelch standard for your radio.
Stop
Selecting this field stops the data stream being output when the Send Mode is set
to Cont or Burst. After this field is selected, the current repetition of the data
stream is finished, and the turn-off code is output.
TOC Time
Turn-off code time defines the length of time the turn-off code is output.
This code is always the last information output before the encoder’s Status
indicator changes from Sending to Idle whether several bursts or only one data
stream is sent. If no TOC is desired, set this field to 0.0000.
317

Using the CDCSS Encoder
Using the CDCSS Encoder
The CDCSS Data Stream
$ATA IS 3HIFTED /UT 4HIS $IRECTION

%RROR $ETECTION #ODE &IXED $IGIT #ODE 9OU
#OMPUTED BY (0 ! /CTAL %NTER
Figure 64 CDCSS Data Stream Bit Assignments
The CDCSS encoder creates a 23-bit digital data stream and Turn Off Code
(TOC). The data stream consists of three parts:
• A 3-digit (9 bit) octal code you supply that corresponds to your radios digital squelch
code number.
• A fixed octal 4 (coded 100).
• A mathematically-derived 11-bit error detection code.
The data stream is output serially, beginning with the error detection code.
The Turn-Off Code

The turn-off code is a tone burst that is output after the data stream has been
output the desired number of times, or after a series of bursts has been interrupted
using the Stop field.
318

Digital Paging Encoder

The Digital Paging Encoder outputs signals to test pagers using a variety of digital
access formats and frequencies. The signal can be used to modulate the RF
Generator, or it can be output through the front-panel AUDIO OUT connector.
FM is typically selected by using the RX TEST screen to set up the RF Generator
to generate the encoded carrier.
digi-en1.wmf
Figure 65 The Digital Paging Encoder Mode Screen
319

AFGen2 To
This field, audio frequency generator 2 to, contains two fields:
• The upper field determines whether the Digital Paging Encoder’s signal modulates the
RF Generator, or is output through the AUDIO OUT connector.
Audio Out
Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the encoder to the AUDIO
OUT connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out.
This field should be set to DC for best results when using the AUDIO OUT
connector and low data rates.
Bursts
This field defines the number of digital data streams output each time Send is
selected. This function works only when the Send Mode field is set to Burst.
Data Rate
This field specifies how fast the data stream is output in bits-per-second. Common
data rates; POCSAG 512, 1200: GSC (GOLAY) 300, 600.
Error Bit
This field enables you to cause an error for a specific bit in the encoded message
stream.
320

FM Coupling
connector.
This field should be set to DC whenever the AFGen2 To field is set to FM; this
provides better modulation response at low data rates.
Function
This setting specifies which of the four types of messages to send. The pager’s
response is determined by the Pager Type field setting and the pager’s
configuration.
For example, when testing a POCSAG pager set for tone-only operation,
functions 00 through 11 typically correspond to the pager beeping one to four
times. If the pager is set for Alpha-Numeric operation, the functions correspond to
a combination of the number of beeps and the type of message displayed by the
pager.
Mssg Length
The Message Length field specifies the number of characters output from the
Pager Numeric/Alpha-Numeric field.
This field is only displayed when the Pager Type is set to Numeric or
Alpha-Num.
321

Pager Alpha-Numeric Message

This field specifies the message you are sending to an alpha-numeric format
pager.
Alpha-Num.
Pager Code
This field is used to identify the individual code number (address) of the pager
you are testing.
Pager Numeric Message

This field specifies the message you are sending to a numeric format pager.
Alpha-Num.
Pager Type
This field specifies the way your pager responds to a received signal:
Tone-Only (beeps), Numeric (displays numbers), or Alpha-Numeric (displays
numbers and other characters).
Polarity
This setting determines the relationship between the data stream’s logic levels and
the effect on the modulated signal.
output level of the AF Generator to be more positive (causing a positive frequency
deviation when FM is used). A logical low (0) causes the level to become negative
by the same amount (resulting in negative FM deviation).
the output level of the AF Generator to be more negative (causing a negative FM
deviation). A logical low (0) causes the level to become positive by the same
amount (resulting in positive FM deviation).
322

Send
Selecting this field causes the entire data stream to be output (including the
preamble, address, and message).
Send Mode
sequence.
Standard
This field selects the digital paging standard for the pager being tested, POCSAG
or GSC (Golay Sequential Code).
Stop
Selecting this field stops the data stream being output.
323

DTMF Sequence Encoder

The DTMF Sequence Generator creates Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency tone
sequences of variable frequency, amplitude, and duration. It’s signal can be used
to modulate the RF Generator, or it can be output through the front-panel AUDIO
OUT connector.
dtmf-enc.wmf
Figure 66 The DTMF Sequence Encoder Mode Screen
324

AFGen2 To
• The upper field determines whether the DTMF sequence modulates the RF Generator,
or is output through the front-panel AUDIO OUT connector.
The output level is the peak value for each tone pair, regardless of the Twist and
Pre-Emp settings.
See Also
Twist field description, on page 327
Audio Out
Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the DTMF Sequence Generator
to the AUDIO OUT connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio
Out.
Bursts
This field defines the number of sequences output each time Send is selected.
This function only works when the Send Mode field is set to Burst.
FM Coupling
connector.
On Time
This field sets the length of time each DTMF tone is on during the sequence.
Off Time
This field sets the length of time each DTMF tones is off during the sequence.
325

Pre-Emp
This field determines whether the encoder’s signal passes through or bypasses
the 750 ms pre-emphasis network. Pre-emphasis may be required when testing
some FM receivers.
See Also
Twist field description, on page 327
Send
Selecting this field causes the DTMF sequence to be output.
Send Mode
This field selects the format used when Send is selected to output a sequence.
• Step allows you to output the tones in a sequence one at a time by pressing Send for
each tone.
Standard
This field selects the DTMF standard used for your radio.
Stop
Selecting this field stops the sequence being output.
Symbol Frequencies (Hz)

The eight column/row frequencies are automatically entered by the Standard
field setting. You can change the frequency values using the DATA keys.
326

Twist
Twist is the ratio of amplitudes (in dB) between the high frequency and low
frequency tone in each DTMF pair. A positive value indicates a higher amplitude
for the high frequency tones. A negative value indicates a higher amplitude for the
low frequency tones.
The amplitude of the combined tones is set in the AFGen2 To field.
Twist and Pre-emphasis Interaction

Twist and Pre-emphasis affect the relative levels of the high and low tones within
each symbol (tone pair). If pre-emphasis is off, twist sets the difference in
deviation (in dB) between the high and low tones. If twist is off, pre-emphasis
places a 6 dB per octave difference in deviation between the high and low tones. If
both twist and pre-emphasis are on, the two effects are summed.
For most conditions, set Twist to 2.5 dB, Pre-Emp on, and 60% rated deviation
(3 kHz for a typical 5 kHz deviation rated receiver).
Examples of Twist and Pre-emphasis Interaction

Example 1: 3 kHz deviation, Twist 0 dB, Pre-emphasis off.
The level of each low tone and high tone individually generate 1.5 kHz deviation.
The tones are summed to produce 3 kHz deviation.
Example 2: 3 kHz deviation, Twist 2.5 dB, Pre-emphasis off.
The high tone has 2.5 dB (a factor of 1.334) more deviation than the low tone. The
two tones are summed to produce 3 kHz peak deviation. Therefore, the low tone’s
deviation is 1286 Hz and the high tone’s deviation is 1714 Hz.
Example 3: 3 kHz deviation, Twist 0 dB, Pre-emphasis on.
There is a 6 dB per octave difference between the high and low tones. For
example, if sending a 1, which has a low tone of 697 Hz and a high tone of
1209 Hz, the high tone has a deviation of 1209/697 = 1.735 times the low tone’s
deviation. The high tone’s deviation is then 20 × log(1209/967) = 4.78 dB higher
than the low tone. Since their sum must equal 3 kHz, the low tone’s deviation is
1097 Hz, and the high tone’s deviation is 1903 Hz.
Example 4: 3 kHz deviation, Twist 2.5 dB, Pre-emphasis on.
If sending a 1 (697 Hz low tone and 1209 Hz high tone), the high tone’s deviation
is 1.334 (see example 2) × 1.735 (see example 3) approximately 2.314 times the
low tone’s deviation. Since the peak deviation of their sum is 3 kHz, the low
tone’s deviation is 905.5 Hz and the high tone’s deviation is 2094.5 Hz.
327

EDACS Encoder
EDACS Encoder
This encoder simulates an Ericsson/GE EDACS® (Enhanced Digital Access
Communications System) repeater site to test trunked mobile radios using that
format.
edac-en1.wmf
Figure 67 The EDACS Trunked Radio Encoder Mode Screen
328

EDACS Encoder
AFGen2 To
This audio frequency generator control is used to specify where the encoder’s data
is sent:
• FM is used to frequency modulate the RF Generator. This is the normally-used setting.
(Refer to the FM Coupling field description.)
• AM is used to amplitude modulate the RF Generator (not generally used for EDACS sig-
naling).
• Audio Out routes the data to the front-panel AUDIO OUT connector. The signal
could then be used as an external modulation source. (Refer to the Audio Out field
description.)
The encoder’s digital signal level is adjusted using the Signaling Dev and
Sub-Audible Dev fields. Changing the AFGen2 To setting automatically alters
the unit-of-measure for both of these fields (kHz, %, or mV).
Audio Out
The audio output coupling field selects ac or dc coupling of the encoder to the
AUDIO OUT connector. Because the EDACS Encoder sends low-speed data, this
field should be set to DC when the AUDIO OUT port is used. The AFGen2 To
field must be set to Audio Out to use this function.
Control Channel, Number

This field is used to specify the Control Channel number for the EDACS system
(typically 1 to 25).
Control Channel, RX Frequency

This field is used to specify the Control Channel receive frequency for the mobile.
Control Channel, TX Frequency

This field is used to specify the Control Channel transmit frequency for the
mobile.
329

EDACS Encoder
Data Rate
This field sets the data rate (in bits-per-second) for the high-speed signaling. The
value can be changed using the keypad, or by selecting a value from the
Standard field. However, the 9600 bps rate is the EDACS default, and should
not be changed under most circumstances. (4800 is used for narrowband 900 MHz
systems in the U.S.)
FM Coupling
This field is used to select ac or dc coupling of the encoder to the RF Generator
when the AFGen2 To field is set to FM. Because the EDACS Encoder sends low-
speed data, this field should be set to DC.
Group ID
This field is used to specify the group identification number for the trunked radio
group your radio is set up to access.
Handshake
This field is used to get the mobile up on a working channel after it has accessed
the control channel.
When Send is selected, the control channel message is output at the receive
frequency specified in the Control Channel settings. The Status: field
changes from Idle to Control, and the RF Analyzer is tuned to the control
channel’s transmit frequency.
The control channel message must be transmitting before a handshake can be
initiated. The Status: field indicates Control when the control channel is
transmitting, and changes to Working when the working channel is being sent.
330

EDACS Encoder
Logical ID
This field is used to specify the identification number of the calling radio. It
should be set to the Logical ID of the radio being tested when performing
transmitter tests. Generally, when performing receiver tests, it must be set to a
Logical ID different from that of the radio being tested.
Polarity
This setting determines how the encoder’s digital data modulates the RF
Generator. This field is usually set to Norm. Invert is used for narrowband
systems. This field is automatically set to the correct polarity by the Standard
field.
When this field is set to Invert, a logical high (1) causes the output level of the
encoder to be negative. A logical low (0) causes the level to become positive.
When using FM, the RF Generator would then produce a negative frequency
deviation for a positive-going digital transition - the opposite of the normal mode
of operation.
This field is automatically set to the correct polarity by the Standard field.
RX Test
When Start is selected, the encoder sends a digital message over the control
channel to tell the mobile to go to the specified working channel (called a channel
assignment). Immediately after the message is sent, the RF Generator’s and RF
Analyzer’s frequencies are automatically changed to match the same working
channel settings.
See Also
Handshake field description, on page 330
331

EDACS Encoder
Signaling Dev
This field is used to specify the high-speed data level. The unit-of-measure used
depends on the AFGen2 To setting.
• When AFGen2 To is set to FM, the displayed units are kHz or Hz. This is the normal-
ly-used setting for testing EDACS radios.
• When AFGen2 To is set to AM, the displayed unit is %.
• When AFGen2 To is set to Audio Out, the displayed units are µV, mV, or V.
See Also
AFGen2 To field description, on page 329
Site ID
This field is used to specify the identification number of the repeater site being
simulated by the encoder.
Standard
This field specifies the signaling standard used by the radio: 4800 bps
(narrowband) or 9600 bps (wideband). In addition to telling the encoder and
decoder which system is being used, this field presets the values of certain fields
as shown in the following table.
Standard
Field
9600 4800
Data Rate 9600.0 4800.0
Signaling Dev 3.00 1.80
Sub-Audible Dev 750 350
(Encoder) Polarity Norm Invert
332

EDACS Encoder
Status
This field indicates what the encoder is doing.
Idle is displayed when no data is being sent.
Control is displayed when control channel data is being output.
Working is displayed when a handshake has been performed and working channel data
is being sent.
Sub-Audible Dev
This field is used to specify the low-speed data level. The unit-of-measure used
depends on the AFGen2 To setting.
• When AFGen2 To is set to FM, the displayed units are kHz or Hz. This is the normal-
ly-used setting for testing EDACS radios.
• When AFGen2 To is set to AM, the displayed unit is %.
• When AFGen2 To is set to Audio Out, the displayed units are µV, mV, or V.
See Also
AFGen2 To field description, on page 329
Stop
This field is used to stop the control channel or working channel data from being
output. The carrier continues to be output, but without the digital modulation.
Working Channel, Number

This field is used to specify the working channel number for the EDACS system
(typically 1 to 25).
Working Channel: RX Frequency

This field is used to specify the working’s channel receive frequency for the
mobile.
Working Channel: TX Frequency

This field is used to specify the working channel’s transmit frequency for the
mobile.
333

Using the EDACS Encoder

Hewlett-Packard offers software packages to fully test your EDACS radio in a
fraction of the time normally required for complete manual testing. Under
software control, you can perform receiver and transmitter tests on several
channels in succession very quickly.
You can choose any combination of tests, from full transmitter and receiver
testing, to a single test. The software is shipped on a memory card that inserts
directly into your Test Set, and it comes with complete documentation and a blank
SRAM memory card for storing your test procedures and test data.
334

Testing EDACS Mobiles

When the mobile is turned on, it automatically tunes to its pre-programmed
control channel frequency. The Test Set generates the control channel’s carrier
and site identification data using the RF Generator’s and the EDACS Encoder’s
settings. (The RF carrier level for the control channel and working channel is
adjusted using the Amplitude field on the DUPLEX TEST screen.) Once the
mobile is receiving the Control Channel, the encoder can send a digital message to
the mobile to go to a designated Working Channel for making receiver tests (this
is called a handshake).
Testing the Mobile’s Receiver

If the working channel’s RF carrier’s level is high enough, the mobile’s receiver
unsquelches to allow the modulating signal (speech or a test tone) to be heard
from your mobile’s speaker.
If the audio output (speaker) connection of your mobile is connected to the
AUDIO IN connectors of the Test Set, you can then make receiver audio-quality
measurements such as distortion at 1 kHz, and SINAD.
Testing the Mobile’s Transmitter

The EDACS Encoder’s information is used to help the EDACS Decoder receive
and decode transmitted data from the mobile. After entering all of the information
in the EDACS Encoder screen, the EDACS Decoder screen is accessed to get the
mobile transmitting and to decode the digital data. With the transmitter keyed, you
can access the TX TEST or DUPLEX TEST screen to measure transmitter power,
and transmitter frequency or transmitter frequency error. You can also decode and
display the transmitted data using the EDACS Decoder. Refer to the "EDACS
Decoder" on page 241 for more information on EDACS Transmitter Testing.
335

Mobile Receiver Test Procedure

The following procedure establishes a control channel connection between the
Test Set and your mobile, and then performs a handshake to pass the mobile to a
working channel. Receiver measurements can then be made.
NOTE: Each EDACS radio is pre-programmed to access a specific control channel and one or more
working channels. Other identification information is also
pre-programmed into the mobile (such as the Logical ID and Group ID numbers). You cannot
test an EDACS mobile without entering these values into the Encoder.
Connect the Mobile to the Test Set

1. Press the PRESET key on the Test Set.
2. Connect the mobile’s antenna port to the Test Set’s RF IN/OUT port.
3. Connect the mobile’s audio output to the AUDIO IN HI port of the Test Set. (The AU-
DIO IN LO port is typically only used when the mobile’s antenna port shield is not at
the same potential as the audio output shield. See the AF ANALYZER screen, Audio
In Lo field description, on page 99.)
4. Turn the mobile on.
336

Get the Mobile Up on the Control Channel

1. Turn AF Generator 1 Off (to disable the default 3 kHz FM deviation). To do this, po-
sition the cursor in front of the 3.00 value in the AFGen1 To field on the RF GEN-
ERATOR or DUPLEX TEST screen and press the ON/OFF key.
2. Select ENCODER from the To Screen menu.
3. Select the Mode field and choose EDACS from the Choices menu.
4. Select the standard used by the radio (4800 or 9600 bps).
5. Enter the Control Channel settings.
• The Number is the system control channel number programmed into your mobile.
• The RX Frequency is the control channel’s receive frequency for your mobile.
• The TX Frequency is the control channel’s transmit frequency for your mobile.
6. Enter the Working Channel settings.
• The Number is the working channel number (programmed into your mobile) that
you want the mobile to be sent to.
• The RX Frequency is the mobile’s receive frequency for the selected working
channel.
• The TX Frequency is the mobile’s transmit frequency for the selected working
channel.
7. Enter the Logical ID number.
8. Enter the Group ID number.
9. Enter the Site ID number.
10. Select the Send field (under RX Test). The Status: field should now indicate
Control.
11. The Test Set should now be sending the control channel’s site identification informa-
tion to the mobile, and the mobile should indicate that it is receiving the control channel
data.
12. Select the Handshake field. This tells the mobile and RF Generator to go to the work-
ing channel frequencies. The mobile should now indicate that it is “busy”, and is tuned
to a working channel (this is a “receiver handshake”). The Status: field should now
indicate Working.
337

Make Receiver Measurements

1. Press the RX key to access the RX TEST screen.
2. Turn AF Generator 1 On. (Position the cursor in front of the Off entry in the lower part
of the AFGen1 To field, and press the ON/OFF key.) The entry should now read
3.00. The working channel is now being modulated at a 1 kHz rate (AFGen1 Freq)
with 3 kHz deviation (AFGen1 To) in addition to the subaudible EDACS signaling
from the encoder (AFGen2).
3. Set the volume control on your mobile to about half of full scale. (You may or may not
hear the 1 kHz tone from your radio’s speaker, depending on how the external speaker
connection affects the speaker.)
4. Turn up the VOLUME of the Test Set. You should be able to hear the 1 kHz tone.
Your mobile’s SINAD is displayed, as well as the AC Level of the audio output.
You can now change the RF Generator’s Amplitude setting to check sensitivity,
or select the SINAD measurement to list and access other available audio
measurements.
338

Function Generator Encoder

The Function Generator provides single-tone audio frequency signals of various
waveforms, amplitudes, and frequencies. Its signal can be used to modulate the
RF Generator, or it can be output through the front-panel AUDIO OUT connector.
func-ec.wmf
Figure 68 The Function Generator Encoder Screen
339

AFGen2 Freq
This field sets the tone frequency for the Function Generator.
AFGen2 To
• The upper field determines whether the Function Generator’s signal modulates the RF
Generator, or is output through the AUDIO OUT connector.
When the Waveform field is set to Sine and the signal is output to the AUDIO
OUT connector, the amplitude can be set in units of rms or peak voltage. This is
done in the Sine Units field that appears when Audio Out is selected. In all
other cases, the amplitude is always set in peak voltage.
Audio Out
Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the Function Generator to the
AUDIO OUT connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out.
FM Coupling
connector.
Sine Units
This field specifies whether the signal’s output is in units of rms or peak. This
field is only present when the AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out.
340

Waveform
This field selects the desired waveform for AF Generator 2. The available
waveforms are as follows:
Sine wave
Square wave
Triangle wave
Ramp (positive-going and negative-going)
DC±
Universal Noise
Gaussian Noise
341

LTR Encoder
LTR Encoder
This Encoder mode is used to test trunked mobile radios that use the EF Johnson
LTR® (Logic Trunked Radio) format. Two different trunking messages can be
used (Message1 and Message 2) to allow you to change radio operation while the
encoder is running.
Itr-en1.wmf
Figure 69 The LTR Trunked Radio Encoder Mode Screen
342

LTR Encoder
AFGen2 To
• The upper field determines whether the LTR Encoder’s signal modulates the RF Gen-
erator, or is output through AUDIO OUT (normally set to FM for LTR signaling).
• The lower field sets the amplitude, including Off (typically set to 1 kHz for LTR sig-
naling).
Area 1, Area 2
Enter the trunked system Area Number (0 or 1) programmed into your radio.
Audio Out
Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the LTR Encoder to the
AUDIO OUT connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out.
Bursts
This field defines the number of times Message 1 or Message 2 is output each
time Send is selected. This function works only when the Send Mode field is set
to Burst.
Data Rate
Enter the LTR signaling data rate used for your radio. The standard and default
value is 297.6 bits-per-second.
FM Coupling
This field alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from the LTR Encoder’s
modulation source. This field should be set to DC when testing trunked radios.
This field also selects ac or dc coupling between the RF Generator’s frequency
modulator and the rear-panel MODULATION INPUT connector.
343

LTR Encoder
Free 1, Free 2
Enter the repeater number to transmit to when the radio is keyed. When channel
switching is performed, you would specify any of the other repeaters in the
system.
Goto 1, Goto 2
Enter the repeater number to receive when the message is sent.
Home 1, Home2
Enter the home repeater number programmed into your radio.
ID 1, ID 2
Enter the transmit or receive ID number programmed into your radio.
LTR message
This field selects which message (Message1 or Message2) is output when Send is
selected. The underlined message is output.
Polarity
This setting determines the relationship between the LTR Encoder’s data stream
logic levels and the effect on the modulated signal.
When this field is set to Invert, a logical high (1) causes the output level of the
AF Generator to be more negative. A logical low (0) causes the level to become
positive by the same amount.
Send
Selecting this field causes the LTR Encoder to start modulating the RF Generator.
344

LTR Encoder
Send Mode
sequence. Cont is typically used for LTR radio testing.
• Single outputs Message 1 or Message 2 once.
• Burst outputs the message the number of times specified in the Bursts field.
• Cont causes the message to be repeated continuously until Stop is selected.
• Step is not used with this encoder mode.
Standard
This field selects the trunked radio standard for your radio.
Stop
Selecting this field stops the message being output when the Send Mode is set to
Cont or Burst. After this field is selected, the current repetition of the message is
finished.
345

Using the LTR Encoder
$ATA $IRECTION
BITS BITS BITS BITS BITS BITS BITS
'/ 4/ 2%0%!4%2 (/-% #(!..%, )$ #/$% /& &2%% %22/2 #(%#+

39.# !2%!
&/2 #!,,%$ 2!$)/ /& #!,,%$ 2!$)/ #!,,%$ 2!$)/ 2%0%!4%2 ")43
!REA 'OTO (OM E )$ &REE
!REA 'OTO (OM E )$ &REE
Figure 70 How Message 1 and Message 2 Fields are Used to Create Trunking Data
346

Radio Test Examples

The following procedures establish a receiver or transmitter trunked channel on
the home channel.
To Test Your Receiver

To establish a trunked receiver channel on the home channel,
1. Connect the RF IN/OUT port of the Test Set to your radio’s antenna port.
2. If you want to make audio measurements, connect your radio’s speaker output to the
Test Set’s AUDIO IN port(s), and turn the Test Set’s VOLUME up about half way.
3. Turn your radio’s volume up about half way.
4. Turn your radio on, and select the channel to test.
5. Press the PRESET key (to establish a known instrument state for this procedure).
7. Set the Tune Mode field to Manual.
8. Set the RF Gen Freq field to the receive frequency for the selected channel. (Note
that the preset function caused the Amplitude to be set to -80 dBm, and AFGen1 is
set to 1 kHz FM with 3 kHz deviation. These settings should work with your radio to
produce the audio tone.)
9. Access the ENCODER screen, and select the LTR mode.
10. Enter your Area Number (0 or 1) in the Area 1 field.
11. Enter the home channel number in these fields: Goto 1, Home 1, and Free 1. (For
example, if your radio’s home channel is 2, enter 2 in all three fields.)
12. Enter the Receive ID number for your radio in the ID 1 field.
13. Set the Send Mode field to Cont.
14. Set the AFGen2 To field to FM, 1 kHz.
15. Set the FM Coupling field to DC.
16. Select Send to continuously output the encoded signal.
You should hear the 1 kHz tone from your radio and/or the Test Set’s speaker,
indicating that the trunked channel has been established.
If you connected the radio’s speaker to the AUDIO IN port(s), access the
DUPLEX TEST screen to display the AC Level and SINAD measurements.
347

To make a 12 dB SINAD measurement

1. Set Filter 1 to 300Hz HPF and Filter 2 to 3kHz LPF.
2. Decrease the Amplitude until approximately 12 dB SINAD is displayed.
3. Use the AVG (average) function to stabilize the measurement by positioning the cursor
in front of the SINAD dB field and pressing and releasing the SHIFT key, then the
INCR ×10 key to access the AVG function, then press the ENTER key.
To Test Your Transmitter

To establish a trunked transmit channel on the home channel:
1. Connect the RF IN/OUT port of the Test Set to your radio’s antenna port.
2. Turn your radio on, and select the channel to test.
3. Press the PRESET key (to establish a known instrument state for this procedure).
5. Set the Tune Mode field to Manual.
6. Enter the home channel’s transmit frequency in the Tune Freq field.
7. Enter the home channel’s receive frequency in the RF Gen Freq field.
8. Set AFGen1 To to Off.
10. Access the ENCODER screen, and select the LTR mode.
11. Set up Message 1 with idle message data:
a. Enter your Area Number (0 or 1) in the Area 1 field.
b. Enter the home channel number in these fields: Goto 1, Home 1, and Free 1.
c. Enter 255 in the ID 1 field to establish an idle channel.
12. Set up Message 2 with transmit message data:
a. Enter your Area Number (0 or 1) in the Area 2 field.
b. Enter the home channel number in these fields: Goto 2, Home 2, and Free 2.
c. Enter the Transmit ID number for your radio in the ID 2 field.
13. Set the Send Mode field to Cont.
14. Set the AFGen2 To field to FM, 1 kHz.
15. Set the FM Coupling field to DC.
16. Set the LTR message field to Message1.
17. Select Send to continuously output idle message.
18. Key the transmitter.
19. Select Message2 in the LTR message field to tell your radio to transmit. If the
transmitter fails to establish a transmit channel before time-out occurs, try again using
these steps:
a. De-key the transmitter.
b. Select Message 1.
c. Key the transmitter.
d. Select Message 2.
348

Once a transmit channel is established, turn the Test Set’s VOLUME up and
speak into your radio’s microphone. You should hear your voice out of the Test
Set’s speaker. Access the DUPLEX TEST screen to display the transmitter’s
power and frequency error.
Performing Channel Changes

Testing the mobile’s ability to change to other receive channels when commanded
requires rapid RF Generator frequency changes. After the idle message on the
home channel has been established (using Message 1), a message is sent to change
channels (Message 2). The mobile must see the LTR-encoded carrier at the new
channel frequency within a few seconds to establish the new channel. You can
change the RF Generator’s frequency using a global USER key after entering an
increment value equal to the required channel offset. This procedure must be done
very quickly to work.
The best way to perform a channel change is to use an HP-IB or IBASIC program
to change the RF Generator’s frequency to the new channel frequency
immediately after the appropriate message has been output.

Hewlett-Packard offers software packages to test your LTR-format trunked radio
in a fraction of the time normally required for manual testing. You can choose any
combination of tests, from full transmitter and receiver testing, to a single test.
The software is shipped on a memory card that inserts directly into your Test Set,
and it comes with complete documentation and a blank SRAM memory card for
storing your test procedures and test data.
349

MPT 1327 Encoder
MPT 1327 Encoder

This encoder is used to test trunked mobile radios that use the MPT 1327
standard. It is primarily intended to be controlled using IBASIC programs running
on the Test Set’s IBASIC controller or on an external controller.
mpt-en1.wmf
Figure 71 The MPT 1327 Trunked Radio Encoder Mode Screen
Address Qualifier
The Address Qualifier field allows you to enter the address qualifier. The
address qualifier is a bit mask. It indicates the number of bits in the identity field
which have to be compared by a radio unit (RU) when it is deciding whether the
ALH or MOVE message is addressed to that RU.
The address qualifier is a two-digit decimal integer without leading zeros. It has
the range 0 through 20 and its default value is 0.
• A value of 0 corresponds to no bits being compared (all RUs receive the ALH or MOVE
message).
• A value of 20 corresponds to all bits being compared (the ALH or MOVE being
addressed to one specific RU).
• For a value of M between 0 and 20, sub-divide the RU population into 2M subsets.
350

MPT 1327 Encoder
Aloha Number
The Aloha Number field allows you to enter the aloha number. The aloha
number defines the number of timeslots in the random access frames on the
forward control channel. The value entered in this field is translated to a frame
length according to table 8.
The aloha number is a two-digit decimal integer without leading zeros. It has a
range 0 through 15, and its default value is 5.
Table 8 Aloha number encoding for 4-bit aloha numbers
Aloha Number Frame length

0 Not a frame marker
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 12
12 15
13 19
14 25
15 32
351

MPT 1327 Encoder
Control Channel
The Control Channel field allows you to enter the Control Channel number.
Radio units (RU) are programmed to look for control channel signaling on a
restricted set of radio channels, known as the hunt group. It is essential that the
channel number on which the Test Set transmits the control channel signaling
matches one of the channels in the RU’s hunt group. If there is not a match, no
communication will be possible.
The control channel is a four-digit decimal integer without leading zeros. It has
the range 0 through 1023, and its default value is 1.
Test Mode
The Test Mode field is used to select how the encoder is used for tests:
Selection Description
Off In this mode the signaling hardware is disabled and does not transmit
data.
Control In this mode the signaling hardware is enabled and is retransmitting a
basic control channel structure as defined by the content of the filler
buffer. (Refer to "Forward Control Channel Message and Filler
Buffers" on page 354 for an explanation of the filler buffer). One or
more timeslots in the filler pattern can be overlaid by messages from
the control message buffer under control of the Send field.
Traffic In this mode the signaling hardware is enabled. The filler pattern is
not transmitted. Single or multi-timeslot messages can be transmitted
from the traffic message buffer under the control of the Send field.
1200Hz In this mode the signaling hardware is enabled and transmits a contin-
uous 1200 Hz tone (equivalent to an FFSK transmission of continu-
ous ones).
1800Hz In this mode the signaling hardware is enabled and transmits a contin-
uous 1800 Hz tone (equivalent to an FFSK transmission of continu-
ous zeros).
Dotting In this mode the signaling hardware is enabled and transmits alternat-
ing 1200 Hz and 1800 Hz tones (equivalent to an FFSK transmission
of alternating ones and zeros).
352

MPT 1327 Encoder
Traffic Channel
The Traffic Channel field allows you to enter the traffic channel number. The
traffic channel is a four-digit decimal integer without leading zeros. It has the
range 0 through 1023, and its default value is 1.
Undisplayed Controls
Some MPT 1327 controls are not displayed on the encoder screen; they are only
accessed using IBASIC commands over HP-IB. These controls include the delay
parameter, the SYNC and SYNT synchronization codewords, and the message
and filler buffers.
The controls listed in the remainder of this section are not displayed on the MPT
1327 Encoder screen.
Delay Parameter for Repeat Transmissions

This control is only available using IBASIC commands; it is not displayed on the
MPT 1327 Encoder screen.
In the aloha message there is a bit field which indicates to the radio unit (RU) how
long it should wait for a response from the TSC. If the RU does not receive a
response within this period it should re-issue the request. This is generally set to a
fixed value determined by the protocol speed and the responsiveness of IBASIC.
In some circumstances it may be useful to change this value.
Table 9 Delay Parameter to Actual Response Delay
Delay Parameter Response delay

0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 10
7 15
The delay parameter has a range 0 through 7, with a default value of 7.

This control is listed as RDELay in the HP-IB Syntax Diagrams in the
353

MPT 1327 Encoder
Forward Control Channel Message and Filler Buffers

The encoder screen Test Mode field selects the type of signal being transmitted
by the signaling hardware (as explained in "Test Mode" on page 352). The most
important modes are the Control and Traffic modes.
In the Control mode the Test Set continuously generates a slotted aloha forward
control channel, as defined and controlled from IBASIC. In Traffic mode the
Test Set generates individual messages, as defined and controlled from IBASIC.
These modes are central to testing MPT 1327 RUs. An RU must acquire and
validate a control channel. It must also be instructed, by control channel signaling,
to proceed to a traffic channel before any RF or audio measurements can be
performed.
During testing it is necessary to generate the forward control channel
continuously; initially, for the RU to acquire and validate the control channel for
exchanging the necessary call setup signaling; thereafter, for the RU to remain
locked onto the control channel, awaiting exchange of further signaling. This also
prevents the RU from re-entering control channel acquisition procedures.
The exception to this is when the RU-under-test is participating in a test call on a
traffic channel. It is not necessary to maintain the control channel signaling during
test calls as there is only one RU in the test environment and it is on a traffic
channel.
As there is only one RU, the control channel signaling comprises a fixed slotted
aloha sequence with occasional variations to send specific messages (such as
requests for registration (RQR), broadcast messages (BCAST), ahoy messages
(AHY)).
The filler buffer contains the repeating pattern of the forward control channel. It
also contains a message buffer from which selected timeslots in the filler buffer
can be replaced on a one-off or repeating basis.
354

MPT 1327 Encoder
The control channel filler buffer comprises 32 individual timeslots. It is accessed only
through the HP-IB with the following command:
ENCoder:MPT1327:FILLer:DATA n,string
Where
• n is the location selector and has the range 1 through 32.
• string is a string containing a signaling language command defining the content of one
timeslot. Some signaling language commands also define data codewords and therefore
translate to data for two or three timeslots. The signaling language commands take the
form of an assembly language.
NOTE: In MPT 1327 an address codeword can be followed by up to four data codewords. A data
codeword occupies half of one timeslot. The signaling language definition restricts the
firmware to accept only two or four data codewords. An odd number of data codewords must
be added to occupy a whole number of timeslots. For messages with an odd number of data
codewords the padding word must be generated by IBASIC.
An example of the format is given in the sequence of commands below. It defines

a two timeslot random access frame with a broadcast message, transmitted on
channel 212 of system 490116.
ENC:MPT1327:FILL:DATA 1,’ALH 0,ALLI,212,0,0,2’

ENC:MPT1327:FILL:DATA 2,’ALH 0,ALLI,212,0,0,0’
ENC:MPT1327:FILL:DATA 3,’BCAST 2,#H4901,0,0’
The signaling commands from such strings are assembled into 48-bit address and
data codeword message values.
For an address codeword message, the timeslot (128-bits) consists of a 64-bit
control channel system codeword (CCSC), followed by the address message,
followed by a 16-bit parity word.
Data codeword messages are taken in pairs. Each has its own 16-bit parity word.
The firmware is never supplied with an odd number of codewords. The resulting
pair of 64-bit words is concatenated to again give 128-bits.
The resulting 128-bits are stored in the addressed location of the filler buffer.
Figure 72 on page 356, shows a signaling instruction being processed, and should
clarify this explanation.
355

MPT 1327 Encoder
)"!3)#
ENC : MPT1327 : FILL : DATA 1,’ALH ,,100 , 0 , 0 , 1 ‘
(
0)
"
3)'.!,).' &)2-7!2% !33%-",%2
%.#/$%2 3#2%%. SETTING & DEFAULTS ALH 0,8191 , 100 , 0 , 0 , 1
PFIX = 0 80FFFC02E001
IDENT = 8191
etc..
PARITY
CCSC
D9I9
4567F697AAAAC4D7
4567F697AAAAC4D780FFFC02E001D919
&),,%2 "5&&%2
1: 4567F697AAAAC4D780FFFC02E001D919
2:
32:
3)'.!,).' (!2$7!2%
Figure 72 Sequence of Events in Assembling a Signaling Message
356

MPT 1327 Encoder
If the signaling command has the data codeword extension, DCW2 or DCW4,
subsequent timeslot locations are overwritten with the data codewords. If this
results in a write to a timeslot greater than 32, the write will wrap back to timeslot
one.
A new filler pattern typically comprises several commands to be written. Since
each is written individually, the following update command is also needed to
transfer data into the working filler buffer:
ENCoder:MPT1327:FILLer:UPDATe
To complete the command set for managing the filler buffer, the individual
timeslot locations of the filler buffer are cleared by the following command:
ENCoder:MPT1327:FILLer:CLEAR n
Where n selects the timeslot to be cleared and has the range 1 through 32.
The whole buffer is cleared by the command:
ENCoder:MPT1327:FILLer:RESET
When the Test Mode field is in Control mode, the signaling firmware/
hardware will cycle through the defined part of the filler buffer, transmitting each
128-bit timeslot in turn. This is shown in figure 73 on page 357. Figure 73 also
shows the control message buffer for comparison with figure 74 on page 359.
TIMESLOT 1 7721B4C0 . . D9
2 5439AB12 . . 01 666430CB . . AD
3 098BB27A . . 01
4 201759BC . . A8
5 7492AB40 . . 00 449DDE30 . . 02
6 91032000 . . 1B
7 67230CB2 . . 04
8 0980700D . . FF
31
32
FILLER BUFFER CC MESSAGE BUFFER
Figure 73 Forward Control Channel in Control Mode and Not Sending
357

MPT 1327 Encoder
The IBASIC test program occasionally alters the content of the forward control
channel temporarily (for example to send an ACKI in response to an RQS). The
message buffer enables IBASIC to do this without having to reload the filler
buffer.
The control channel message buffer (like the filler buffer), comprises 32 locations,
corresponding to the 32 timeslot capacity of the filler buffer. These are accessed
through HP-IB with the following command:
ENCoder:MPT1327:MESSage:CONTrol:DATA n,string
Where
• n is the location selector and has the range 1 through 32.
• string is a string containing a signaling command. The signaling command is assembled
as for the filler buffer and written into the selected location. If the signaling command
has one of the data codeword extensions (DCW2 or DCW4), subsequent timeslot loca-
tions are overwritten with the data codewords.
The control channel message buffer is activated by the following HP-IB
command:
ENCoder:SEND
If the encoder is configured for single operation, the message buffer contents will
be sent once.
If the encoder is configured for burst or continuous operation, the control channel
message buffer can be de-activated by the following HP-IB command:
ENCoder:STOP
The ENC:STOP/ENC:SEND command sequence is also an UPDATE command.
New timeslot contents written using ENC:MPT1327:MESS:CONT:DATA are
buffered until the STOP/SEND sequence causes the control message buffer to be
updated.
NOTE: The encoder’s sending status can be monitored to establish when a message has been sent by
looking at the bit-8 “Encoder sending Aux Information” in the Hardware Status Register #1.
For further information on the Hardware Status Register refer to the Programmer’s Guide.
When the Test Mode field is in Control mode and the control message buffer is
activated by ENC:SEND, the signaling firmware/hardware cycles through the
defined part of the filler buffer. It transmits each 128-bit filler buffer timeslot in
turn. This happens except where there is a message defined in the corresponding
timeslot of the control message buffer. In this case the contents of the control
message buffer are transmitted as shown in figure 74 on page 359.
358

MPT 1327 Encoder
TIMESLOT 1 7721B4C0 . . D9
2 5439AB12 . . 01 666430CB . . AD
3 098BB27A . . 01
4 201759BC . . A8
5 7492AB40 . . 00 449DDE30 . . 02
6 91032000 . . 1B
7 67230CB2 . . 04
8 0980700D . . FF
31
32
FILLER BUFFER CC MESSAGE BUFFER
Figure 74 Forward Control Channel in Control Mode and Sending
Figure 74 shows that messages defined in contiguous timeslots, following the last
timeslot defined in the filler message, are transmitted between each repeat of the
filler pattern.
This can be used, for example, to insert a registration frame (ALHR) between the
normal filler frames.
The individual timeslot locations of the message buffer can be cleared by the
following command:
ENCoder:MPT1327:MESSage:CONTrol:CLEAR n
where n is the timeslot to be cleared and has the range 1 through 32.
In addition the whole message buffer can be cleared by the following command:
ENCoder:MPT1327:MESSage:CONTrol:RESET
Traffic Channel Message Buffer

When the RU-under-test moves to a traffic channel, the IBASIC test program
needs to stop the transmission of the control channel signaling temporarily but
still be able to send individual messages (for example, to send a CLEAR message).
359

MPT 1327 Encoder
When Test Mode is set to Traffic, the control channel filler and message
buffers are disabled, and a traffic channel message buffer is enabled. A message is
sent from the traffic channel message buffer on demand by use of ENC:SEND.
Only messages in message buffer timeslot 1 and any contiguous timeslots are
sent. Refer to figure 75 .
201759BC . . A8
666430CB . . AD
TO MESSAGE BUFFER
Figure 75 Traffic Channel Message Generation
Control and Traffic Channel Message Structures

In both control and traffic mode, the signaling transmissions commence with the
standard link establishment time (LET), preamble, and SYNC or SYNT pattern,
and the transmissions are terminated with a “hang-over” bit as shown in figure 76
and figure 77 .
360

MPT 1327 Encoder
,%4 02%!-",% -%33!'%

!!!!

4)-%3,/4 ")43 BPS MS
39.# !$$2%33 #/$%7/2$ ##3# !$$2%33 #/$%7/2$

#$

393 ##3 02%!-",% 0!2)49 #/$%7/2$ -%33!'% 0!2)49

!!!! #$

Figure 76 Forward Control Channel Message Structure
,%4 02%!-",% -%33!'%

!!!!

4)-%3,/4 ")43 BPS MS
39.4 !$$2%33 #/$%7/2$ $#7 $#7 %4#

/04)/!, $!4! #/$%7/2$3
Figure 77 Traffic Channel Message Structure
361

MPT 1327 Encoder
Table 10 describes the signaling encoder as it is changed between the various test modes.
Particular reference is made to how the control and traffic channel message structures are
started and stopped.
Table 10 Signaling Mode Transitions Table
To From Off Control Traffic 1200Hz 1800Hz Dotting
Off — A B C D E
Control F — H then B F then C F then D F then E
Traffic G I then A — G then C G then D G then E
1200Hz J J then A J then B — N O
1800Hz K K then A K then B M — O
Dotting L L then A L then B M N —
A. Start the control channel with a 6-bit LET, PREAMBLE, and SYNC. For the first ad-
dress codeword (before the repeating SYS, CCS, PREAMBLE, PARITY, CODE-
WORD, PARITY structure), the codeword comes from the second half of the filler (or
message) buffer timeslot 1.
B. Start the traffic channel with a LET, PREAMBLE, and SYNT. Again the first codeword
is taken from the timeslot 1 entry.
C. Turn on 1200 Hz sine wave starting at 0° phase.
D. Turn on 1800 Hz sine wave starting at 0° phase.
E. Turn on “dotting” with a 1 symbol. The starting phase may be 0° or 180°.
F. Continue to generate the control channel until the end of the filler buffer (and message
buffer if messages are present) then produce a hang-over bit and stop. The hang-over
bit repeats the last bit of the transmission.
G. Continue to generate the traffic channel until the message is completed then produce a
hang-over bit and stop. The hang-over bit is followed by one “off” bit before the next
sequence begins.
H. Stop control channel generation after the next bit.
I. Stop traffic channel generation after the next bit.
J. Turn off 1200 Hz sine wave on completion of the next symbol.
K. Turn off 1800 Hz sine wave on completion of the next symbol.
L. Turn off “dotting” on completion of the next 1010 symbol. Dotting is sent as the se-
quence 1010 rather than 10. This makes the trace on the internal scope stable when trig-
gered by the encoder since every second 1 starts on the opposite phase.
M. Make a phase continuous transition to 1200 Hz on completion of the next symbol.
N. Make a phase continuous transition to 1800 Hz on completion of the next symbol.
O. Make a phase continuous transition to “dotting” (starting with a 1 symbol) on comple-
tion of the next 1010 sequence.
362

Using the MPT 1327 Encoder
Manually Testing MPT 1327 Radios

MPT 1327 signals contain complex groupings of digital data that vary in format
and function, depending on a number of system operating parameters.
To be able to test MPT 1327 radios using this screen, you must be familiar with
the theory, applications, and specifications of the MPT 1327 system. You must
also be familiar with IBASIC programming, since some of the required signaling
commands are not available on the encoder screen; they must be sent using
IBASIC commands. (See "Undisplayed Controls" on page 353 .)
The large volume of information required to explain the MPT 1327 system is
beyond the scope of this manual. Documents explaining the structure and
specifications of this system should be obtained from the radio communications
regulatory agency of the appropriate country.
System Identity
The System Identity uses two areas to enter the system identity number as
either a decimal or hexadecimal value. When a value is entered in either field, the
corresponding value is automatically entered in the other field.
The first field is a four-digit hexadecimal integer with leading zeros (H indicates
the hexadecimal number base). It has the range 0 through 7FFF16 and its default is
000016.
The second field is a five-digit decimal integer with leading zeros. It has the range
0 through 32767 and its default is 00000.
It is essential that the 15-bit system identity transmitted by the Test Set matches
the system identity programmed into the radio unit. If there is not a match, the RU
will not recognize the forward control channel and no communication will be
possible.
363

Radio Unit Under Test

The Radio Unit Under Test function uses two input fields; a 7-bit Prefix
field and a 13-bit Ident field. This allows you to enter the prefix and identity of
your radio unit (RU).
Each RU has a unique prefix/ident value that is used to address messages to that
RU only. An RU can also have a number of “group” prefix/ident values that it and
several other RUs respond to.
The prefix is a three-digit decimal integer with leading zeros. It has the range 0
through 127 and its default is 000.
The ident is a four-digit decimal integer with leading zeros. It has the range 0
through 8191 and its default is 0001.
364

Simulated Calling Unit

The Simulated Calling Unit function uses two input fields; a 7-bit Prefix
field and a 13-bit Ident field. This allows you to enter the prefix and identity of
the calling unit.
To test an RU the Test Set simulates a Trunking System Controller (TSC). In
some tests the Test Set simulates calls from a third party. For this purpose it is
necessary to specify the simulated calling unit’s number.
The simulated calling party could be any radio or line unit. It could also be one of
the special idents indicating, for example, a system wide call or a call from a
PABX or PSTN gateway.
The prefix is a three-digit decimal integer with leading zeros. It has the range 0
through 127 and its default value is 000.
The ident is a four-digit decimal integer with leading zeros. It has the range 0
through 8191 and its default value is 0002.
365

Nordic Mobile Telephone (NMT) Encoder

The NMT Encoder screen is used to create the different signals used to
communicate between the Mobile Station (MS), Base Station (BS), and Mobile
Telephone Exchange (MTX). The signal is output under program control from the
NMT Decoder screen.
The operation of the NMT Encoder is strongly dependent on functions used in the
NMT Decoder screen. For information about using the NMT Encoder and
Decoder see "Using the NMT Decoder/Encoder" on page 267 and "Creating NMT
Tests" on page 272.
nmt-en1.wmf
Figure 78 The NMT Encoder Screen
366

Access Channel Number

This field defines the channel number for the signal that initiates a call from the
MS to the MTX.
Valid Entry Range: 1 through 2023
NMT Frames Affected: 3d, 3dTA2, 4b, 4bTA2, 10aAC
This field is only used with the STD900 standard.
This setting affects the RF generator and analyzer frequencies used when the
TCHAN AC and RCHAN AC commands are used.
See Also
Calling Channel Number field description, on page 371
Access Channel Power

This channel’s power setting. Each power setting represents one of the four
available levels allowed by the NMT standards.
NMT Frames Affected: 3d, 3dTA2, 4b, 4bTA2, 10aAC.
Add Info
The additional information field contains various types of information, depending
on the frame type. Several frame types contain additional information digits in the
form H1 to H10, as outlined in the NMT system standards.
The following table shows the relationship between the Add Info, %, and Bate
Save fields, and how they are used in frame data. (The H1 to H10 designations
correspond to the frame digit assignments shown in the
NMT DOC. 900-1, Jan. 1985 standards.)
367

Table 11 NMT Additional Information Bits
Frames Content of Additional Information Digits
1a, 1a', 1a H1H2H3H4H5H6H7H8H9H10

All from Add Info field
1aS, 1a'S, 1a''S H1H2H4H5H6H7H8H9H10 From Add Info field

H3 From Bate Save field
1b, 1bTA1,1bTA2 H1H2H3H4H5H6H7 From Add Info field

H8H9H10 From Area # field
1bS H1H2H4H5H6H7 From Add Info field

H3 From Bate Save field
H8H9H20 From Area # field
2a, 2a', 2a'', 2e, 3b, H1H2H3H4H5H6H7 Not Used.

3bTA2, 3bTC2, 4, H8H9H10 From Area # field
4TA2,4b, 4bTA2, 30
2c, 2c', 2c'', 2d, 2d', 2d'', H1H2H3H4H5H6H7 Not used.

2f H8H9H10 Fixed by standard as fictitious channel numbers.
Valid Entry Range: 0000000000 - FFFFFFFFFF (hex)

NMT Frames Affected: (Refer to the Frames column in the preceding table.)
AFGen2 To
Audio frequency generator 2 to contains two fields:
• The upper field determines whether the NMT Encoder modulates the RF Generator, or
is output through AUDIO OUT.
368

Alarm Level Low

This field sets the lower trigger level for the signal-strength measurement’s alarm
for the Phi signal.
Valid Entry Range: 0 through F (hex)
NMT Frames Affected: 20, 25.
Alarm Level High

This field sets the upper trigger level for the signal-strength measurement’s alarm
for the Phi signal.
NMT Frames Affected: 20, 25.
Area #
The area number field identifies which MTX is used to call an MS. This
identification prevents MS to BS calling problems caused by co-channel
interference.
NMT Frames Affected: 1b, 1bS, 1bTA1, 1bTA2, 2a, 2a’, 2a’’, 2e, 3bTA2, 3b, 3bTC2, 4,
4TA2, 4b, 4bTA2, 10a, 10aAC, 10b, 10c, 10d, 11a, 11b, 12, 30.
This information is used to encode the information in the last three digits of the
Add Info field, rather than taking the information directly from that field.
369

Audio Out
Audio out coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the encoder to the AUDIO OUT
connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out.
BS Identity
The base station identity field provides the 3-digit hex code that identifies which
BS an MTX is communicating with.
Valid Entry Range: 000 through FFF (hex)
NMT Frames Affected: 20, 21b, 21c, 22.
Batt Save
The the length of the battery saving period in 5 second increments. For example, a
setting of 5 produces a 25-second period.
NMT Frames Affected: 1aS, 1a’S, 1a’’S, 1bS
370

Calling Channel Number

This number setting when initiating a call from the BS to the MS.
NMT Frames Affected: 1a, 1a’, 1a’’, 1aS, 1a’S, 1a’’S, 1b, 1bS, 2a, 2a’, 2a’’, 2b, 2b’, 2b’’,
2c, 2c’, 2c’’, 2d, 2d’, 2d’’, 2e, 2f, 10a, 10d, 11b.
This setting affects the RF frequencies the RF generator and analyzer tune to
when the TCHAN CC and RCHAN CC commands are used.
Each NMT standard has its own range of available channels. Table 12 lists the
valid channel assignments for Calling, Traffic, and Access channels.
Table 12 Valid Channel Assignments
NMT Standard Valid Channel Numbers

STD450 1 to 180
STD900 1 to 1000, 1025 to 2023
Calling Channel Power

This field specifies the calling channel’s power setting. Each Power setting
represents one of the four available levels allowed by the NMT standards.
NMT Frames Affected: 1a, 1a’, 1a’’, 1aS, 1a’S, 1a’’S, 1b, 1bS, 2a, 2a’, 2a’’, 2b, 2b’, 2b’’,
2c, 2c’, 2c’’, 2d, 2d’, 2d’’, 2e, 2f, 10a, 10d, 11b.
Data Rate
This field specifies the rate that the frames are output in bits-per-second. This
field also sets the data rate expected by the NMT Decoder.
Valid Entry Range: 9.2 through 2400
371

DUT
The device-under-test field defines the device you are testing.
Valid Entries: MS, BS, MTX
NMT Frames Affected: None
This field affects the RF generator and analyzer frequencies used for the NMT
TCHAN and RCHAN program commands.
This field also affects how frames are interpreted by the decoder when
determining the type of frame being received.
FM Coupling
connector.
Meas Ch #
The measurement channel number field specifies the channel whose signal
strength is measured.
NMT Frames Affected: 21b, 21c, 26.
See Also
372

Meas Field Strength

This field specifies the Phi Signal strength measurement that is sent from the BS
to the MTX.
NMT Frames Affected: 26
Mgmt/Maint
The management/maintenance field is used to send system status information.
Valid Entry Range: 000000 through FFFFFF (hex)
NMT Frames Affected: 22, 27, 28.
MSN
The mobile subscriber number field specifies the unique seven-digit code that
identifies an MS.
Valid Entry Range: 0000000 through FFFFFFF (hex)
NMT Frames Affected: 2a, 2a’, 2a’’, 2b, 2b’, 2b’’, 2c, 2c’, 2c’’, 2d, 2d’, 2d’’, 2e, 2f, 3a1,
3a2, 3b, 3bTA2, 3bTC2, 3c, 3d, 3dTA2, 5a, 5b, 10a, 10aAC, 10b, 10c, 10d, 11, 11a,
11b, 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b.
Phi Signal
This field specifies the F (Phi) signal frequency.
NMT Frames Affected: 20, 21b, 21c, 25, 26.
373

Password
This field specifies the 3-digit code added to the end of the MSN to prevent
unauthorized use of a subscriber number.
Valid Entry Range: 000 through FFF (hex)
NMT Frames Affected: 10b, 10c, 11a, 12.
Pre-Emp
Pre-emphasis, when used, attenuates the lower frequency tone (1200 Hz at
1200 bps) to 2/3 of the field level setting.
SIS Challenge
The subscriber identity security challenge field is used to confirm a subscriber’s
MS identity.
Valid Entry Range: 0000000 through FFFFFFF (hex)
NMT Frame Affected: 7
SIS Response
The subscriber identity security response field is used to respond to the SIS
challenge to confirm a subscriber’s MS identity.
Valid Entry Range: 0000 through FFFF (hex)
NMT Frame Affected: 16
374

Standard
This NMT system standard for equipment you are testing. When a standard is
chosen, the Test Set automatically alters several corresponding parameters.
Each standard affects the following conditions:
• The types of frames that can be sent.
• The range of valid channel numbers.
• The encoding of the frame data.
• The frequencies tuned to for the various channel settings when CHAN programming
commands are executed in an NMT program.
• The interpretation of received frames.
The following standards are available:

STD450: Transmit and receive frequencies are in the 453 to 467.5 MHz range.
STD900: Transmit and receive frequencies are in the 890 to 960 MHz range.
See Also
TCI
The tariff class information field is used to specify MS billing information to the
MTX.
NMT Frames Affected: 5b, 13b.
Traffic Area - Alt

This field specifies the alternate traffic area code that identifies the base stations
used to simultaneously transmit a calling signal to an MS.
Valid Entry Range: 0 through FF (hex)
NMT Frames Affected: 1bTA2, 3bTA2, 3dTA2, 4TA2, 4bTA2.
375

Traffic Area - Main

This field specifies the main traffic area code that identifies the base stations used
to simultaneously transmit a calling signal to an MS.
Valid Entry Range: 0 through FF (hex)
NMT Frames Affected: 1a, 1a’, 1a’’, 1aS, 1a’S, 1a’’S, 1b, 1bS, 1bTA1, 2a, 2a’, 2a’’, 2b,
2b’, 2b’’, 2c, 2c’, 2c’’, 2d, 2d’, 2d’’, 2e, 2f, 3a1, 3a2, 3b, 3bTC2, 3c, 3d, 4, 4b, 5a, 5b, 7,
10a, 10aAC, 10b, 10c, 10d, 11a, 11b, 12, 20, 21b, 21c, 22, 30.
Traffic Channel (Alt) Number

This field specifies the alternate traffic channel used for conversation after
communications have been established.
NMT Frames Affected: 3a2, 3bTC2, 3c.
TCHAN TC2 and RCHAN TC2, or TCHAN TCA and RCHAN TCA,
programming commands are used.
See Also
Traffic Channel (Alt) Power

This field specifies the power of the alternate traffic channel. Each power setting
NMT Frames Affected: 3a2, 3bTC2, 3c.
376

Traffic Channel (Main) Number

This field specifies the main traffic channel used for conversation after
communications have been established.
NMT Frames Affected: 1bTA1, 1bTA2, 2b, 2b’, 2b’’, 3a1, 3a2, 3b, 3bTA2, 3d, 3dTA2,
4, 4TA2, 5a, 5b, 7, 10b, 10c, 11, 11a, 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b, 16, 20, 21b, 21C, 22, 25,
26, 27, 28, 30.
TCHAN TC1 and RCHAN TC1, or TCHAN TCM and RCHAN TCM,
programming commands is used.
See Also
Traffic Channel (Main) Power

This field specifies the power of the main traffic channel. Each power setting
NMT Frames Affected: 1bTA1, 1bTA2, 2b, 2b’, 2b’’, 3a1, 3a2, 3b, 3bTA2, 3d, 3dTA2,
4, 4TA2, 5a, 5b, 7, 10b, 10c, 11, 11a, 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b, 16, 20, 21b, 21c, 22, 25,
26, 27, 28, 30.
377

Tone Sequence Encoder

The Tone Sequence Generator outputs sequences of tones of variable frequency,
amplitude, and duration. Its signal can be used to modulate the RF Generator, or
can be output through the front-panel AUDIO OUT connector.
tone-ec.wmf
Figure 79 The Tone Sequence Encoder Mode Screen
AFGen2 To
• The upper field determines whether the tone sequence modulates the RF Generator or
is output through the front-panel AUDIO OUT connector.
Audio Out
Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the Tone Sequence Generator
to the AUDIO OUT connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to
Audio Out.
378

Bursts
This field defines the number of sequences output each time Send is selected.
This function works only when the Send Mode field is set to Burst.
FM Coupling
connector.
Pre-Emp
This field determines whether the encoder signal passes through or bypasses
750 ms pre-emphasis.
Send
Selecting this field causes the tone sequence to be output.
Send Mode
sequence.
• Step allows you to output the sequence one tone at a time by pressing Send for each
tone.
Standard
This field selects the Tone Sequence standard for your radio.
Stop
Selecting this field stops the sequence being output.
379

Symbol Definition
This table specifies three types of information:
• Sym, symbol numbers, indicate the hexadecimal number that represents each tone
when creating a tone sequence. These numbers cannot be changed.
• Freq Hz lists the tone frequency associated with each symbol number. The frequency
values are preset for the Standard you are using. You can change the values using
the DATA keys.
• lists the relative amplitude for each tone. Amplitude is based on a percentage of the
level shown in the AFGen2 To field.
Symbol Sequence
This area performs two functions:
• The Symbol Sequence field at the top of the screen is used to enter and edit the tone
sequence. The sequence uses the symbol numbers (Sym) listed in the Symbol Def-
inition table. A total of 16 symbols can be entered.
• Below the Symbol Sequence is the sequence on/off times table. This table contains
three entries:
Seq Num identifies which position in the Symbol Sequence is affected by

the On and Off times listed.
On Time specifies the length of time a tone is output during the sequence.
Off Time specifies the length of time a tone is off before the next tone in the
sequence is output.
The symbol numbers can be entered directly, using the DATA keys, or by using
the Choices menu that appears when this field is selected. The Choices menu is
also used to edit an existing sequence.
The on and off times are changed using the DATA keys.
380

11
Help Screen
381

Chapter 11, Help Screen
Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
The HELP screen is used to access tutorial information for a wide variety of
instrument functions.
After this screen is accessed, push the cursor-control knob to display the help
Index. The knob is then used to select the desired topic.
Once you have accessed the desired information, you can return to the Help Index
by pushing the cursor-control knob.
To exit the HELP screen and return to the previous screen, press the PREV key.
382

12
I/O Configure Screen
383

Chapter 12, I/O Configure Screen
Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
ioconfig.wmf
Figure 80 The I/O Configure Screen
The I/O CONFIGURE screen’s fields are used to specify HP-IB and serial
communications settings. .
This screen is accessed by selecting the More field (directly below the To
Screen menu), and selecting IO CONFIG.
384

Field Descriptions
Data Length
This field specifies the number of bits used for each word of serial data when
using the rear-panel serial port.
HP-IB Address
This field is used to display and change the HP-IB address of the Test Set.
The address can be set from 0 to 30 by using the DATA keys, or by pushing and
then turning the cursor-control knob.
IBASIC Echo
This field enables/disables screen and error message echoing from IBASIC.
Inst Echo
This field enables/disables character and screen echoing when using an external
ASCII RS-232 terminal or computer to enter or edit IBASIC programs.
385

Field Descriptions
Mode
This field sets the HP-IB operating mode. Talk&Lstn is used for “normal” HP-
IB operation. Control is used to control external instruments using the Test Set.
Parity
This field specifies the serial communication parity setting when using the rear-
panel serial port.
Rcv Pace
The receive pace field is used when receiving serial data.
• Xon/Xoff lets the Test Set “talk” to the transmitting device to alter the rate of the data
being sent.
• None disables the Xon/Xoff function.
386

Field Descriptions
Save/Recall
This field specifies which memory device the Test Set accesses when the save and
recall functions are used.
• Internal is a section of internal RAM. RAM is also used for running IBASIC
programs, which may require you to delete the Save/Recall registers if the program is
very large.
• Card is the front-panel MEMORY CARD slot. A Save/Recall Device is not
Present message is displayed if you try to save or recall an instrument setup when
a write-able memory card is not installed in the Test Set.
• RAM refers to RAM disks that you can create on internal RAM. Refer to the
Programmer’s Guide for information on creating RAM Disks. This is part of the same
memory used when “internal” is specified, and may have to be erased when loading
very large IBASIC programs. A Save/Recall Device is not initialized
message is displayed if you try to save or recall an instrument setup when a RAM disk
has not been created.
• Disk is used with external disk drives. The Mode field must be set to Control to
access the drive. Also, the HP-IB address of the drive must be entered in the
External Disk Specification field of the TESTS (External Devices) screen.
Serial Baud
This field selects the baud rate for serial communications when using the rear-
panel serial port. Selecting this field displays a list of baud rate choices.
This setting is maintained after the instrument is turned off.
387

Field Descriptions
Serial In
This field selects the destination of characters received by the Test Set on the
serial port.
• Inst configures the serial port to connect to an external ASCII terminal or computer
to enter IBASIC programs, or to control the Test Set using an external keyboard.
• IBASIC is used to allow the IBASIC controller to read the serial port while a program
is running.
If a serial printer is connected, the PRINT command causes the printer to take
control of the serial port until printing is done.
See Also
Stop Length
This field specifies the number of stop bits used for serial communications when
using the rear-panel serial port. Selecting this field displays a list of stop bit
choices.
Xmt Pace
The transmit pace field is used when transmitting serial data.
• Xon/Xoff lets the receiving device “talk” to the Test Set to alter the rate of the data
being sent.
• None disables the Xon/Xoff function.
388

13
Message Screen
389

Chapter 13, Message Screen
Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
The MESSAGE screen lists any error or operation messages that have occurred
since the instrument was turned on.
The type of error and the time it occurred are listed. If one error occurs more than
once before a different error is encountered, the number of times it occurred, and
when it occurred, are displayed.
All messages are shown until the entire display is filled. If enough errors occur,
the MESSAGE screen will scroll the first messages past the top of the screen.
These messages cannot be retrieved.
390

14
Oscilloscope Screen
391

Chapter 14, Oscilloscope Screen
Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
oscscrn.wmf
Figure 81 The Oscilloscope Screen and Menus
The OSCILLOSCOPE screen’s controls are arranged by menu. The menus are
accessed using the Controls field. The field descriptions are grouped by menu
names.
Assigning global USER keys to the most-used functions on the menus allows you
to access the functions without having to change menus during operation.
392

Field Descriptions
Oscilloscope Main Menu Fields
oscscrn3.wmf
Figure 82 Oscilloscope Main Functions
Time/div
This field selects the horizontal sweep time per division.
The time-per-division is selected from a list of choices.
Vert Offset
Vertical offset moves the displayed signal above or below the oscilloscope’s fixed
centerline.
A centerline is displayed for the signal when an offset is used.
When the vertical offset is ≠0.00, the marker level is referenced to the center line
generated by the vertical offset feature, not the center line of the screen.
Vert/div
Vertical sensitivity sets the vertical amplitude per division.
The value for this field is selected from a list of choices.
Depending on the AF Analyzer’s AF Anl In setting, the units for this field may
be in Volts, kHz, or Percent (AM). For example; if the AF Anl In field is set to
FM Demod, the amplitude is displayed in kHz/div.
393

Field Descriptions
Oscilloscope Marker Menu Fields
oscscrn5.wmf
Figure 83 Markers on the Oscilloscope
How the Oscilloscope Displays Measurements

The digital oscilloscope screen is 417 pixels wide. Several measurement samples
may be taken for each pixel as a signal is processed (at 100 ns/sample). The
number of samples depends on the sweep speed (Time/div), and can vary from
several thousand to one sample per pixel. The level displayed for each pixel is the
average level of the sample or samples taken for each pixel.
Marker To:
Peak+ causes the marker to move to the maximum value of the average level
measured on the display.
Peak− causes the marker to move to the minimum value of the average level
measured on the display.
Because these functions look at the average value for each displayed pixel, the
marker may not appear directly on the displayed peak of a noisy signal.
Position
This field indicates the number of scale divisions from the left side of the screen to
the marker.
Use the DATA keys or cursor-control knob to move the marker to any point on
the displayed signal.
394

Field Descriptions
Marker Measurements
oscscrn2.wmf
Figure 84 Reading Measurement Results at the Oscilloscope’s Markers
Marker: Lvl
This measurement field displays the signal level of the current marker position.
The unit-of-measure for this field is dependent on the source of the signal being
measured. For instance; when measuring a signal from the AUDIO IN connector,
the amplitude is measured in Volts. When looking at a signal from the FM
demodulator, the amplitude is given in units of kHz.
When the Vert Offset field is ≠0.00, the displayed marker level is referenced to
the center line generated by the vertical offset feature, not the center line of the
screen.
The REF SET function can be used with this measurement to display levels
relative to a specific value.(See "Setting A Measurement Reference" on page 70.)
Marker: Time
This measurement displays the time elapsed from the trigger point to the current
marker position.
The REF SET function can be used with this measurement to display time relative
to a specific position.(See "Setting A Measurement Reference" on page 70.)
395

Field Descriptions
Oscilloscope Trigger Menu Fields
oscscrn4.wmf
Figure 85 Oscilloscope Triggering
Internal
This field selects the trigger source.
• Internal uses the signal being displayed for triggering.
• External uses the rear-panel EXT SCOPE TRIGGER INPUT for triggering. This is
a TTL level trigger (approximately 2.5 V).
• ENCODER1 uses the signaling encoder for triggering. The encoder must be sending its
signal to trigger the oscilloscope.
Auto/Norm
This field specifies how the trigger level is set.
• Auto automatically triggers if a triggering signal is not detected within approximately
50 ms of the last trigger.
• Norm requires a specific triggering signal before triggering.
Automatic triggering should be used for signals >20 Hz. Normal triggering should
be used for signals ≤20 Hz.
Also, when measuring ≤1 Hz signals, you should set the Scope To field in the AF
ANALYZER screen to Input to provide dc coupling to the oscilloscope’s input.
1. Optional on some Test Set models
396

Field Descriptions
Cont/Single
This field specifies whether the oscilloscope is continuously triggered (Cont), or
if it is only triggered each time Reset is selected (Single).
Level (div)
This control is divided into two fields:
The upper field (0.00) sets the internal trigger level as a function of vertical
divisions. The trigger level is indicated by small pointers that appear on each side
of the screen (only used for internal triggering).
The lower field (Pos/Neg) specifies whether triggering happens when the
waveform being measured is positive-going (Pos), or negative-going (Neg).
Pre-Trig
This field specifies the number of horizontal divisions displayed previous to the
trigger point. It allows you to see what the signal looked like before the trigger
point.
When pre-triggering is used, the trigger point is indicated by small pointers that
appear at the top and bottom of the screen.
Reset
See the Cont/Single field description, on page 397
397

Using the Oscilloscope
Using the Oscilloscope
Selecting the Oscilloscope’s Input

The oscilloscope’s input is determined by the AF Anl In field setting in the AF
ANALYZER, TX TEST, or DUPLEX TEST screens.
oscscrn1.wmf
Figure 86 Oscilloscope Input Indicator
Using the Scope To Field

The Scope To field in the AF ANALYZER screen allows you to look at the
signal at different stages in the AF Analyzer’s process. (Refer to the AF
ANALYZER screen description to understand the different Scope To choices.)
Except for the Input setting, all the choices are capacitively coupled. If the signal
to be measured is ≤1 Hz, use the Input setting to provide the needed dc coupling.
398

15
Print Configure Screen
This screen configures the Test Set to print screen images with your printer.
Images are printed using either the front-panel PRINT function (see “Printing a
Screen” in volume 1) or the Print All USER key available on some TESTS
environment screens.
Refer to your HP 11807 software manual for information on how to use your
printer to print automated test results.
399

Chapter 15, Print Configure Screen
Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
prntconf.wmf
Figure 87 The Printer Configurations Screen
Abort Print
Select this field to interrupt the print in progress.
FF at End
This field can only be controlled programmatically. It is used to specify if you
want a form feed at the end of printing.
FF at Start
want a form feed at the start of printing.
400

Field Descriptions
Lines/Page
This field is used to specify how many lines are printed per page.
Model
This field is used to specify the type of printer used. If your printer is not listed in
the Choices menu when you select this field, configure your printer to emulate
one of those that is listed.
Printer Address
This field is used to specify the address of an HP-IB printer. This field is only
displayed if the Printer Port field is set to HP-IB.
Print Data Destination

This field will be used in the future to select whether the data is formatted
specifically for printers or for some other device (such as a computer). At this
time the only selection is Printer.
Printer Port
This field is used to select the port your printer is connected to.
Print Title
This field is used to enter up to 50 characters to be displayed at the top of the print.
401

Field Descriptions
402

16
Radio Interface Screen
The RADIO INTERFACE screen controls the digital functions of the rear-panel
RADIO INTERFACE parallel connector. A functional description of the radio
interface, followed by field descriptions and operating instructions is included in
this chapter.For more information see chapter 24, "Connector, Key, and Knob
Descriptions" and the Programmer’s Guide.
403

Chapter 16, Radio Interface Screen
Radio Interface Functional Description
Data I/O
The rear-panel connector labeled OPTION INTERFACE is present on Test Sets
with a Radio Interface board. This connector has 16 pins that are used for parallel
data transfer between an external device and the Test Set’s internal CPU.
The Radio Interface board includes 32 voltage comparators used for data input/
output. Sixteen of the comparators have their outputs connected to the Radio
Interface’s 16 parallel data pins, and 16 comparators have their inputs connected
to the Radio Interface’s 16 parallel data pins.
Data transfer is asynchronous, meaning that each block of data is transferred after
a key is pressed on the Test Set’s front panel, or an HP-IB command is sent. Data
transfer is also “half-duplex”, meaning that data input and output cannot occur
simultaneously.
The parallel output data lines are implemented using 16 LM339M open-collector
voltage comparators with pull-up resistors provided on the Radio Interface board.
The Radio Interface provides two methods for determining the logic level for data
output:
1. Use the default (internal) power supply and internal pull-up resistors.
2. Use an external supply voltage connected to the internal pull-up resistors on the Radio
Interface board.
These methods are described in "Setting the Radio Interface’s Logic Level" on page
409.
The parallel input data lines are implemented using another 16, LM339M, open-
collector voltage comparators. An external supply voltage can be used to provide
the reference voltage to the comparators if the default supply is not compatible
with the external device-under-test.
This procedure is also described in "Setting the Radio Interface’s Logic Level" on
page 409.
404

Audio Source
The Test Set has two audio sources, AFGen 1 and AFGen 2. Either or both of
these sources can be routed to the OPTION INTERFACE connector. See "Audio
Out" on page 520.
Audio Analyzer
The Test Set’s audio analyzer can be accessed through the OPTION INTERFACE
connector.
See "Audio Input" on page 520.
External Transmitter Key Relay

Two pins on the Radio Interface are connected in parallel with the Key Out 1 and
Key Out 2 pins on the front-panel MIC/ACC connector.
The Key Out 1 and Key Out 2 pins allow a radio transmitter to be keyed through a
front-panel display field called Ext TX Key. Refer to "Key Out 1" on page 520 and
"Key Out 2" on page 520 .
Interrupt Capability
Two pins on the Radio Interface are designated as Interrupt lines 1 and 2. If
Interrupt 1 or 2 is armed, by selecting Arm on the RADIO INTERFACE screen,
and the corresponding pin is grounded, the word Tripped is displayed on the
RADIO INTERFACE screen, and a status register bit is set.
Refer to "Interrupt Input 1" on page 521 and "Interrupt Input 2" on page 521.
+12.6 V, −12.6 V Supplies

The Radio Interface provides +12.6 V and −12.6 V power supplies capable of
powering low-current devices.
Refer to "−12.6 V" on page 520, and "+12.6 V" on page 520.
Refer to "Using the Radio Interface (Manual Operation)" on page 409 and "Using
The Radio Interface (Remote Operation)" on page 415 for more detailed
information about using the Radio Interface.
405

Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
riscrn.wmf
Figure 88 The Radio Interface Screen
Input Data
This field trips the Test Set to latch the data on the parallel data pins that have
been designated as inputs.
406

Field Descriptions
Interrupt 1
This field arms or disarms the Interrupt 1 pin. When it is armed, and the pin is
pulled low by an external device, Tripped is displayed below the field until the
interrupt is re-armed.
The field can be queried directly in an IBASIC or HP-IB program, or it can be
monitored with the HP-IB status reporting system. This is done by reading bit 5 of
the status byte and then reading bit 13 of the Hardware 1 status register. The
Interrupt 1 pin can also be set as the HP-IB SRQ mask.
Once the interrupt has been tripped it must be re-armed. To do this, remove the
low on the Interrupt 1 pin and then set the Interrupt 1 field to Disable and
then set it to Arm .
Interrupts can be disabled and any external signals will have no effect on the
interrupt.
Both Interrupt 1 and Interrupt 2 are independent, and they can be used
simultaneously.
See also
Programmer’ Guide
Interrupt 2
Same as Interrupt 1 but, it applies to the Interrupt 2 pin on the RADIO
INTERFACE connector and bit 14 of the Hardware 1 status register.
407

Field Descriptions
I/O Config
This field designates which of the 16 parallel data pins will be used as inputs. Pins
designated as inputs are pulled high internally. They can be left high for a logic 1
or pulled low for a logic 0.
A hexadecimal number that can range from 0000 to FFFF is entered in this field.
Hex 0000 designates no pins as inputs, while hex FFFF designates all 16 pins as
inputs.
To determine the number, convert the input pin’s binary weight to hexadecimal,
then add. Pin 19, D0, is the least significant bit. For example, if D0 through D7 are
to be inputs and D8 through D15 are outputs the number to enter would be 00FF.
Output Data
This field sets the data to be output on the parallel data lines.
The data is entered as a hexadecimal number that can range from 0000 to FFFF.
To determine the number, convert the binary weight of the pins that you want to
set high to hexadecimal, then add. Pin 19, D0, is the least significant bit. For
example 0008 would set pin 22, D3, high and the rest of the pins low.
The field will show the entered value but the pins don’t change until the Send
Data field is selected.
Parallel Data In
This field displays the value on the parallel data pins when the Parallel Data
In field is selected. The data appears in bitwise fashion with the 16 bits organized
from MSB to LSB.
Send Data
When selected, this field clocks the data in the Output Data field to the parallel
data pins. It also outputs a pulse on the Strobe pin.
Strobe Pol
The strobe polarity field sets the polarity of the pulse on the Strobe pin. This pulse
occurs when the Send Data field is selected.
408

Using the Radio Interface (Manual Operation)
CAUTION: Do not connect a voltage source in excess of −0.3 V (for example, −0.4 V) to any Parallel Data
pin. Also, do not connect a voltage source that exceeds 5.7 V, unless the logic voltage has been
set to a level other than the default. If the logic voltage has been set to some value other than the
default of 5.1 V, the maximum voltage that can be applied is the logic voltage plus 0.6 V. Refer
to "Setting the Radio Interface’s Logic Level" on page 409.
Setting the Radio Interface’s Logic Level

The logic levels on the parallel data bus are determined by the Logic Voltage. The
two choices for the Logic Voltage are 5.1 V from the default (internal) Logic
Voltage supply, or 5.1 V to 20 V from an external power supply.
The Logic Voltage affects both the input and output logic levels on the Radio
Interface board. When data is output, the logic-high voltage level will be
determined by the Logic Voltage applied through internal 3.16 k-ohm pull-up
resistors. When data is input, the voltage comparator’s reference voltage is
determined by the Logic Voltage applied to a resistive divider. The formulas for
calculating logic levels are shown below. The default values are calculated in the
examples, and if these are not compatible with the device that is sending/receiving
data, connect an external power supply to pin 9. At levels above +5.1 V, the
external power supply will reverse bias a steering diode and “turn off” the default
Logic Voltage. See figure 89 on page 410 .
409

Input Data Line (1 of 16) Output Data Line (1 of 16)
Pin 9 Logic
Voltage
Fixed Ref- 3.16 k

56.2 k
erence - Pins 19-34
5.1 V
- Input
LM 339M Parallel
31.6 k Data Out
Default Logic LM 339M Data Output Data +
Voltage
+
Figure 89
For data input, use the following formula to determine the logic threshold voltage:
(Logic Voltage − 0.7) × 0.34 = Vthreshold
For example, the default Logic Voltage of 5.1 V would give:
4.4 × 0.34 = 1.5 V
A 12.5 V supply connected to the Logic Voltage pin 9 would give:
11.8 × 0.34 = 4 V
For data output, calculate the logic high level using this formula:
Logic Voltage − 0.7 through a 3.16 k ohm pull-up resistor.
A logic low on the data output will be near 0 V, depending on the amount of
current the comparator is sinking. For example, if the output current is 4 mA, the
output voltage will be about 250 mV.
410

Inputting Data
Data can only be input through parallel data bus lines that are configured as
inputs. Data bus lines are configured as inputs by setting the output comparators
to their logic-high states (positive output level). This is best accomplished by
entering a hex value in the I/O Config field that will set the corresponding
bit(s) to a 1. For example, if you want to use lines 0-7 for input and lines 8-15 for
output, enter 00FF (which would be 0000000011111111 in binary) in the I/O
Config field.
To read data to the Test Set’s internal CPU, select the Read Data field on the
RADIO INTERFACE screen. A 16-bit binary value will be displayed under the
Parallel Data In field near the top of the screen.
Important: When data is read, the Parallel Data In field will display the
value for all 16 parallel data bus lines, not just the lines designated as inputs.
See the I/O Config field description, on page 408.
The need for configuring pins as inputs is a result of the “half-duplex” hardware
architecture of the bus. The 16 I/O pins on the parallel data bus are connected to
both the input data comparators and the output data comparators. Because the
output comparators are open-collector, a logic low makes it impossible to input a
logic high, since the output transistor is essentially clamped to ground.
NOTE: A logic “OR” function is implemented in the Radio Interface design between
I/O Config field and the Send Data the . Entering a hex value in the
I/O Config field writes that value to the output data lines, just as selecting Send Data
writes the value entered in the Output Data field to the output data lines. The effect of this
operation is that it will not be possible to use the Output Data field to set a parallel data
bus line low if that line has been designated as an input by the value entered in the I/O
Config field.
The fastest rate at which input data can change is about 50 kHz. The practical
limits on data transfer, however, are based on the speed of the IBASIC or external
controller program since all data transfer is asynchronous.
411

Outputting Data
Outputting data is accomplished by entering the appropriate hex value in the
Output Data field, and then selecting the Send Data field.
The output data value can be incremented or decremented by turning the cursor
control knob with the Output Data field highlighted.
The output data lines are implemented by open-collector output voltage
comparators. Sending a logic 0 causes active pull-down through a transistor in the
voltage comparator. Sending a logic 1 causes passive pull-up through a pull-up
resistor.
Variations in the Logic Voltage can be used to provide logic levels compatible
with the radio-under-test. See "Setting the Radio Interface’s Logic Level" on page
409.
The data transfer rate for data output is primarily determined by the speed of the
IBASIC or external program, not the ability of the Test Set’s internal CPU to
access and output the data on the parallel lines, or the output loading capacitance.
(If loading capacitance is below 158 pF, the Test Set’s CPU can send data at about
200 Kb/s. The time for a program line to execute is typically greater than this).
The Parallel Strobe Out, pin 13, can be used to signal when output data has been
clocked onto the parallel data bus. The front-panel RADIO INTERFACE screen
allows the choice of strobe polarity through the Strobe Pol field. As with the
parallel data outputs, the Parallel Strobe Out logic threshold is determined by the
Logic Voltage. Although the edges of Parallel Strobe Out and data output occur at
approximately the same time, an external device should latch on the Strobe Pol
trailing edge, or better yet, the Strobe Pol level. This will allow sufficient time for
output data to settle. Refer to figure 90 on page 413
412

Parallel Data Strobe
Logic Voltage
Strobe POL
High/Low
Parallel Data
Strobe +
LM 339M Pin 13
-
Output Data Line
5µS
Logic Voltage
Data Output
(1 of 16) Output Data + 1
LM 339M Pins 9 - 34
Fixed Ref-
erence -
0
External device should latch data on
Strobe POL Level to allow Output Data
time to settle.
Figure 90
The I/O Config field will also output data to the output data line comparators.
The I/O Config field, however, is primarily intended to configure parallel data
lines as inputs or outputs. See the Input Data field description, on page 406.
413

Using Interrupts
There are two interrupt lines that, when armed, allow monitoring of interrupt
conditions. An interrupt is tripped when a logic low, determined by the same
Logic Voltage as described in "Setting the Radio Interface’s Logic Level" on page
409, is detected. When tripped, the field directly below Arm/Disable will change
from Armed to Tripped. To re-arm the next interrupt you must first disable the
interrupt, then select Arm.
Besides displaying the word Tripped, an interrupt condition will set a bit in one
of the Test Set’s status registers. This makes it possible to generate SRQ interrupts
or query a condition register to find out if an interrupt has occurred. Refer to
"Using The Radio Interface (Remote Operation)" on page 415.
414

Using The Radio Interface (Remote Operation)
CAUTION: Do not connect a voltage source in excess of −0.3 V (for example, −0.4 V) to any Parallel Data
pin. Also, do not connect a voltage source that exceeds 5.7 V, unless the logic voltage has been
set to a level other than the default. If the logic voltage has been set to some value other than the
default of 5.1 V, the maximum voltage that can be applied is the logic voltage plus 0.6 V. Refer
to "Setting the Radio Interface’s Logic Level" on page 409.
HP-IB Command Summary

The HP-IB command mnemonics can be found in the Programmer’s Guide, under
Radio Interface.
Inputting Data over HP-IB

Use the following commands to configure the eight least significant parallel data
bus lines as inputs by writing logic 1’s to them.
DISP RINT;RINTerface:PARallel:CONFigure #HFF (hex)
or
DISP RINT;RINTerface:PARallel:CONFigure 255 (decimal)
Use the following command to read the data on the parallel bus to the Test Set’s
internal CPU.
DISP RINT;RINTerface:PARallel:INPut:READ
Use the following command to query the data read by the READ command.
DISP RINT;RINTerface:PARallel:INPut:DATA?
If the output data lines are zero, and none of the input data lines are pulled low, the
value returned by the previous command will be 255 (decimal). Remember that
data lines not configured as inputs will still be displayed, and the value returned
will be the previous query will include all 16 data lines, some of which may be
configured as outputs.
415

Outputting Data over HP-IB

Use one of the following commands to output 1’s to the 8 most significant bits on
the parallel data bus.
DISP RINT;RINTerface:PARallel:OUTPut 65280 ;SEND (decimal)
or
DISP RINT;RINTerface:PARallel:OUTPut #HFF00;SEND (hex)
Using Interrupts over HP-IB

Use the following command to arm Interrupt 1.
DISP RINT;RINTerface:INTerrupt1 ‘ARM’
Use the following command to disarm Interrupt 1.
DISP RINT;RINTerface:INTerrupt1 ‘DISARM’
Interrupt 1 and Interrupt 2, when armed, will set bits in the Hardware Status
Register #1 Group. An SRQ interrupt can be generated when either of these
interrupts is tripped, or the Condition register can simply be read to see if a bit was
set. Refer to the Programmer’s Guide for details and an example program
showing how to set up an SRQ interrupt.
416

17
RF Analyzer Screen
417

Chapter 17, RF Analyzer Screen
Block Diagram
Block Diagram
-EASUREMENT $ISPLAY !REA
4UNE -ODE
48 &REQ %RROR &- $EVI ATION
!UTO-ANUAL
!# ,EVEL
48 0OWER
3) .!$ 3.2
$I STN
3) .!$
!& &REQ
$# ,EVEL
48 0OWER #URRENT
-EASUREMENT
48 0WR :ERO -)3!##
2EFERENCE
:ERO
%84 +EY
/N/FF
)NPUT !TTEN
)NPUT 0ORT
!UTO (OLD ) & &I LTER
2& )N !NT
DB K(Z
2& ).
DB 2&
2& )& )&
DB 34!'%3
(IGH 0OWER 34!'%3
,/
DB
!TTENUATOR
4UNE -ODE 4UNE &REQ
!UTO -ANUAL
-(Z
2& #NT 'ATE

MS
#,+
!&
3IGNAL
&REQUENCY #OUNTER
!NALYZER
4O 2& &REQ #OUNTER
!.4 ) . /0%.
.ORM
&)8%$
(IGH
3ENSITIVITY 3QUELCH
.ORMAL (IGH
0OT
0/4
Figure 91 RF ANALYZER Functional Block diagram
418

Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
rfascrn.wmf
Figure 92 The RF Analyzer Screen
AC Level
See Also
AM Depth
This field displays the percent depth of modulation of the AM signal. The field is
only visible when the AF ANL In field on the AF ANL screen is set to AM MOD or
AM DEMOD.
419

Field Descriptions
Ext TX key
See Also
Distn
This field displays the percent of distortion for a 1 kHz signal tone.
FM Deviation
This measurement field displays the frequency deviation between the FM signal
and the carrier. The FM Deviation measurement field is only displayed when the
AF Anl In field is set to FM Demod or FM Mod.
See Also
420

Field Descriptions
IF Filter
This field selects the desired IF Filter bandwidth for modulated signals being
analyzed.
Input Atten
Input attenuation sets the amount of input attenuation for the RF IN/OUT and
ANT IN connectors. This function controls two settings:
• The upper field determines if you want the instrument to set the attenuation automati-
cally (Auto), or if you want to set the value manually (Hold).
• The lower field displays the present attenuation value, and it is used to set the desired
attenuation level when the upper area is set to Hold.
NOTE: Oscilloscope and Decoder Interference. After a signal is input, the RF autoranging function
(Auto) takes a small amount of time to determine the required input attenuator setting. If your
transmitter begins sending encoded information the instant it transmits, the initial encoded
information may not be decoded during the autoranging process. The same situation can arise
when trying to display the first part of the demodulated signal on the Oscilloscope.
When decoding a signaling sequence using the decoder, or when trying to
capture the initial modulation waveform of a signal on the Oscilloscope, set the
upper field to Hold and set the lower field to an appropriate level for the signal
being decoded (start with 40 dB).
421

Field Descriptions
Input Port
The RF IN/OUT port must be used for making TX Power measurements on this
screen.
disconnect the RF power, press [MEAS RESET], and allow the Test Set to cool
off for approximately 2 minutes before making any other measurements on this
port.
low-level signals (such as “off the air” measurements). You cannot measure TX
(RF) Power on this screen using the antenna port. However, low-level RF power
at the antenna port can be measured using the Spectrum Analyzer.
If the over-power circuit is triggered (signified by a warning message at the top
of the screen), remove the signal from the ANT IN port, and press
[MEAS RESET] or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.
422

Field Descriptions
RF Cnt Gate
RF counter gate specifies how long the RF counter samples the signal before
displaying the frequency. Specifying a shorter gate time may enable you to see
frequency fluctuations that might not be seen using a longer gate time.
Sensitivity
RF Analyzer sensitivity adds about 6 dB of sensitivity for the ANT IN port when
High is selected.
Selecting High sensitivity may cause Spectrum Analyzer1 measurements to be
uncalibrated when the ANT IN port is used (a message appears when this occurs).
High-level AM measurements may be distorted when high sensitivity is used with
the ANT IN port.
Squelch
This setting determines the squelch operation when demodulating FM, AM or
SSB signals. Three settings are available:
• Pot uses the front-panel SQUELCH knob for squelch level adjustment.
• Open disables squelch operation.
• Fixed sets the squelch to a fixed level, disabling the front-panel SQUELCH knob
control.
Most measurement processes on this screen are not displayed if the incoming
signal falls below the squelch level (with the exception of TX Power). The
measurements are replaced by four dashes (- - - -) to indicate they have been
‘squelched’.
The decoder and Oscilloscope measurements are also disabled when the signal
has been squelched.
Spectrum Analyzer measurements are not affected by the squelch setting
(although squelch still affects whether the demodulated signal can be heard while
viewing the RF signal).
1. Optional on Test Sets
423

Field Descriptions
Trying to read a squelched measurement using HP-IB will cause your program to
halt until the squelch is either turned down, a measurement is made, or until a
program time-out aborts the measurement process.
SINAD
SINAD
Distortion
AF Frequency
DC Level

SNR Operation
• Selecting SNR turns off the other audio measurements.
AF Anl in field to Audio In.
See Also
424

Field Descriptions
Tune Freq
RF Analyzer tune frequency sets the center frequency for the RF signal to be
analyzed.
See Also
Tune Mode
Auto causes the RF Analyzer to find the signal with the greatest amplitude
>-36 dBm, and set the tune frequency for that signal.
Manual requires the operator to set the tune frequency for the RF signal to be
analyzed.
tuning enables the TX Frequency measurement. Manual tuning enables the TX
Freq Error measurement.
After autotuning to the desired signal, select Manual to prevent the Tune Freq
from changing when the signal is no longer applied.

transmitter frequency.
See Also
425

Field Descriptions
TX Power
Only the RF IN/OUT port can be used for measuring TX power on this screen.
ANT IN port.
the screen), remove the signal from the ANT IN port, and press
[MEAS RESET] or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.
See Also
TX Power field description (this page)
TX Pwr Zero field description, on page 427.
426

Field Descriptions
TX Pwr Zero
RF power must not be applied while zeroing. Set the RF GENERATOR screen Ampli-
tude field to off to prevent internal cross-coupling into the power detector while zeroing.
internal circuitry increases. This can cause changes in the TX Power
measurement when low power levels are measured immediately following high
power measurements.
power meter immediately before making the low power measurements to provide
the best measurement accuracy.
427

Field Descriptions
428

18
RF Generator Screen
429

Chapter 18, RF Generator Screen
Block Diagram
Block Diagram
2& 'EN &REQ !MPLITUDE

-I C 0RE %MP

!UTO(OLD
D"M
-(Z
/N/FF
2& /UT
U3
$UPLEX /UT
-)#!##
!-
&- /UTPUT 0ORT
!TTEN (OL D 2& /UT $UPL
/N /FF
-ODUL ATION
)NPUT
2EAR 0ANEL $#
-OD )N 4O
&-6PK
!#
/FF
&- #OUPL ING
!# $#
$# &- :ERO
!& 'EN &REQ !& 'EN 4O
&-

K(Z
K(Z
!& 'EN &REQ !& 'EN 4O
&-
K(Z
/FF !UDIO /UT
!# $#
!#
$# !UDIO /UT
Figure 93 RF GENERATOR Functional Block Diagram
430

Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
rfgscrn.wmf
Figure 94 The RF Generator Screen
AC Level
or dBm).
resistance must be specified. (Refer to theExt Load R field description, on page
444.)
connectors.
See Also
431

Field Descriptions
AFGen1 Freq
This Audio Frequency Generator control sets the frequency for the first audio
frequency sinewave generator.
AFGen2 Freq
This Audio Frequency Generator control sets the frequency for the second audio
frequency sinewave generator. It can also be used to set the Function Generator’s
frequency when the signaling encoder is used.
This field is also used to control the send/stop functions for some encoder modes.
For example, when sending a tone sequence, this field is used to send and stop the
sequence. The field’s name changes to AFGen2 when this type of operation is
used.
This field is removed from this screen when NMT encoding or decoding is used.
(NMT programs can only be run from the NMT Decoder screen.)
See Also
Chapter 10, "Signaling Encoder (AF Generator 2)"
AFGen1 To
This Audio Frequency Generator control is used to set two values:
• The lower field sets the amplitude (including Off). The level at the AUDIO OUT
connector is always in volts rms across a low-impedance output.
See Also
432

Field Descriptions
AFGen2 To
• The lower field sets the amplitude (including Off). The level at the AUDIO OUT con-
nector is always in volts rms for standard sinewave operation across a low-impedance
output.
If the signaling option is installed, the sinewave can be set in units of rms or peak.
This is done in the Sine Units field for the Function Generator. When non-
sinewave waveforms are used, or if the upper field is set to AM or FM, the level is
always expressed as a peak value.
See Also
"Function Generator Encoder" on page 339.
Amplitude
RF Generator amplitude adjusts the amplitude of the RF Generator.
If a microphone is connected, and the amplitude is off, keying the microphone
causes the Amplitude to turn on to its previous level until the microphone is no
longer keyed.
See Also
433

Field Descriptions
Atten Hold
out, eliminating the loss of the output signal as the level is changed. This function
is helpful when making squelch measurements.
When this function is set to On, the RF output level is restricted to a range above
and below the present Amplitude setting. Attempting to set an amplitude outside
the allowed range results in an error message and beep (if the beeper is on). RF
output level accuracy is greatly degraded outside the allowed range.
Audio Out
Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling to the AUDIO OUT connector.
FM Coupling
These fields provide two functions:
• The upper field specifies ac or dc coupling between the MODULATION INPUT con-
nector and the RF Generator’s FM modulator. This field also alters the FM modulator
to allow DCFM from internal and external modulation sources.
• Selecting the lower field causes the instrument to offset any dc bias that may exist when
dc coupling is selected.
Mic Pre-Emp
Microphone pre-emphasis determines whether the modulating signal from the
MIC/ACC connector goes through or bypasses the 750 ms pre-emphasis network.
Two fields are used:
• The upper field is used to specify whether you want the instrument to automatically turn
pre-emphasis on during FM operation and off for other modulations (Auto), or to leave
the pre-emphasis switching to the user’s operation (Hold).
• The lower field tells you whether pre-emphasis is on or off (when Auto operation is
selected), or allows you to manually turn pre-emphasis on or off (if Hold is selected).
434

Field Descriptions
Mod In To
This modulation input field defines how an external modulation source is used
with the RF Generator. Two fields are used:
• The upper field determines whether the rear-panel MODULATION INPUT signal is set
for AM or FM modulation of the RF GENERATOR.
• The lower field sets the modulation sensitivity. For instance, if FM (/Vpk) is selected
for the upper field, and you set the lower field to 1.0000 kHz, the RF Generator will
deviate 1 kHz for every 1 Volt peak at the MODULATION INPUT connector.
In addition, the peak deviation produced by MIC signals will be approximately
1 kHz.
Output Port
Output port selects the desired RF Generator output port.
CAUTION: Applying reverse RF power to the DUPLEX OUT connector can damage the instrument.
(A message is displayed when an overpower conditions occurs.) Whenever possible when
testing transceivers, use the RF IN/OUT connector to prevent damage from accidental
transmitter keying.
If a reverse power condition triggers the internal protection circuit, remove the reverse
power signal and press the MEAS RESET key, or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.
RF Gen Freq
This field sets the RF generator’s frequency.
435

Field Descriptions
SINAD
SINAD
Distortion
AF Frequency
DC Level

SNR Operation
See Also
436

Field Descriptions
TX Freq Error
TX Frequency
This measurement displays transmitter frequency error or absolute transmitter
frequency.
See Also
Tune Mode field description, on page 297
TX Power
Only the RF IN/OUT port can be used for measuring TX power on this screen.
When the Input Port 1is set to Ant, four dashes (- - - -) appear in place of digits
ANT IN port.
the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on reset it.
See Also
1. The Input Port field is accessed on the TX TEST, DUPLEX TEST, and
RF ANALYZER screens.
437

Field Descriptions
438

19
RX Test Screen
439

Chapter 19, RX Test Screen
Block Diagram
Block Diagram
2& 'EN &REQ !MPLI TUDE

D"M
-(Z
2& /UT
$UPL EX /UT
!-
&- /UTPUT 0ORT
!TTEN (OLD 2& /UT $UPL
/N /FF
!& 'EN 4O
!& 'EN &REQ
&-

K(Z
K(Z
&- !-
!& 'EN &REQ !& 'EN 4O
&-

/FF
K(Z
!UDI O /UT
3).!$
&I LTER &I LTER -EASUREMENTS $I SPL AY !REA
(Z (0& K(Z ,0&

3).!$ !# ,EVEL
3.2
!& &REQ
!5$) / ) . ()
$ISTN
!& &REQ
%XT ,OAD 2
$# ,EVEL
#URRENT
!5$)/ ). ,/
Figure 95 The RX Test Fields and Their Functions
440

Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
rxscrn.wmf
Figure 96 The RX Test Screen
NOTE: Since most of the measurements displayed are dependent on different field settings, the
settings and values shown in the diagrams use the Test Set’s preset conditions.
441

Field Descriptions
AC Level
or dBm).
resistance must be specified. (Refer to theExt Load R field description, on page
444.)
connectors.
See Also
AFGen1 Freq
AFGen2 Freq
This Audio Frequency Generator control sets the frequency for the second audio
frequency sinewave generator. It can also be used to set the Function Generator’s
frequency when the signaling encoder is used.
This field is also used to control the send/stop functions for some encoder modes.
For example, when sending a tone sequence, this field is used to send and stop the
sequence. The field name changes to AFGen2 when this type of operation is used.
This field is removed from this screen when NMT encoding or decoding is used.
(NMT programs can only be run from the NMT Decoder screen.)
See Also
Chapter 10, "Signaling Encoder (AF Generator 2)".
442

Field Descriptions
AFGen1 To
• The upper field determines whether the AF signal modulates the RF Generator or is out-
put through the AUDIO OUT connector.
• The lower field sets the amplitude (including Off). The AUDIO OUT level is set either
in volts rms (across a low-impedance output) or dBm, mW, or W across a 600-ohm load
(mW is selected by pressing [SHIFT], [ENTER]).
The upper field is a priority control field. Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST
screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens.
See Also
AFGen2 To
• The lower field sets the amplitude (including Off). The AUDIO OUT level is always
in volts rms for standard sinewave operation across a low-impedance output.
If the signaling option is installed, the sinewave can be set in units of rms or peak.
This is done in the Sine Units field for the Function Generator. When non-
sinewave waveforms are used, or if the upper field is set to AM or FM, the level is
always expressed as a peak value.
See Also
"Function Generator Encoder" on page 339
443

Field Descriptions
Amplitude
The amplitude field adjusts the amplitude of the RF Generator.
causes the amplitude to turn on to its previous level until the microphone is no
longer keyed.
See Also
Atten Hold field description, on page 444
Atten Hold
out, eliminating the brief loss of the output signal as the level is changed. This
function is helpful when making squelch measurements.
When this function is set to On, the RF output level is restricted to a range of
15 dB around the present Amplitude setting. Attempting to set an amplitude
outside the allowed range results in an error message and beep (if the beeper is
on). RF output level accuracy is uncalibrated outside the allowed range.
Ext Load R
External load resistance is used to calculate and display AF power dissipated in an
external load resistance. Power is calculated using the voltage measured at the
AUDIO IN connections and the resistance value you enter into this field.
See Also
444

Field Descriptions

See Also
Chapter 5, "AF Analyzer Screen"
Output Port
Output port selects the desired RF Generator output port.
CAUTION: Applying reverse RF power to the DUPLEX OUT connector can damage the instrument. (A
message is displayed when an over-power conditions occurs.) Whenever possible when
testing transceivers, use the RF IN/OUT connector to prevent damage from accidental
transmitter keying.
CAUTION: If a reverse power condition triggers the internal protection circuit, remove the reverse power
signal and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.
RF Gen Freq
RF Generator frequency sets the generator’s frequency.
445

Field Descriptions
SINAD
This measurement field is used to select and display any one of the following
measurements:
SINAD
Distortion
AF Frequency
DC Level

SNR Operation
See Also
446

20
Service Screen
NOTE: This screen is used for component-level troubleshooting by the manufacturer. This method of
troubleshooting is not currently supported outside of the factory.
This screen allows you to monitor individual circuit node measurements and
change various MUX and DAC latch settings for isolating faulty modules. To
access the SERVICE screen, you must first access the CONFIGURE screen, then
select Service from the To Screen menu in the bottom-right corner.
447

Chapter 20, Service Screen
Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
Counter Connection
This field selects the desired circuit node to connect to the frequency counter.
Frequency
This measurement field displays the frequency measurement for the circuit node
shown in the Counter Connection field.
Gate Time
This field is used to adjust the frequency counter’s gate time. A shorter gate time
may enable you to see frequency fluctuations that might not be seen using a longer
gate time.
Latch
This field is used to alter the circuit latches that control a variety of operations.
The value of the selected latch is displayed and changed in the Value field.
448

Field Descriptions
RAM Initialize
Selecting this field clears all SAVE registers and test programs that may be in
RAM and resets all latches to their factory power-up configuration.
If you have saved one or more instrument setups using the SAVE function, using
this function will permanently remove them.
Value
This field displays and changes the value for the latch shown in the Latch field.
Voltage
This measurement field displays the voltage measurement for the circuit node
shown in the Voltmeter Connection field.
Voltmeter Connection
This field selects the desired circuit node for voltage measurements. The reading
is displayed in the Voltage measurement field.
449

Field Descriptions
450

21
Spectrum Analyzer Screen
The SPECTRUM ANALYZER screen’s controls are arranged in four menus. The
menus are accessed using the Controls field. The field descriptions are grouped
by menu names. Assigning global USER keys to the most-used functions on the
menus allows you to access the functions without having to change menus.
451

Chapter 21, Spectrum Analyzer Screen
Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
NOTE: The Spectrum Analyzer is optional on some Test Set models.
sascrn.wmf
Figure 97 The Spectrum Analyzer Screen and Menus
452

Field Descriptions
Spectrum Analyzer Main Menu Fields
sascrn2.wmf
Figure 98 Spectrum Analyzer Main functions
Center Freq
This field sets the tune frequency for the center of the screen.
This field also changes the frequency of the Tracking Generator’s and the RF
Analyzer’s center frequency.
Ref Level
Reference level sets the amplitude reference level for the top line of the display.
All signals displayed are referenced to this line.
The unit-of-measure for the reference can be changed as needed. For instance, 0
dBm, 0.224 V, 107.0 dB mV, and 0.00100 W can all be used to represent the same
level.
453

Field Descriptions
RF In/Ant
This field selects the input port for the analyzer.
the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.
Using the ANT IN port with the field set to High can result in uncalibrated
operation (a message appears on the screen when this happens). The purpose for
the high sensitivity setting is to allow you to look and listen to very low level
signals when absolute accuracy is not essential.
See Also
Sensitivity field description, on page 463
Span
Sets the span of frequencies to be displayed on the screen.
When the Tracking Generator is used, the span also defines the frequency sweep
range.
Spans >1.5 MHz disable the AF Analyzer when the analyzer’s AF Anl In field is
set to FM Demod, AM Demod, or SSB Demod. This disables all the AF
Analyzer’s measurement and output functions. When the AF Analyzer’s AF Anl
In field is set to any of the other available inputs, such as Audio In or Ext Mod,
the speaker and AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT are not affected when the
Spectrum Analyzer’s span is changed.
454

Field Descriptions
RF Generator Menu Fields, Fixed Operation
sascrn3.wmf
Figure 99 Using the Spectrum Analyzer with the RF Generator
Amplitude
This field sets the amplitude of the RF Generator.
This is a priority control field. Accessing the RX TEST screen overrides the
Amplitude setting on this screen.
longer keyed.
See Also
455

Field Descriptions
Output Port
This field selects the output port for the RF Generator.
CAUTION: Applying reverse RF power to the DUPLEX OUT connector can damage the instrument. (A
message is displayed when an overpower conditions occurs.) Whenever possible when testing
transceivers, use the RF IN/OUT connector to prevent damage from accidental transmitter
keying.
If a reverse power condition triggers the internal protection circuit, remove the
reverse power signal and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off
and on to reset it.
RF Gen Freq
This field sets the RF Generator’s frequency.
456

Field Descriptions
RF Generator Menu Fields, Tracking Operation
sascrn4.wmf
Figure 100 Using the Spectrum Analyzer with the Tracking Generator
The Tracking Generator performs a frequency sweep operation. The start and stop
frequencies are determined by the Main Menu Span setting. This allows you to
characterize devices (such as filter networks) over a wide span of frequencies.
An RF offset can be set between the Tracking Generator and the center frequency
of the Spectrum Analyzer. This allows you to look at a signal that is related to a
source whose frequency is outside of the displayed span.
Amplitude
This field sets the amplitude of the Tracking Generator.
This field operates independently of the RF Generator’s amplitude settings in
other screens.
longer keyed.
457

Field Descriptions
Offset Freq
Frequency offset (RF Generator) sets the difference between the instantaneous
frequencies of the Tracking Generator and the center frequency of the Spectrum
Analyzer.
The offset can be a positive or negative value. When set to zero, the Tracking
Generator produces a sweeping signal that matches the Spectrum Analyzer’s tune
frequency.
Port/Sweep
This control performs two functions:
• The upper field specifies the output port of the Tracking Generator.
• The lower field specifies whether the Tracking Generator sweeps from low-to-high fre-
quencies (Norm), or from high-to-low frequencies (Invert). (The Spectrum Analyzer
always sweeps from low to high frequencies.) The swept frequency range is determined
by the Span setting in the Spectrum Analyzer’s Main Menu.
When using the Tracking Generator, if the output port is set RF Out, or the main
menu Input Port is set to RF In, internal instrument coupling can occur. For
the best isolation between the Tracking Generator and the Spectrum Analyzer, use
Dupl for the output, and Ant for the input.
For measurements on high-power devices, such as amplifiers, use the RF IN/OUT

port for the input.
458

Field Descriptions
Spectrum Analyzer Marker Menu Fields
sascrn5.wmf
Figure 101 Setting Markers on the Spectrum Analyzer
Marker To:
• Peak moves the marker to the highest peak and enters the location in the Position
field.
• Next Peak moves the marker to the next peak to the right and enters the location in
the Position field.
• Center Freq changes the center frequency value to match the current position of the
marker.
• Ref Level changes the reference level setting to match the current position of the
marker.
Position
This field sets the marker position, referenced to the left side of the screen.
459

Field Descriptions
Marker Measurements
sascrn1.wmf
Figure 102 Reading Measurement Results at the Spectrum Analyzer’s Markers
Marker: Freq
Marker frequency displays the frequency at the marker’s present position.
Marker: Lvl
Marker level displays the amplitude at the marker’s present position.
The marker’s level can be displayed in various units of measure.
See Also
"To Change the Measurement’s Unit-of-Measure" on page 61
460

Field Descriptions
Spectrum Analyzer Auxiliary Menu Fields
sascrn6.wmf
Figure 103 Spectrum Analyzer Auxiliary Functions
Input Atten
Input attenuation sets the amount of input attenuation for the RF IN/OUT and
ANT IN ports. This field performs two functions:
• The upper field determines if the instrument sets the attenuation (Auto), or if you want
to set the value (Hold).
• The lower field displays the present attenuation value and is used to set the desired at-
tenuation level when the upper area is set to Hold.
Setting the upper field to Hold prevents the RF autoranging process from
interrupting Spectrum Analyzer operation when a signal is first measured. This
can be helpful when you need to see the signal the instant the source is input, but
requires you to set the needed amount of input attenuation.
461

Field Descriptions
Normalize
This area performs three display operations:
• Save B saves the currently-displayed trace for the A-B operation.
• A only provides a continuously-updated display (the “normal” mode of operation).
• A-B displays the difference between the trace saved using Save B and the currently
displayed trace. The comparison can yield either losses or gains in amplitude.
The A-B function works correctly only if the center frequency and span settings
are the same for both signals.
The reference level (Ref Level) can be changed to move the trace below the top
line of the display if the A-B function results in a gain.
The the HOLD key can be used to “freeze” the display at any time. This allows
you to view a trace before performing the Save B or A-B functions.
462

Field Descriptions
No Pk/Avg
This field performs two functions:
Pk Hold (peak hold) prevents the Spectrum Analyzer from erasing the previous
trace each time it sweeps. This causes the traces to ‘build-up’ on the screen until
Off, No Pk/Avg or the MEAS RESET key is selected. This allows the capture of
transient signals that are not displayed long enough to view during normal
operation.
Avg 1 through (video averaging) enables the Spectrum Analyzer to display a
trace representing the average of several measurements. The number of samples
used for measurement averaging range from 1 to 100 (see below). No Pk/Avg
and Off function identically. Off is provided to maintain backwards
compatibility with earlier firmware and software.
• No Pk/Avg means that peak hold and video averaging are off.
• Pk Hold means that peak hold is on.
• Avg [n] enables video averaging over [n] measurements,
where n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 50, or 100
• Off means that peak hold and video averaging are off.
After capturing the desired signal, you can use the HOLD function (press and
release the SHIFT key, then the PREV key) to prevent additional signals from
building-up on the display.
Sensitivity
This area performs two functions:
• The upper field selects Normal or High sensitivity for the RF input. The High setting
adds about 6 dB of sensitivity to the ANT IN port for looking at very low level signals.
However, this setting can cause measurements to be uncalibrated (indicated by a mes-
sage on the screen). High sensitivity can also cause high-level AM signals to be dis-
torted.
• The lower field selects the vertical resolution of the display. You can choose from
1 dB, 2 dB, or 10 dB per graticule.
463

Using the Spectrum Analyzer
Using the Spectrum Analyzer
Automatic Calibration
During operation, the Spectrum Analyzer pauses for approximately 2 seconds
every 5 minutes to recalibrate itself. This does not affect the accuracy of displayed
measurements, but does cause a brief interruption of the displayed information
during the process.
Setting Resolution Bandwidth and Sweep Rate

The resolution bandwidth and sweep rate are determined by the span setting, and
cannot be set independently.
These settings are listed in the following table.
Table 13 Relationship Between Span, Resolution Bandwidth, and Sweep Rate
Resolution BW
Span Sweep Rate
(kHz)
<50 kHz 0.3 28.6 kHz/second
<200 kHz 1.0 329.0 kHz/second
<1.5 MHz 3.0 3.0 MHz/second
<3 MHz 30.0 21.4 MHz/second
<18 MHz 30.0 36.3 MHz/second
<200 MHz 300.0 257.0 MHz/second
1 GHz 300.0 1.0 GHz/second
464

22
Tests Screen
465

Chapter 22, Tests Screen
Description of the Tests Subsystem

The TESTS screens are the also referred to as the Tests Subsystem; a group of
screens used to create, edit, and run automated test programs. Using program
control, the Test Set can run radio tests by itself and control other instruments
using the HP-IB or Serial Port. The HP 11807B Cell Site is an example this type
of testing.
Tests can be run from memory cards, the Test Set’s internal ROM or RAM, or
from an external disk drive.
Test programs are written in the HP Instrument BASIC (IBASIC) programming
language.
For detailed (step-by-step) instructions about using the TESTS screens, see your
Radio Test Software’s documentation or the Test Set’s Programmer’s Guide.
466

Tests Subsystem Screens

When you press the TESTS key, you access the main TESTS screen. The other
screens of the subsystem are accessed using the CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE:
or SET UP TEST SET: lists at the bottom of this screen.
TESTS Subsystem Screens

• Main Menu is used to load a test procedure from a disk, RAM, ROM, or memory card.
It is also used to access the other screens in the Tests Subsystem.
• Channel Information is used to specify transmitter and receiver frequency infor-
mation for the radio being tested and to enter squelch and signaling information.
• Test Parameters is used to tell the Test Set the requirements of the test system for
testing your radio.
• Order of Tests is used to define a test sequence from a list of possible tests.
• Pass/Fail Limits is used to specify the upper and lower limits for each test point.
If a limit is violated during a test, an F appears next to the test value to indicate a failure.
• Save/Delete Procedure is used to save and delete test procedures.
• Execution Conditions is used to control which test results are output and where
the results are printed (CRT/printer). This screen also controls whether tests run contin-
uously or singly, and whether the test continues or stops after a failure is detected.
• External Devices is used to specify what types of external equipment are con-
nected to the Test Set and their addresses. It is also used to specify where to store test
result data.
• Printer Setup is used to control which test results are output and where the results
are printed. This screen is also used for basic formatting of the printout (lines per page
and form feeds). Printer port and printer model number are also chosen on this screen.
• IBASIC Cntrl is used to run IBASIC programs. This screen is also used as a stand-
alone IBASIC computer. See the Instrument BASIC Programmer’s Handbook for in-
formation about writing your own tests for the Test Set.
467

TESTS (Main Menu)
TESTS (Main Menu)
tstmain.wmf
Figure 104 The TESTS (Main Menu) Screen
Cnfg External Devices

Selecting this field displays the TESTS (External Devices) screen.
Continue
This field is used to restart a paused test.
Description
This field displays a description of the file chosen in the Select Procedure
Filename: field.
Exec Execution Cond

Selecting this field displays the TESTS (Execution Conditions) screen.
468

TESTS (Main Menu)
Freq Channel Information

Selecting this field displays the TESTS (Channel Information) screen.
IBASIC IBASIC Cntrl

Selecting this field displays the TESTS (IBASIC Controller) screen.
Library
This field displays the library information of the file chosen in the Select
Procedure Filename: field.
Parm Test Parameters

Selecting this field displays the TESTS (Test Parameters) screen.
Print Printer Setup

Selecting this field displays the TESTS (Printer Setup) screen.
469

TESTS (Main Menu)
Proc Save/Delete Procedure

Selecting this field displays the TESTS (Save/Delete Procedure) screen.
Program
This field displays program information for the file chosen in the Select
Procedure Filename: field.
Run Test
Selecting this field loads and runs the test chosen in the Select Procedure
Filename: field.
Select Procedure Filename

This field is used to select the file you want to load from the location chosen in the
Select Procedure Location: field.
Select Procedure Location

This field is used the select the location of the procedure to load. Procedures can
be loaded from disk, card, ROM, or RAM.
Seqn Order of Tests

Selecting this field displays the TESTS (Order of Tests) screen.
Spec Pass/Fail Limits

Selecting this field displays the TESTS (Pass/Fail Limits) screen.
470

TESTS (Channel Information)
tstcinfo.wmf
Figure 105 The TESTS (Channel Information) Screen
This screen displays the channel frequencies to be tested.
471

Delete Ch
This field allows you to delete a channel from the frequency table at the bottom of
the screen.
Insert Ch
This field allows you to enter a new channel in frequency table at the bottom of
the screen.
You are required to specify if the test channel is a prime test channel. Prime test
channels are the radio channels primarily used by the radio operator; they are the
channels you are the most concerned about testing.
Use the RX Chan Info or TX Chan Info fields if the channel requires a tone
code or frequency for testing radios that have CTCSS (Continuous Tone-
Controlled Squelch System) squelch.
For example, if your radio uses a CTCSS tone of 91.5 Hz, you could enter the tone
frequency in both RX and TX channel information fields as CT FR91.5 or you
could enter the tone code itself as CT ZZ. The specific entries are described in
your HP 11807B software manual.
When testing cellular radios, the Channel Information is the channel number you
are testing (don’t confuse this with the Chan# field used to list channels on this
screen). When the cellular radio channel number is entered, the HP 11807B
software automatically sets the channel frequencies when testing. You do not
need to enter the RX and TX frequencies because they correspond directly to the
channel numbers.
NOTE: Enter −1 in the RX and TX test frequency fields to have all subsequent channels ignored when
testing is started.
Main Menu
Selecting this field returns you to the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
Print All
This field allows you to print the Test Set’s screen image.
472

TESTS (Test Parameters)
TESTS (Test Parameters)
tstparam.wmf
Figure 106 The TESTS (Test Parameters) Screen
Test Parameters are used to define operating and testing characteristics to match
those of the radio being tested (audio-load impedance, audio power, power-supply
voltage, and so forth).
By selecting the Parm#, Value, or Units fields and using the data and units
keys, you can modify or enter parameters.
NOTE: The tests you select determine the parameters that are required. Your radio test documentation
provides details if you are using HP 11807 software.
Print All
Main Menu
473

TESTS (Order of Tests)
tstorder.wmf
Figure 107 The TESTS (Order of Tests) Screen
The order of tests is set up by selecting one or more tests from the complete list of
available tests (such as selecting a subset of an entire HP 11807B package). The
TESTS (Order of Tests) menu lets you select the radio tests you want to perform
and the order in which the tests are done.
Tests can be selected in any order; but to reduce testing time, you should
strategically organize the test sequence. Tests requiring operator intervention
(changing volume, channels, and so forth) should be grouped together.If you are
using HP 11807 software, see its documentation to see which parameters go with
each test.
All Chans?
This field allows you to choose if a new test is to be run on all channels (Yes) or
only on prime channels (No). Prime channels are specified on the
TESTS (Channel Information) screen. The underlined entry is the active choice.
474

Delet Stp
This field allows you to delete a step from the test list at the bottom of the screen.
Insrt Stp
This field allows you to enter a step in the test list at the bottom of the screen.
When inserting a new test, you must select the Step# where you want to insert a
new test. When inserted, the new test forces the current test (at that step #) down
one step, and a duplicate of the current test is inserted. This duplicate is
overwritten when the new test is selected.
See Also
Main Menu
Print All
Step#
The Step# field lists the order of selected tests for the current procedure.
Use the knob, up-arrow, or down-arrow key to select the step where you want to
delete, replace, or insert a test.
Test Name
This field displays the names of the tests available from the software package or
program currently selected. As you turn the knob, the Test Name for the
corresponding step appears above the test’s Description.
475

TESTS (Pass/Fail Limits)
tstpassf.wmf
Figure 108 The TESTS (Pass/Fail Limits) Screen
Pass/Fail limits are the radio manufacturer’s upper and lower limits used by the
Tests Subsystem. For a radio to pass a test, the measured value must fall within
the test’s limits. Tests results can be compared to only the lower limit, only the
upper limit, both the upper and lower limits, or no limits (None). (Pass/Fail limits
are sometimes referred to as specifications.)
NOTE: The tests you select determine the specifications that are required. The HP 11807
documentation provides details if you are using HP 11807 software.
476

Check
This field is used to select whether the test will verify only upper, only lower,
both, or none of the specified limits.
Selecting both upper and lower limits increases test time, but may be required for
some tests.
Lower Limit
This field is used to set the lower limit to be compared with the measured results.
If the measured result is below this limit, the test will fail.
Main Menu
Print All
Spec#
The Spec# field lists the order of selected pass/fail limits for the current
procedure.
Units
The Units column indicates the unit-of-measure used for the limits (%, dBm,
kHz, and so forth).
Upper Limit
This field is used to set the upper limit to be compared with the measured results.
If the measured result is above this limit, the test will fail.
477

TESTS (Save/Delete Procedure)
tstsvdel.wmf
Figure 109 The TESTS (Save/Delete Procedure) Screen
After selecting a test sequence and defining the appropriate specifications,

parameters, frequencies, and system configuration, you can save all that
information as a procedure file for later use.
This screen is also used to delete procedures.
478

Code Location
This field is used to select where the program (code file) for the test procedure is
stored. Code files are the main program files of the software, containing all of the
test subroutines. If an HP 11807 memory card is catalogued, the code file is
preceded by a lower-case c.
Enter Procedure Filename

This field is used to enter the name of the file you want to save or delete.
When you save a procedure file, you can use any name with up to 9 characters.
You can also delete previously-saved files to be able to resave a file using the
same file name.
The media must be initialized before a file can be saved. Refer to the
Main Menu
Pass Word
The Pass Word field allows you to access a secured test procedure file. Test
procedures are secured using the SECURE_IT program in ROM. On the HP
8921Athis program is directly accessed from the ROM list of choices.
See Also
"Securing a Test Procedure" on page 493
479

Procedure Library
This field is used to select whether the new test procedure will use the current
test’s library or no library. All HP 11807 Test Procedures must be saved with a
test library. Other IBASIC programs may not require an associated library file.
Library files contain all of the channel, parameter, and test name information used
with the code file. If an HP 11807 memory card is catalogued, the library file is
preceded by a lower-case l.
Select Procedure Location

This field is used the select where a new procedure will be saved, or the location
from which a procedure will be deleted. Procedures can be saved to, or deleted
from, disk, card, or RAM.
Procedure files contain a subset of the library file. This is where you save all of
your own frequency, parameter, test sequence, specification, and system
configuration information. A procedure file is not a directly-executable file for HP
11807 tests; it requires the code and library files to be present before running.
To save a file to an external disk drive, you must enter the drive’s HP-IB address
into the External Disk Specification field on the TESTS (External
Devices) screen.
480

TESTS (Execution Conditions)
tstexec.wmf
Figure 110 The TESTS (Execution Conditions) Screen
The TESTS (Execution Conditions) screen determines how tests are run.
481

Autostart Test Procedure on Power-Up

When set to On, this field automatically loads and runs the specified procedure
whenever the Test Set is turned on. If this field is set to Off or the specified
procedure cannot be loaded for any reason (such as, memory card not inserted,
disk drive not connected), the Test Set will default to its normal power-on state.
Continue
If Unit-Under-Test Fails
This field selects what happens if the measured results do not meet criteria for
passing the current test. The underlined entry is the active choice.
• Continue continues with testing even though a test in the test sequence fails to meet
its test specification limits. When this occurs, an error is listed on the test-results print-
out, is displayed on the CRT, or both.
• Stop stops the test when a failure occurs and requires operator intervention before test-
ing proceeds.
Main Menu
Output Heading
This field allow you to enter a heading for the test results printout (or CRT
display).
Output Results To
This field selects where test results are output. The underlined entry is the active
choice.
• CRT displays test results on the Test Set’s CRT.
• Printer displays test results on the Test Set’s CRT and outputs them to a printer.
(The printer information must first be entered on the TESTS (Printer Setup) screen.)
482

Output Results For

This field selects which test results are output. The underlined entry is the active
choice.
• All outputs all test results on to the location selected in the Output Results To:
field.
• Failures outputs only the results of tests which fail.
Run Test
Filename: field on the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
Test Procedure Run Mode

This field selects how the test will be run. The underlined entry is the active
choice.
• Continuous runs the tests in the test sequence one after another without stopping.
Testing pauses only if the operator is required to interact with the UUT or Test Set. In-
teractions such as changing UUT channels and setting squelch and audio levels cause
testing to pause. Selecting Stop in the If Unit-Under-Test Fails: field may
also stop a test.
• Single Step runs the tests in the test sequence one at a time. The operator is prompt-
ed to press Continue to proceed with testing.
483

TESTS (External Devices)
tstextdv.wmf
Figure 111 The TESTS (External Devices) Screen
The Tests Subsystem can only access external devices if they have been
configured. Most external devices use the HP-IB port for control. A serial printer
can be connected to the serial port for printing test results.
NOTE: HP-IB Mode. The Mode field on the I/O CONFIGURE screen must be set to Control to
access connected HP-IB instruments.
484

Addr
This field is used to enter the instrument’s remote address. For HP-IB instruments,
enter the full 3-digit address (such as 704).
Calling Name
The Calling Name field is used to enter the instrument’s function (in upper-case
letters). For example, PRINTER, POWER SUPPLY, DATA COLLECTION (disk
drive), and so forth.
Delet Ins
This field allows you to delete an instrument from the list at the bottom of the
screen.
delete an instrument.
External Disk Specification

This field is used when storing and loading procedures on an external disk.
The HP-IB path entered in the External Disk Specification field is used
by the Select Procedure Location: field on the TESTS (Main Menu)
screen when Disk is selected.
Insrt Ins
This field allows you to enter an instrument in the list at the bottom of the screen.
insert an instrument.
See Also
485

Inst#
The Inst# field lists the number of external devices that are configured for the
tests in the current procedure.
Main Menu
Model
This field is used to enter the instrument’s model number. There is no specific
syntax for entering model numbers into this field.
Options
This field is used to enter the instrument’s option number or numbers if any.
This field may be left blank, or otherwise may include other calling name options,
for example:
Printer options – LN=#,START,END
Where # is the number of lines on each page.
Where START causes a form feed at the start of each printout.
Where END causes a form feed at the end of each printout.
Data collection options – NN
Where NN is the number of records (file size) for the mass-storage location where
data will be collected on disk or memory card. The default record size is 80.
Print All
486

TESTS (Printer Setup)
tstprint.wmf
Figure 112 The TESTS (Printer Setup) Screen
The TESTS (Printer Setup) screen determines how tests are run.
Continue
FF at End:
want a form feed at the end of printing. The underlined entry is the active choice.
FF at Start:
want a form feed at the start of printing. The underlined entry is the active choice.
487

Lines/Page:
This field is used to specify how many lines are printed per page.
Main Menu
Model:
This field is used to specify the type of printer used. If your printer is not listed in
the Choices menu when you select this field, configure your printer to emulate
one of those that is listed.
Output Heading:
This field allows you to enter a heading for the test results printout (or CRT
display).
Output Results To:

This field selects where test results are output. The underlined entry is the active
choice.
• Crt displays test results on the Test Set’s CRT.
• Printer displays test results on the Test Set’s CRT and outputs them to a printer.
Output Results For:

This field selects which test results are output. The underlined entry is the active
choice.
• All outputs all test results on to the location selected in the Output Results To:
field.
• Failures outputs only the results of tests which fail.
488

Printer Address:
This field is used to specify the address of an HP-IB printer. This field is only
displayed if the Printer Port: field is set to HP-IB.
Printer Port:
This field is used to select the port your printer is connected to.
Run Test
Filename: field on the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
489

TESTS (IBASIC Controller)
tstibasc.wmf
Figure 113 The TESTS (IBASIC Controller) Screen
The IBASIC controller is used to run IBASIC programs. This screen is also used
as a stand-alone IBASIC computer. See the Instrument BASIC documentation for
information about writing your own tests for the Test Set.
If you need to perform a simple IBASIC operation, such as a SAVE or GET
function, you can enter commands one at a time. To do this, access the
TESTS (IBASIC Controller) screen and use the knob to enter commands.
Refer to the Programmer’s Guide for information about using the TESTS
(IBASIC Controller) screen to write and store your own tests.
490

Clr Scr
This field is used to clear the IBASIC controller screen.
Continue
Main Menu
Run
Selecting this field runs the IBASIC program.
Sngl Step
This field (single step) allows you to step through an IBASIC program
line-by-line.
491

ROM Programs
ROM Programs
Using the Signal Strength Meter
sigmeter.wmf
Figure 114 The Signal Strength Meter Screen
The Signal Strength Meter is accessed by loading and running the LVL_MTR ROM
program.
1. Select the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
2. Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Location: field and choose ROM.
3. Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Filename: field and select
LVL_MTR.
4. Press the k3 key and enter the tune frequency (in MHz), then press the ENTER key. Do
not press a units (MHz, kHz, Hz) key. MHz is the default unit and cannot be changed.
The ANT IN port is always the signal source.
492

ROM Programs
Securing a Test Procedure

The password option for securing a test procedure is accessed by loading and
running the SECURE_IT ROM program. This program is accessed by running the
IB_UTIL program.
The password option for securing a test procedure is accessed by loading and
running the SECURE_IT ROM program. This program is accessed by directly
selecting it from the Choices menu.
2. Select the Select Procedure Location: field and choose ROM.
3. Select the Select Procedure Filename: field.
• Select SECURE_IT from the list of programs. Press Run Test to run the proce-
dure; follow the directions to secure the desired information.
• Select IB_UTIL from the list of programs. Press Run Test to display a list of pro-
cedures; select SECURE_IT and follow directions to secure the desired informa-
tion.
Clearing RAM
RAM can be cleared using the RAM_MNG program in the Test Set’s ROM. This
program clears all RAM, including any SAVE/RECALL registers saved to
Internal (see the Save/Recall field description, on page 387 in the I/O
CONFIGURE screen description).
This program is accessed by running the IB_UTIL program.
This program is accessed by directly selecting it from the Choices menu.

2. Select the Select Procedure Location: field and choose ROM.
3. Select the Select Procedure Filename: field.
• Select RAM_MNG from the list of programs. Press Run Test to run the procedure;
follow directions to clear RAM.
• Select IB_UTIL from the list of programs. Press Run Test to display a list of pro-
cedures; select RAM_MANAGER and follow directions to clear RAM.
To preserve the SAVE/RECALL registers, don’t use the RAM_MNG program.

Instead, load a different test program to clear the previous test from RAM, and
then reload the desired test.
493

ROM Programs
494

23
TX Test Screen
495

Chapter 23, TX Test Screen
Block Diagram
Block Diagram
)NPUT 0ORT )& &ILTER
2& )N !NT K(Z
!.4 ).
2& )&
2& )&
34!'%3 34!'%3
,/
2& ).
(IGH 0OWER
!TTENUATOR
4UNE -ODE 4UNE &REQ
!UTO -ANUAL
-(Z
48 0OWER !& !NL )N
-EASUREMENT !UTO -ANUAL

48 0WR :ERO 2EFERENCE
:ERO
&- $EMOD
&I LTER &ILTER
!- $EMOD
(Z (0& (Z ,0&
33" $EMOD
&ROM !5$)/ ). !UDIO ).
&ROM 2ADIO )NTERFACE 2ADIO )NT
2EAR 0ANEL -OD ). %XT -OD
&ROM -)# !## -IC -OD
&ROM !-&- &- -OD
-ODULATORS
!- -OD
$E %MPHASIS
-EASUREMENTS $ISPL AY !REA
US/FF $ETECTOR 4UNE -ODE
!& !NL )N
0K -AX !UTO-ANUAL
&- $EMOD
/&&
2-3
48 &REQ %RROR &- $EVIATION
2-3
3124
2+
!# ,EVEL
0+
US 48 0OWER
0+
3).!$ 3.2
0K -AX 6OL TMETER
$ISTN
0K (OLD
!& &REQ
0K (OLD
$# ,EVEL
0K (D
#URRENT
0K -X(D
&- &REQ
!& 'EN &REQ

-)#!##
!5$)/ /54
%XT 48 +EY
/. /FF
!& 'EN ,VL

Figure 115 TX TEST Functional Block Diagram
496

Field Descriptions
Field Descriptions
txscrn.wmf
Figure 116 The TX Test Screen
497

Field Descriptions
AF Anl In
Audio Frequency Analyzer input selects the input for the analyzer. When selected,
this field displays a list of choices.
• The AUDIO IN, RADIO INTERFACE, MODULATION INPUT, MIC/ACC, and
AUDIO OUT connectors.
The signal present at the AM or FM modulators for the RF Generator.
Changing this field alters the upper AF measurement to the appropriate
measurement type.
See Also
498

Field Descriptions
AF Freq
This is the default measurement for this measurement field. Selecting this field
displays the following measurement choices:
SINAD
Distortion
AF Frequency
DC Level
Current - DC only

SNR Operation
See Also
499

Field Descriptions
AFGen1 Freq
AFGen1 Lvl
This Audio Frequency Generator control sets the level out the AUDIO OUT
connector in volts rms (across a low-impedance output), or in mW, W, or dBm
across a 600-ohm load (mW is selected by pressing [SHIFT], [ENTER]).
In the TX TEST screen, the signal is always output through the AUDIO OUT
connector.
Current
The Current field is found by selecting the SINAD field on the Test Set display
of the TX TEST screen. This field only displays the DC current measured at the
DC input port on the back of the Test Set. Any offset can be removed by selecting
Zero from the DC Current field.
DC Level
This field displays the DC voltage entering at the DC input port on the back of the
Test Set.
De-Emphasis
analyzer and speaker circuitry.
See Also
500

Field Descriptions
Detector
signal levels.
Detector Types
• RMS*SQRT2 displays the RMS value of a signal multiplied by 2 .
• Pk±/2 adds the positive and negative peak values and divides the sum by 2.
• Pk±Max compares the positive and negative peaks and displays the greater value
(polarity is not indicated).
To reset, press the MEAS RESET key, or select a different detector, or reselect the same
detector.
To reset, press the MEAS RESET key, select a different detector, or reselect the same
detector.
• Pk±/2 Hold divides the sum of the positive and negative peak values by 2, and
displays the value until the measurement is reset. To reset, press the MEAS RESET
key, select a different detector, or reselect the same detector.
detector, or reselect the same detector.
See Also
501

Field Descriptions
Distn
This field displays the percent of distortion. The Distortion measurement is only
for a 1 kHz signaling tone.
Ext TX Key
See Also
Figure 117 on page 516

See Also
FM Deviation
See Also
IF Filter
This field selects the desired IF filter’s bandwidth for modulated signals being
analyzed.
502

Field Descriptions
Input Port
The RF IN/OUT port must be used for making TX Power measurements on this
screen.
disconnect the RF power, press the MEAS RESET key, and allow the Test Set to
cool off for approximately 2 minutes before making any other measurements on
this port.
low-level signals (such as “off the air” measurements). You cannot measure TX
(RF) Power on this screen using the antenna port. However, low-level RF power
at the antenna port can be measured using theSpectrum Analyzer.
CAUTION: Connecting a signal of >200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage.
RF Channel
The RF Channel field is displayed only when the RF Display field is set to
Chan on the CONFIGURE screen.
This field displays the current channel number. Channel tuning eliminates the
need to transmit and receive frequencies directly into the Test Set. Once the
radio’s RF channel standard is selected, you only have to enter the channel
number to automatically set the RF Generator and RF Analyzer to the correct
frequency.
To utilize the correct transmit and receive frequencies select the appropriate
channel standard from the RF Chan Std field on the CONFIGURE screen.
503

Field Descriptions
SINAD
This field is only visible when SINAD is selected from the AF Freq field on the
display area of the TX TEST screen. This field displays the measured SINAD of
the input signal.
Tune Freq
RF Analyzer tune frequency sets the center frequency for the RF signal to be
analyzed.
If the Tune Mode is set to Auto, the frequency is set by the Test Set by finding
the strongest RF signal above −36 dBm within the full bandwidth of the RF
Analyzer.
If the Tune Mode is set to Manual, the operator must enter the desired frequency.
See Also
Tune Mode
Auto causes the RF Analyzer to find the signal with the greatest amplitude
>-36 dBm, and set the tune frequency for that signal.
Manual requires the operator to set the tune frequency for the RF signal to be
analyzed.
tuning enables the TX Frequency measurement. Manual tuning enables the TX
Freq Error measurement.
After autotuning to the desired signal, select Manual to prevent the Tune Freq
from changing when the signal is no longer applied.
504

Field Descriptions
TX Freq Error,
TX Frequency
transmitter frequency.
See Also
TX Power
ANT IN port.
See Also
TX Power field description (this page)
505

Field Descriptions
TX Pwr Zero
CAUTION: RF power must not be applied while zeroing. Set the RF GENERATOR screen Amplitude
field to off to prevent internal cross-coupling into the power detector while zeroing
internal circuitry increases. This can cause changes in the TX Power
measurement when low power levels are measured immediately following high
power measurements.
power meter immediately before making the low-power measurements; this
provides the best measurement accuracy.
506

24
Connector, Key, and Knob Descriptions
507

Connector Descriptions
ANT IN
The antenna input is used for analyzing low-power RF signals (≤200 mWatts),
and is typically used for off-the-air measurements. This port can be selected in the
TX TEST, DUPLEX TEST, RF ANALYZER, or SPECTRUM ANALYZER
screens.
(although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short-duration signal
of 1 or 2 Watts).
the screen), remove the signal from the ANT IN port, and press [MEAS RESET]
or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.
Input impedance = 50Ω
TX Power cannot be measured using this port; use the RF IN/OUT port. However,
low power levels can be measured using this port with the Spectrum Analyzer.
Additional sensitivity for this port is available using the Sensitivity field in
the RF ANALYZER and SPECTRUM ANALYZER screens.
508

AUDIO IN
Two connectors are used to input audio signals to the AF Analyzer:
• HI is the main audio signal input connection.
• LO is used for the audio signal reference. Three choices are available using the AF AN-
ALYZER screen’s Audio In Lo field:
• Gnd connects the center pin through approximately 100Ω to chassis ground.
• Float is a floating input.
• 600 To Hi provides a 600Ω internal load to match an audio source with an output
impedance of 600Ω.
The measured level is the potential between the HI and LO center pins. The shells
of both connectors are at chassis ground.
Input impedance is switchable between 1 MΩ in parallel with 95pF, or 600Ω
floating.
This port is selected as the AF Analyzer’s input using the AF Anl In field in the
TX TEST screen, DUPLEX TEST screen, AF ANALYZER screen, and various
encoder modes. This port is always the AF Analyzer’s input when the RX TEST
screen is displayed.
Signals input to the AF Analyzer are routed through different filters, amplifiers,
and detectors that affect the displayed measurement.
CAUTION: The maximum level between the HI and LO center pins is 42 V peak (approximately
30 Vrms). Exceeding this value can cause permanent instrument damage.
See Also
509

AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT

This connector provides an external output from various tap points in the AF
Analyzer.
The Scope To field in the AF ANALYZER screen determines the source of this
signal.
The level is not affected by the front-panel VOLUME knob.
Output impedance <1 kΩ
See Also
AUDIO OUT
This port is used to output signals from AF Generators 1 and 2, including the
encoder functions.
The output level is set by the AF Generators and is not affected by the front-panel
VOLUME control.
Output impedance <1Ω
Maximum output current = 20 mA peak
Maximum reverse voltage = 12 V peak
AC/DC coupling is selected using the Audio Out field. This field is available in
the DUPLEX TEST screen, RF GENERATOR screen, and various encoder
modes.
510

Chassis Ground
The rear-panel chassis ground terminal provides a general chassis connection, as
well as providing a safety ground when dc power is used.
WARNING: To prevent a potential shock hazard, always connect the chassis ground terminal to earth ground
when operating this instrument from a dc power source.
CRT VIDEO OUTPUT

This connector provides a signal for using an external video monitor. The signal
provides a duplicate of the Test Set’s screen.
A multi-sync monitor must be used to match the video sync rate of 19.2 kHz.
Examples of this type of monitor include - Mitsubishi Diamond Scan, NEC 3D,
Leading Edge CMC-141M, and Sony CPD-1302.
DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT
These connectors are used in series with a DC supply and load to provide a 0 to 10
amp DC current meter.
The dc current meter is designed to measure positive current (the connector’s
polarity is marked on the rear panel). Negative current of ≤10 amps will not
damage the instrument, but will cause inaccurate positive current measurements
(due to magnetic memory within the current-sensing element).
To recalibrate the current meter after negative current has been applied:
1. Connect a 10 amp positive current.
2. Disconnect the current.
3. Access the AF ANALYZER screen.
4. Select the DC Current Zero field to zero the meter.
See Also
511

DC INPUT
This female connector is used with a dc supply to provide power to the
instrument. The male counterpart to this connector is included in the Connector
Kit accessory. (See "Accessories" on page 535.)
The following HP parts can also be ordered to assemble the male counterpart to
this connector:
Connector housing: 1251-4782 (1 required)
Connector contacts: 1252-0385 (2 required)
WARNING: To prevent a potential shock hazard, always connect the chassis ground terminal to earth ground
when operating this instrument from a DC power source.
Digital Test Connections

Control I/O, CW RF OUT, DET OUT, IQ RF IN, 114.3 MHz OUT
The following connectors are only used when an HP cellular adapter (such as an
HP 83203B) is connected to the Test Set to perform digital modulation tests.
These connectors are optional.
1. Control I/O provides control of the cellular adapter.
2. CW RF OUT routes the RF carrier to the cellular adapter. If a cellular adapter is not
present, a jumper must be used to connect this port to the IQ RF IN port.
3. DET OUT routes the average power detector’s signal to the AUX DSP IN of the cellu-
lar adapter for making average power measurements. This port may not be used with
all models of cellular adapter.
4. IQ RF IN routes the RF carrier from the cellular adapter back into the Test Set. If a cel-
lular adapter is not present, a jumper must be used to connect this port to the CW RF
OUT port.
5. 114.3 MHz IF OUT provides the down-converted RF signal to the cellular adapter.
512

DUPLEX OUT
This connection is an output for the RF Generator and Tracking Generator.
Output impedance = 50Ω
The RF Generator’s output is selected in the Output Port field. This field is
available in the RX TEST, DUPLEX TEST, RF GENERATOR, and SPECTRUM
ANALYZER screens.
CAUTION: Connecting an RF source of >200 mW to this connector can permanently damage the
instrument.
EXT SCOPE TRIGGER INPUT

This connector provides an external oscilloscope trigger.
Input threshold approximately 2.5 V
Maximum Input level approximately 20 V peak
Input impedance is:
100 kΩ for signals ≤5.6 V peak
5 kΩ for signals >5.6 V peak
When measured with no load on the input, a 5 Volt level is present on the
connector due to the internal pull-up resistor design.
See Also
Chapter 14, "Oscilloscope Screen"
HEADPHONE
This port furnishes an alternate audio monitor output from the speaker circuit. It
allows you to listen to signals in a noisy environment (such as a cell site). The
front-panel VOLUME knob controls the level.
Output impedance approximately 1 kΩ
513

HP-IB
.
This connector allows communication between the Test Set and other instruments
or computers using the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB).
See Also
Chapter 12, "I/O Configure Screen"
HP 8920 Programmer’s Guide
MEMORY CARD Slot

This front-panel opening is where memory cards are inserted.
See Also
HP 8920 Programmer’s Guide
MIC/ACC
This 8-pin DIN connector (see figure 117 on page 516 ) is used for several
functions:
• Mic In is used to modulate the RF Generator when the KEY IN line is grounded. This
signal is summed with the external MODULATION INPUT signal. The Mod In To
field of the RF GENERATOR screen sets the type of modulation (AM or FM) and sen-
sitivity (%AM/Vpk or kHz/Vpk) for this connection.
• Key In provides control of the RF Generator’s output state (on or off) and automatic
switching between the TX TEST and RX TEST screens (if the CONFIGURE screen’s
RX/TX Cntl functions are set to Auto and PTT). Screen switching occurs when this
line is grounded.
• Key Out 1 and Key Out 2 provide a switch path to control external equipment (such as
keying a transmitter). Key Out 1 and Key Out 2 are connected when the Ext TX key
field is set to On.
CAUTION: Do not exceed 50 Vdc (open circuit) or 250 mA dc (closed circuit) between Key Out 1 and Key
Out 2. Damage to internal components may result.
514

To Use the Microphone

To modulate the RF Generator using the optional microphone (HP part number
08920-61059):
1. Connect the microphone to the MIC/ACC connector.
2. Access the RF GENERATOR screen.
3. Enter the carrier frequency in the RF Gen Freq field.
4. Enter the RF Generator’s Amplitude.
5. Select the Output Port (RF IN/OUT or DUPLEX OUT).
6. Connect the selected output port to your receiver or antenna.
7. Using the Mod In To field,
• select the type of modulation: FM (/Vpk)
• enter the modulation sensitivity to a 1 Vpeak signal (usually 1 kHz for microphone
use). See "Mod In To" on page 435.
8. Key the microphone to transmit.
MIC/ACC Operating Considerations

Mic In specifications
Input impedance = 100 kΩ
Maximum input level = 10 V peak
Full scale input = 10 mV
Bandwidth is limited to 3 kHz.
The Mic In signal is filtered and amplified to provide a stable deviation-limited
signal to the RF Generator.
750 µs microphone pre-emphasis is selected in the RF GENERATOR screen.
515

mic-con.wmf
Figure 117 MIC/ACC Connections
See Also
Chapter 18, "RF Generator Screen"
Chapter 7, "Configure Screen"
Chapter 17, "RF Analyzer Screen"
516

MODULATION INPUT
This connector provides an external modulation connection to the RF Generator.
Input impedance = 600Ω
Maximum input level = 12 V peak
Full scale input = 1 V peak
The Mod In To field of the RF GENERATOR screen sets the type of modulation
(AM or FM) and sensitivity (%AM/Vpk or kHz/Vpk) for this connection.
This signal is summed with the microphone MIC IN signal from the MIC/ACC
connector.
The FM Coupling field in the RF GENERATOR, DUPLEX TEST, and various
encoder modes selects ac or dc coupling of this signal for FM operation.
Parallel Port
This port is used with printers requiring a parallel interface when printing screen
images or test results. Set the Printer Port: field (on the PRINT
CONFIGURE screen or TESTS (Printer Setup) screen) to Parallel to print to
this port. Use address 15 when sending data to this port from IBASIC programs.
Pin numbers are embossed on the connector. Pin assignments are as follows:
517

1. nStrobe
2. Data 1 (Least Significant Bit)
3. Data 2
4. Data 3
5. Data 4
6. Data 5
7. Data 6
8. Data 7
9. Data 8 (Most Significant Bit)
10. nAck
11. Busy
12. PError
13. Select
14. nAutoFd
15. nFault
16. nInit
17. nSelectIn
18. Signal Ground (nStrobe)
19. Signal Ground (Data 1 and Data 2)
23. Signal Ground (Busy and nFault)
24. Signal Ground (PError, Select, and nAck)
25. Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, and nInit)
518

RADIO INTERFACE
This connector is optional on all Test Sets.
This connector provides parallel communications between the Test Set and
external radio equipment. The connector provides a 16-line parallel digital
interface that you can configure as inputs, outputs, or a combination of inputs and
outputs. You can set the logic thresholds and output levels so that the interface
will match the levels and thresholds of the device it is connector to. Audio and
transmitter control lines are also provided.
Parallel communication parameters are entered in the RADIO INTERFACE
screen. This screen is only available if the Radio Interface option is installed.
The audio signal from this connector is input by setting the AF Anl In field to
Radio Int. (The AF Anl In field is available in the TX TEST, DUPLEX
TEST, and AF ANALYZER screens, as well as various DECODER screens.)
Radio Interface Operating Considerations

Connector type: D-Subminiature, 37 pin.
All pins have 4.6 µH chokes in series for RFI suppression. Control and data lines
have clamp diodes across them for electrostatic discharge protection.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the diodes, the input voltage must not exceed logic voltage +0.6 V or be
less than −0.6 V.
Rise times are affected by capacitive loading. This is because the control and data
lines have 3.16 kΩ pull-up resistors.
Fall times are affected by open collector current sink limitations.
19 1
37 20
Figure 118 Pin Numbers for the Radio Interface Connector
519

The pin numbers for the radio interface connector are listed on the connector and in figure
118 on page 519. Pin assignments are as follows:
1. GND
2. No Connection
3. Audio Out
• This is an output for the audio sources, AF Gen1 and AF Gen2. It it also connected
in parallel to the front-panel AUDIO OUT connector.
• Set the AFGen1 To field, the AFGen2 To field, or both to Audio Out to
select this pin and the front-panel AUDIO OUT connector as the audio source out-
put. These fields are found on the RX TEST and DUPLEX TEST screens as well as
on the signalling encoder screen.
• All settings for the audio source affect the signal at this pin.
• Output specifications are the same as the front-panel AUDIO OUT connector.
4. Key Out 2
• This pin is a key relay contact.
• Key Out 1 and Key Out 2 are connected in parallel with the Key Out 1 and Key Out
2 pins of the front-panel MIC/ACC connector. They go to internal relay contacts
and can be used to key a transmitter. The relay contacts are closed, which connects
the two pins when the Ext TX Key field is set to On. This field can be found on
the TX TEST, DUPLEX TEST, or RF ANALYZER screen. (See "MIC/ACC" on
page 514.)
• Capacitance is 0.1 µF per pin (300 pF per pin after approximately 6 µs).
Contact Rating is 0.5 A, 50 V.
5. Audio Input
• Set the AF Anl In field to Radio Int to select this pin as the audio analyzer’s
input. This field is found on the TX TEST, DUPLEX TEST, or AF ANALYZER
screen, as well as various signalling decoder screens.
• Input impedance is 100 kΩ.
6. Key Out 1
• See pin 4. Also see "MIC/ACC" on page 514.
7. −12.6 V
• Pins 7 and 8 can supply power to a low current device. The voltage is always present
when the Test Set is powered on and cannot be varied or turned on or off.
• Output current is limited by an internal 100Ω, 2 W resistor.
8. +12.6 V
• See pin 7.
520

9. Logic Voltage (data level):

• The voltage on this pin determines the high output voltage and input logic thresh-
olds of the parallel data, strobe, and interrupt pins.
• Either +12 volts or +5 volts is supplied by the radio under test to indicate the HI (1)
logic level it uses for serial/parallel communications. If no signal is supplied, the
logic level defaults to 5 volts.
• The load that this pin presents to an external voltage source depends on how many
lines are pulled low.
• Input range is 5.1 to 20 V dc.
Load at maximum current (all lines pulled low) is 145Ω.
10. No connection
11. Parallel Strobe Out
• This pin outputs a digital pulse to indicate when data is output on the parallel data
pins.
• The leading edge occurs when the pins change state. But, to allow for settling time,
the external device should latch on the level of the pulse or the trailing edge. The
strobe can be set to go high or low with the Strobe Pol field on the RADIO
INTERFACE screen.
• The output level and current sink capability is the same as the parallel data pins.
Strobe pulse width is 5 µs (typical).
Logic Sense is programmable high or low.
12. Interrupt Input 1
• The interrupt lines can be used together or independently. The lines must be armed
for the Test Set to sense an interrupt. This is done in the Interrupt 1 or In-
terrupt 2 fields on the RADIO INTERFACE screen. When an armed interrupt
is pulled low, the Interrupt 1 or Interrupt 2 fields will show that the in-
terrupt is Tripped. The interrupt can only be cleared when the line returns to the
high state and the interrupt is armed again. The status of the interrupt lines can be
read from the RADIO INTERFACE screen or by an HP-IB or IBASIC program. Al-
so, one of the interrupts can be designated as the HP-IB service request (SRQ) in-
dicator.
• Logic is active low.
Input impedance is internally pulled-up to the logic voltage through 100 kΩ.
Logic threshold is the same as the parallel data pins.
13. Interrupt Input 2
• See pin 14.
14. No Connection
521

15. Parallel Data In/Out

• You can designate these pins as outputs or inputs with the I/O CONFIG field of
the RADIO INTERFACE screen. Pins designated as inputs are pulled high by the
Test Set. Output level and input logic thresholds are set by the logic voltage (pin 9).
• Pin 19 is LSB, Pin 34 is MSB.
• High level output is Logic Voltage through a 3.16 kΩ pull-up resistor.
Output current sink (TTL low, voltage ≤ 1.5 V) is 6 mA minimum, 16 mA typical
Input data logic threshold is (Logic Voltage − 0.7 V) × 0.34
The default Logic Voltage is 5.1 V.
• Read back on the data bus is accomplished by setting all data lines to the high state
and then having the user pull appropriate data lines low according to the data to be
read back.
16. No Connection.
See Also
Chapter 16, "Radio Interface Screen".
RF IN/OUT
This Type-N connection is used to output signals from the RF Generator and to
input RF signals.
CAUTION: Overpower Damage — Refer to the Test Set’s front panel for maximum input power
level. Exceeding this level can cause permanent instrument damage.
disconnect the RF power, press [MEAS RESET], and allow the Test Set to cool
off for approximately 2 minutes before making any other measurements on this
port.
This port must be used when measuring TX (RF) Power.
Signals ≤200 mWatts can be input to the ANT IN connector for all RF
measurements except TX Power.
This port can be selected in the TX TEST, DUPLEX TEST, RF ANALYZER, or
SPECTRUM ANALYZER screens.
See Also
"Displaying Measurements" on page 57.
522

SERIAL PORT
This 6-pin, RJ-11, dual serial port is used to input and output serial data for
entering programs, printing tests results and screen images, and sending test
results to a connected controller, disk drive, or terminal.
The serial communications settings are defined on the I/O CONFIGURE screen.
NOTE: Using Port B. The second serial port (B) is only used with IBASIC programs to communicate
with base stations or other equipment when the primary serial port is used for printing or data
collection. Port B cannot be used for printing screens, and its communication settings can only
be changed using IBASIC commands (listed in the Programmer’s Guide). Unless you are
writing IBASIC programs that require serial printing and other serial data transfer at the same
time, we recommend that you only use the primary port (A).
The IBASIC Controller sends and receives data to the serial ports using address 9
for the primary port, and 10 for Port B. For example, to enter data from the
primary serial port into a program variable named SDATA, you could use the
following command:
ENTER 9;SDATA
To send data from your program out of the primary serial port, you could use the
following command:
OUTPUT 9;SDATA
Use an RJ-11, 25-pin, RS-232 adapter (HP P/N 98642-66508) and RJ-11 cable
(HP P/N 98642-66505) to connect the Test Set to a serial printer, terminal, or
computer.
NOTE: RJ-11 Connectors. RJ-11 cables and adapters can be wired several ways. If you buy a cable
or adapter other than the HP parts listed, verify the connections for the pins indicated in the
following table before connecting cables to the instruments.
523

The following table lists connections for the primary serial port (address 9). When
using both ports at the same time, you need to locate or fabricate an adapter to
provide the necessary connections.
Test Set RJ-11 Terminal/PC Terminal/PC

Serial Port 25-Pin RS-232 9-Pin RS-232
Pin 2 (RX) to pin 2 (TX) or pin 3 (TX)
Pin 5 (TX) to pin 3 (RX) or pin 2 (RX)
Pin 4 (GND) to pin 7 (GND) or pin 5 (GND)
rj11.wmf
524

10 MHz REF INPUT

This connection allows you to input an external reference.
Input frequency = 1, 2, 5, or 10 MHz
Input level >0.15 V rms
Input impedance approximately 50Ω.
When a valid signal is applied to the 10 MHz REF INPUT, the Test Set
automatically switches from internal to external reference.
This signal is used as a reference for, and directly affects, these functions:
RF Generator Frequency (including the Tracking Generator)
RF Frequency Counter
AF Frequency Counter
RF Analyzer Tune Frequency
Spectrum Analyzer Center Frequency
AF Generators 1 and 2, and the decoder’s frequency counter, are not affected
using an external reference; they use their own reference.
NOTE: The reference output frequency is always 10 MHz, independent of the selected input reference
frequency.
Electrostatic discharges to the 10 MHz REF INPUT port of 0.5 kV or above may
cause degradation of performance requiring operator intervention.
10 MHz REF OUTPUT

This connector furnishes a 10 MHz reference for external instruments.
Waveform = sinewave
Output frequency = 10 MHz
Output level >0.5 V rms
Output impedance approximately 50Ω.
NOTE: The reference output frequency is always 10 MHz, independent of the selected input reference
frequency.
525

Key Descriptions
Key Descriptions
DATA Keys
The DATA keys have four main uses:
• The [0] to [9], [ . ], [+/-], and A to F keys are for entering and changing values.
• [ENTER] is used to select a field or screen, and to enter numbers when the unit-of-mea-
sure is not specified. This function is identical to pressing the cursor-control knob.
• [ON/OFF] is used to enable and disable measurements, and to turn numeric fields (such
as Amplitude) on and off.
• YES and NO are used to confirm selected operations before they are executed.
• EEX ([SHIFT], [+/-]) is used for entering numbers using scientific notation.
• The remaining keys in this area are for entering and changing the unit-of-measure for
measurements or field entries.
See Also
"Entering and Changing Numbers" on page 63.
526

Key Descriptions
DATA FUNCTIONS Keys

[INCR ³10], [INCR SET], and [INCR ×10] are used to change the increment or decrement
a value when changing field values.
• Up-arrow and down-arrow keys increment or decrement field values. These keys are
also used to select alternate field entries without displaying the Choices menu used
by some fields. They are also used to move the cursor in string entry fields (such as the
Print Title field on the PRINT CONFIGURE screen).
• LO LIMIT ([SHIFT], down-arrow key) and HI LIMIT ([SHIFT], up-arrow key) and set
measurement end points. Exceeding the end points causes screen prompts to blink until
they are reset.
REF SET ([SHIFT], [INCR ³10]) is used to enter or remove a measurement reference for
relative AF and RF measurements.
METER ([SHIFT], [INCR SET]) enables or disables the analog bar-graph meter function
for measurements using large digits (such as the RX TEST and TX TEST screen measure-
ments).
AVG ([SHIFT], [INCR ×10]) enables or disables measurement averaging.
See Also
"Operating Overview" on page 53 .
527

Key Descriptions
INSTRUMENT STATE Keys

[LOCAL] returns the instrument to manual control after HP-IB control is used.
• [RECALL] lists any instrument setups that were saved.

• [MEAS RESET] clears the measurement “history” for all of the instrument’s measure-
ment algorithms (such as the averaging function) to restart all measurements that are in
progress.
• [PRESET] restores most instrument settings to their factory default states, (although
most CONFIGURE screen changes are not affected). Instrument self-diagnostics are
not run at this time.
• ADRS ([SHIFT], [LOCAL]) displays the HP-IB address of the Test Set.
• SAVE ([SHIFT], [RECALL]) stores instrument setups.
See Also
"Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups" on page 71.
SCREEN CONTROL Keys

[RX], [TX], [DUPLEX], [TESTS], MSSG, HELP, and CONFIG access several instru-
ment control and information screens.
• [PREV] accesses the previous screen.

• HOLD ([SHIFT], [PREV]) stops all measurements. Selecting HOLD again resumes
measurements.
• PRINT ([SHIFT], [TESTS]) prints the entire contents of the displayed screen, the time
and date, and any Print Title defined in the PRINT CONFIGURE screen.
See Also
"Printing A Screen" on page 66.
528

Key Descriptions
Miscellaneous Keys and Buttons

• [SHIFT] is used to select the blue-labeled functions listed above some keys (such as
PRINT, CONFIG, RELEASE, EEX and so forth).
• [CANCEL] is used to cancel an entry in progress, or to stop a running IBASIC program.
For example, if you press [RECALL] to recall an instrument setup, and then decide not
to recall a setting, pressing [CANCEL] exits the recall procedure.
• Left-arrow key (backspace) is used to move the cursor to the left when entering num-
bers in a field, such as RF Gen Freq. Each press of this key moves the cursor one
place to the left, erasing the previous character.
• The rear-panel AC/DC button setting selects the instrument’s power source. The power
source must be changed with the Test Set turned off.
• [POWER] turns the instrument power on and off. Several CONFIGURE screen set-
tings, and all SAVE/RECALL registers, are retained by battery back-up when power is
disconnected.
USER Keys
These keys are used to instantly access fields without using the cursor-control
knob or changing screens.
See Also
"Using USER Keys" on page 75.
529

Knob Descriptions
Knob Descriptions
• CURSOR CONTROL has three functions:
1. Moving the cursor.
2. Selecting fields, screens, and settings from a list of choices.
3. Changing numeric field values.
• VOLUME controls the speaker volume for monitoring the AF Analyzer’s selected in-
put. The volume is also affected by the Speaker Vol and Speaker ALC fields in
the AF ANALYZER screen.
• SQUELCH adjusts the squelch level when demodulating AM, FM, or SSB signals. The
squelch level is affected by the Squelch field in the RF ANALYZER screen.
See Also
Chapter 17, "RF Analyzer Screen"
530

25
Modifications, Accessories, Manuals,

Support
585

Modifications
Modifications
This section includes information regarding:
• Hardware Upgrades/Modifications
• Firmware Upgrades
• Accessories
• Manuals (English and non-English)
• Radio Test Software
• Power Cables
• Sales and Service Support
Hardware Upgrades and Modifications

You can install several options in your Test Set or have Hewlett-Packard install
them for you. If you want HP to install the options, contact the nearest regional
sales office listed at the end of this chapter.
Some options may not be available depending on which model number you have. One or
more options may already be installed in your instrument. For more specifiic information,
see table 14 on the following page.
Table 14 Hardware Retrofits and Modifications
Description HP 8921A
Option 011ab: CCITT Weighting Filter R11
Option 020: Radio Interface Card R20
OPtion 042c: Ericsson PCM Reference R42
Option 500: TDMA Cell Site Test System, order HP 83204A Option 001 Option 500
Option 502: CDPD MDBS Cell Site Test System, order HP 83204A Option 502
Option 002
Option 503: TDMA/CDPD MDBS Cell Site Test System, order HP Option 503
83204A Option 003
Option 600: CDMA Cell Site Test System, order HP 83205A Option 001 Option 600
586

Modifications
Table 14 Hardware Retrofits and Modifications
Option 602: CDPD MDBS Cell Site Test System, order Option 002 Option 602
OPtion 603: CDMA/CDPD MDBS Cell Site Test System, order HP Option 603
83205 Option 003
a.Replaces C-Message weighting filer, should be ordered for TACS base station test.
b. Cannot be installed in HP 8921A with Option 042.
c. Cannot be ordered with Option 020.
587

Modifications
Firmware Upgrades
Table 15 Firmware Upgrades
Operating System and Signalinga ROMs R40b

R98c
a. Option 004 Tone/Digital Signaling.

b. For HP8920A/21A with S/N < 3546A and
includes R98.
c. For HP8920A/21A with S/N ≥ 3456A.
588

Accessories
Accessories
Table 16 Accessories
Telescoping Antenna 08920-61060
Microphone 08920-61059
DC Battery Pack (24V) 08920-80027
Battery Charger 08920-80028
CRT Sun Shade 08920-61051
Connector Kit (one each: dc power, MIC/ACC, RS-232, 08920-61061

RJ-11, and radio interface connectors)
DC Power Connector Housing (Qty 1) 1251-4782
DC Power Connector Contacts 1252-0385

(Qty 2)
System Rack Mount Flange Kit (Option 908) 5061-4846
Rack mount kita for HP 8920D or 08921-61037

HP 8921D
Padded Carrying Case 1540-1130
Hardshell Transit Case 08920-90033
Passive Oscilloscope Probe HP 10435A

(1 MΩ/7.5pF 10:1)

(High Z/40pF 1:1)

(High Z/64pF 1:1)
RF Detector Probe HP 34301A

(100 kHz to 700 MHz)
Resistor Divider Probe Kit HP 54006A
Power Splitter (DC to 3 GHz, 50Ω) HP 11850C
589

Accessories
Table 16 Accessories (Continued)
32 KByte SRAMb Memory Card HP 85700A
128 KByte SRAM Memory Card HP 85702A
128 KByte OTPc Memory Card HP 85701A
256 KByte OTP Memory Card HP 85703A
512 KByte OTP Memory Card HP 85706A
a. Allows rack mounting of Cellular Adapter (example: HP 83201A) to

HP 8920, HP 8921.
b. SRAM = Static Random Access Memory
c. OTP = One Time Programmable (PROM).
590

Accessories
External Monitor
The CRT’s Video Output drives a multisync monitor at 19.2 kHz (analog).
Examples of this type of monitor include the Electrohome ECM 1410-DMS
14-inch color monitor and the EVM 1242-P4VID 12-inch monochrome monitor.
591

Accessories
Manuals (English and non-English)

Table 17 Manuals
Description Language Option HP 8921A
Quick Reference Man- English -- 08920-90010

uala
Quick Reference Card English -- 08920-90014
HP 8921 User’s Guide English -- 08921-90022
Instrument BASIC Lan- English -- E2083-90000

guage Reference
Programmer’s Guide English -- 08920-90204
Assembly Level Repair English -- 08920-90168

Manual
User’s Guide Japanese ABJ 08920-90191
Programmer’s Guide Japanese ABJ 08920-90192
a. Shipped inside instrument impact cover
592

Accessories
Radio Test Software

The Radio Test Software performs automated tests on radios used in various radio
communication systems. Each test package is contained on an individual memory
card.
The HP 11807B Cell Site Test Software performs automated tests on cell site base
stations. This Software is used with the HP 8921A.
Table 18 HP 11807B Software for HP 8921A
Option 040 Motorola Test Software
Option 041 General Electric Test Software
Option 042 Ericsson GE Cell Site Software
Option 043 AT&T Test Software
Option 044 Northern Telecom Test Software
Option 045 Hughes AMPS Test
Option 050 System Analysis/Call Following Software
Option 052 Ericsson TACS Cell Site Software
Option 070 AMPS/NAMPS Micro CITE Test
Option 120 AMPS Call Analysis, Logging and Monitoring
593

Accessories
Power Cables
Plug Descriptions HP Part #

Plug Type Cable Descriptions
male/female (cable &plug)
Straight/Straight 8120-1689 79 inches, mint gray 79 inches,
Straight/90° 8120-1692 mint gray
Used in the following locations
Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Angola, Armenia, Austria, Azerbaijan, Azores

Bangladesh, Belgium, Benin, Bolivia, Boznia-Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burma, Burundi, Byelarus
Cameroon, Canary Islands, Central African Republic, Chad, Chile, Comoros, Congo, Croatia, Czech Republic,
Czechoslovakia
Denmark, Djibouti
East Germany, Egypt, Estonia, Ethiopia
Finland, France, French Guiana, French Indian Ocean Areas
Gabon, Gaza Strip, Georgia, Germany, Gozo, Greece
Hungary
Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Italy, Ivory Coast
Jordan
Kazakhstan, Korea, Kyrgystan
Latvia, Lebanon, Libya, Lithuania, Luxembourg
Macedonia, Madeira Islands, Malagasy Republic, Mali, Malta, Mauritania, Miquelon, Moldova, Mongolia,
Morocco, Mozambique
Nepal, Netherlands, Netherlands Antilles, Niger, Norway
Oman
Pakistan, Paraguay, Poland, Portugal
Rep. South Africa, Romania, Russia, Rwanda
Saudi Arabia (220V), Senegal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Somalia, Spain, Spanish Africa, Sri Lanka, St. Pierre
Islands
Sweden, Syria
Tajikistan, Thailand, Togo, Tunisia, Turkey, Turkmenistan
USSR, Ukraine, Uzbekistan
Western Africa, Western Sahara
Yugoslavia
Zaire
594

Accessories

Straight/Straight 8120-0698 90 inches, black

Peru

Straight/Straight 8120-2104 79 inches, gray
Straight/90° 8120-2296 79 inches, gray

Switzerland
595

Accessories

125V Straight/Straight 8120-1378 90 inches, jade gray
Straight/90° 8120-6177 90 inches, jade gray
Straight/Straight 8120-1751 90 inches, jade gray

American Samoa
Bahamas, Barbados, Belize, Bermuda, Brazil,
Caicos, Cambodia, Canada, Cayman Islands, Columbia, Costa Rica, Cuba
Dominican Republic
Ecuador, El Salvador
French West Indies
Guam, Guatemala, Guyana
Haiti, Honduras
Jamaica
Korea
Laos, Leeward and Windward Is., Liberia
Mexico, Midway Islands
Nicaragua
Other Pacific Islands
Panama, Philippines, Puerto Rico
Saudi Arabia (115V,127V), Surname
Taiwan, Tobago, Trinidad, Trust Territories of Pacific Islands
Turks Island
United States
Venezuela, Vietnam, Virgin Islands of the US
Wake Island
596

Accessories

JIS C 8303, 100 V Straight/Straight 8120-4753 90 inches, dark
Straight/90° 8120-4754 gray 90 inches,
dark gray

Japan
Plug
HP Part #
Plug Type Descriptions Cable Descriptions
(cable &plug)
male/female
90°/Straight 8120-2956 79 inches, gray 79 inches, gray 79
90°/90° 8120-2957 inches, gray
Straight/Straight 8120-3997

Denmark
Greenland
597

Accessories

Straight/Straight 8120-4211 79 inches, mint gray
Straight/90° 8120-4600 79 inches, mint gray

Botswana
India
Lesotho
Malawi
South-West Africa (Namibia), Swaziland
Zambia, Zimbabwe

Straight/90° 8120-2191 60 inches, jade gray
Straight/90° 8120-4379 15.5 inches, jade gray

System Cabinets
598

Accessories
Plug Descriptions HP Part # (cable&

Plug Type (Male) Cable Descriptions
male/female plug)
90°/Straight 90°/ 8120-1351 90 inches, mint gray 90
90° 8120-1703 inches, mint gray

Bahrain, British Indian Ocean Territories, Brunei
Canton, Cyprus
Enderbury Island, Equatorial Guinea
Falkland Islands, French Pacific Islands
Gambia, Ghana, Gibraltar, Guinea
Hong Kong
Ireland
Kenya, Kuwait
Macao, Malaysia, Mauritius
Nigeria
Qatar
Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Southern Asia, Southern Pacific Islands, St. Helena, Sudan
Tanzania
Uganda, United Arab Emirates, United Kingdom
Yeman (Aden & Sana)
599

Accessories

Straight/Straight 8120-1369 79 inches, gray
Straight/90° 8120-0696 80 inches, gray

Argentina, Australia
China (People’s Republic)
New Zealand
Papua New Guinea
Uruguay
Western Samoa
600

HP Support for Your Instrument

Parts and service for your Test Set can be ordered by contacting the nearest
Hewlett-Packard regional sales office listed in table 19, "Regional Sales Offices" on
page 601.
Customer Training
Hewlett-Packard offers customers a variety of training materials and classes that
explain the theory and applications of many HP products. Contact your HP
regional sales office to arrange training for you or your group.
Table 19 Regional Sales Offices
United States of America United States of America United Kingdom

U.S. Instrument Support Center Customer Information Center Sales and Service
For Test & Measurement Equip- Hewlett-Packard Company Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
ment Repair & Calibration. Tel: (800) 752-0900 Cain Road
Englewood, Colorado 80112 Amen Corner
6:00 am to 5:00 pm Pacific Time Bracknell, Berkshire
Telephone: (800) 403-0801 Parts Direct: 1-800-227-8164 RG12 1HN
Fax: (888) 857-8161 United Kingdom
Telephone: 44 344 360000
Fax: 44 344 363344
South Eastern Europe European Multicountry Region Northern Europe

Sales and Service Sales and Service Sales and Service
Hewlett-Packard Ges. m.b.h. Hewlett-Packard S.A. Hewlett-Packard Nederland B.V.
Liebigasse 1 P.O. Box 95 Startbaan 16
P.O. Box 72 150, Route dv Nant_dl_AVRIL 1187 XR
A-1222 Vienna, Austria CH-1217 Meyrin 2 Amstelveen, The Netherlands
Geneva, Switzerland P.O. Box 667
Telephone: 43 222 2500 0
Telex: 13 4425 Telephone: (41/22) 780-8111 Telephone: 31/20 5476911 X 6631
Fax: (41/22) 780-8542 Fax: 31-20-6471825NL
601

Table 19 Regional Sales Offices
Asia Japan International Sales Branch Head-

Sales and Service Sales and Service quarters
Hewlett-Packard Asia Ltd. Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd. Sales and Service
22-30/F Peregrine Tower 3-29-21, Takaido-Higashi Hewlett-Packard S.A.
Lippo Center Suginami-Ku, Tokyo 168 39 Rue Veyrot
89 Queensway, Central P.O. Box 365
Telephone: 81 3 3331-6111
Hong Kong 1217 Meyrin 1
Fax: 81 3 3331-6631
G.P.O. Box 863 Hong Kong Geneva, Switzerland
Telephone: 852-848-7777 Telephone: 41-22-780-4111
Fax: 852-868-4997 Fax: 41-22-780-4770
Australia, New Zealand Canada Canada

Sales and Service Sales and Service Service Center
Hewlett-Packard Ltd. Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd. Hewlett-Packard Company
P.O. Box 221 5150 Spectrum Way 17500 Transcanada Highway
31-41 Joseph Street Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5G1 S. Serv Road
Blackburn, Victoria 3130 Canada Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2X8
Canada
Telephone: (61/3) 895-2895 Telephone: (416) 206-4725
Fax: (61/3) 898-9257 Fax: (416) 206-4739 Telephone: (416) 206-3295
Canada Latin America

Service Center Hewlett-Packard Company
Hewlett-Packard Ltd. LAHQ Mexico City
11120 178 Street Col. Lomas de Virreyes
Edmonton, Alberta T5S 1P2 11000 Mexico D.F.
Canada Mexico
Telephone: (403) 486-6666 Telephone: (52/5) 326-4000
Fax: (403) 489-8764 Fax: (52/5) 202 7718
602

Error Messages
549

Error Messages
General Information About Error Messages

Information concerning error messages displayed by the Test Set may be found in one of
the following manuals:
• HP 8920A, HP 8920B, or HP 8921A User’s Guides

• HP 8920A, HP 8920B, or HP 8921A Programmer’s Guide
• HP 8920A, HP 8920B, or HP 8921 Assembly Level Repair Manual
• HP Instrument BASIC User’s Handbook:
• HP 8920A or HP 8921A: HP Instrument BASIC Users Handbook
(HP P/N E2083-90000)
• HP 8920B: HP Instrument BASIC Users Handbook Version 2.0
(HP P/N E2083-90005)
The format of the displayed message determines which manual contains information
about the error message. There are four basic error message formats:
• Positive numbered error messages

• IBASIC error messages
• HP-IB error messages
• Text only error messages
The following paragraphs give a brief description of each message format and direct you
to the manual to look in for information about error messages displayed in that format.
550

Error Messages
Positive Numbered Error Messages

Positive numbered error messages are generally associated with IBASIC. Refer to the
HP Instrument BASIC User’s Handbook for information on IBASIC error messages.
Positive numbered error messages take the form: ERROR XX

For example:
• Error 54 Duplicate file name
• or
• Error 80 in 632 Medium changed or not in drive
551

Error Messages
Negative Numbered Error Messages

Negative numbers preceding the error messages text correspond to the error conditions
outlined in the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments (SCPI). For more
information on SCPI, order the following book,
A Beginner’s Guide to SCPI Addison-Wesley Publishing Company ISBN 0-201-56350-9

HP P/N 5010-7166
or contact,
Fred Bode, Executive Director SCPI Consortium

8380 Hercules Drive, Suite P3
La Mesa, CA 91942
Phone: (619) 697-8790, FAX: (619) 697-5955 CompuServe Number: 76516,254
Negative numbered error messages take the form: ERROR −XX <error message>
For example:
Error -128 Numeric data not allowed
or
Error -141 Invalid character data
552

Error Messages
IBASIC Error Messages

IBASIC Error Messages are associated with IBASIC operation. IBASIC error messages
can have both positive and negative numbers. Refer to the HP Instrument BASIC User’s
Handbook for information on positive numbered error messages. Refer to the HP-IB Error
Messages section of the Programmer’s Guide for information on negative numbered error
messages (the error message associated with a negative number is the same for HP-IB
errors and IBASIC errors).
IBASIC error messages take the form: IBASIC Error: -XX

For example:
• IBASIC Error: -286 Program runtime error
553

Error Messages
HP-IB Error Messages

HP-IB Error Messages are associated with HP-IB operation. Refer to the Programmers
Guide for information on HP-IB error messages.
HP-IB error messages take the form: HP-IB Error: -XX or HP-IB Error
For example:
HP-IB Error: -410 Query INTERRUPTED.
or
HP-IB Error: Input value out of range.
554

Error Messages
Text Only Error Messages

Text only error messages are generally associated with manual operation of the Test Set.
This manual contains information on text only error messages.
Text only error messages can also be displayed while running the Test Set’s built-in
diagnostic or calibration utility programs. Refer to the Assembly Level Repair manual for
information on text only error messages displayed while running the Test Set’s built-in
diagnostic or calibration utility programs.
Text only error messages take the form: This is an error message.
For example:
• Input value out of range.
555

Error Messages
The Message Display

During instrument operation, various messages may appear on the Test Set’s display.
Prompt-type messages generally appear on the first line of the Test Set’s display. General
operating and error messages usually appear on the second line of the display. Some
messages are persistent; they remain displayed until the error condition no longer exists,
or until another persistent message with greater priority occurs. Other messages are only
displayed when the error first occurs; they are removed when a key is pressed or the knob
is turned, or when an HP-IB command is received. Many of the messages are displayed on
the MESSAGE screen until the instrument is turned off.
Messages that are about error conditions may tell you what to do to correct the error (turn
something off, reduce a field’s value, press a certain key, and so forth). Messages and
prompts are sometimes accompanied by a beep or warble.
NOTE: Warbles and Beeps

A warble sound indicates that an instrument-damaging event is occurring. Beeps
often occur only with the first occurrence of the message. Prompts are generally
silent.
556

Error Messages
Non-Recoverable Firmware Error

The non-recoverable firmware error is very important. It appears when an unanticipated
event occurs that the Test Set’s firmware cannot handle. The message appears in the
center of the Test Set’s display and (except for the two lines in the second paragraph) has
the form:
Non-recoverable firmware error. Please record the 2 lines of

text below and contact Hewlett-Packard through your local
service center or by calling (800) 827-3848 (USA, collect) and
asking to speak to the Service Engineer.
‘Address error exception’
at line number 0
To continue operation, turn POWER off and back on.
Follow the instructions in the message.
Unfortunately, you will not be able to recover from this condition. You must switch the
Test Set off and back on. When you rerun the test where the Error Message occurred, it
may not occur again. If it does reappear, it would be helpful to Hewlett-Packard to record
exactly what the configuration of the instrument was when the error appeared and contact
Hewlett-Packard.
557

Error Messages
Text Only Error Messages

Operation errors generally occur when you try to do something the Test Set was not
designed to do. Most messages tell you what to do to correct the problem, (turn something
off, reduce a field’s value, press a certain key,…and so forth).
Some common messages are listed here:
All self tests passed.
The Test Set did not detect any hardware or firmware failures during its initial self-
diagnostics. This message should always be displayed immediately after instrument turn
on.
Input value out of range.
A number was entered that was too large or small for the selected field, for example,
trying to set AFG1 Freq to 125 kHz.
Invalid keystroke.
You used a key that has no function relating to the selected field, for example, pressing the
[ON/OFF] key while the Filter 1 field is selected.
Option not installed.
You selected a function that requires optional hardware that is not present for example,
selecting TDMA TEST from the To Screen menu when you do not have an HP 83201A
or HP 83201B Cellular Adapter connected to the Test Set.
558

Error Messages
Table 20 Required Hardware for Additional Test Set Functions
Function Required Hardware
LVL_MTR (signal strength meter) A16 Receiver Assembly

ROM Program
TDMATEST HP 83204A Option 001 - Cellular Adapter
CDPD TEST HP 83204A Option 002 - Cellular Adapter
TDMA/CDPD TEST HP 83204A Option 003 - Cellular Adapter
CDMA TEST HP 83205A Cellular Adapter
PCS TEST HP 83236B Interface
RADIO INT Option 020 - Radio Interface Port
Encoder, Decoder Signaling
559

Error Messages
Turn off either AM or FM settings.
You tried to create simultaneous AM and FM (using any combination of AFGen1,

AFGen2, and the Mod In To field). The Test Set does not provide simultaneous AM
and FM.
Squelch interrupt overflow. Press MEAS RESET.
The Test Set temporarily interrupts audio measurements when squelch is first broken to
prevent internal switching transients from influencing measurements (except when using
the OSCILLOSCOPE, SPECTRUM ANALYZER, DECODER, or SERVICE screens). If
squelch is repetitively broken in a period of a few seconds, the duration of measurement
interruption becomes too great, and the Test Set stops interrupting the signal. Following
measurements may be influenced by transient signals.
Pressing [MEAS RESET] clears the data buffer used to generate interrupts, resetting the
normal squelch operation to eliminate transients.
This condition may occur when monitoring low-level off-the-air signals.
Cal file checksum incorrect - initializing file.
This error usually occurs after changing the Test Set’s firmware ROM’s. It is not a
problem in that instance, but should not re-appear during subsequent operation of the Test
Set.
Decoder buffer full. Decrease gate time.
Too many decoder samples were sent to the decoder’s buffer during a measurement gate
time causing a data overflow. Reducing the gate time decreases the amount of data sent
during each measurement.
560

Error Messages
One or more self tests failed. Error code: XXXX
An instrument failure was detected when the Test Set was turned on. (For example, having
a stuck front-panel key during turn on.) The numbered error message corresponds to a
binary-weighted group of errors listed in the *TST Common Command description in the
Change Ref Level, Input Port or Attenuator (if using “Hold”).
The RF signal level is either too great or too small for the current input port, attenuator
setting, or both. This error often occurs when trying to make a low-level measurement
using the RF IN/OUT port with the Spectrum Analyzer. Make the indicated changes until
this message is no longer displayed.
Change RF Gen Amplitude, Output Port or Atten Hold (if on).
This message appears when the RF Generator’s Amplitude field is set too high when
using the RF IN/OUT port or when adjusting the amplitude with the Atten Hold field
set to On.
The RF IN/OUT port has a lower maximum output level than the DUPLEX OUT port.
Use the DUPLEX OUT port, or reduce the RF Generator’s level.
If Atten Hold is On, you may be adjusting the amplitude outside of the allowed range.
Change the amplitude
Direct latch write occurred. Cycle power when done servicing.
The SERVICE screen was accessed and one or more internal latch settings were changed.
Turn the instrument off and back on to reset the latches. (This condition can occur during
periodic calibration.)
561

Error Messages
562

Index
---- Symbols Numerics

meaning of, ACP level measurement, (Gen)-(Anl) 10 MHz REF INPUT connector
87 Configure screen, 206 description, 525
meaning of, AF frequency, 119 10 MHz REF OUTPUT connector
meaning of, FM deviation, 123 description, 525
meaning of, squelch, 423 114.3 MHz IF OUT connector
meaning of, TX frequency error, 128 description, 512
meaning of, TX power measurement, 24-hour clock
58, 87, 93, 108, 298, 426, 437, 505 setting, 214
600 ohm impedance
at AUDIO IN, 99
563

Index
A output port, 86 ADRS key, 528

abbreviated address word ratio, 87 advanced mobile phone service
forward control channel, 179 ACP Meas decoder, 217
reverse control channel, 144 Adjacent Channel Power screen, 87 encoder, 301
Abort Print Active AF analyzer
Print Configure screen, 400 Call Bit screen, 163 CDCSS decoder settings, 230
abort printing, 66 Call Control screen, 119 input, 97, 218, 226, 231, 235, 241, 247,
ac Call Data screen, 141 251, 263, 281, 288, 498
power source, 529 Active annunciator level, 219, 228, 233, 237, 242, 248,
ac coupling Call Bit screen, 164 252, 265, 282
input, 294, 306, 316, 321, 325, 330, Call Control screen, 119 signal types analyzed, 97, 288, 498
340, 343, 372, 379, 434 Call Data screen, 141 AF Analyzer screen
output, 292, 302, 315, 320, 325, 329, Add Info AC Level, 97
340, 343, 370, 378, 434 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, AF Anl In, 97
AC Level 367 AF Cnt Gate, 98
AF Analyzer screen, 97 add options, 532 AF Freq, 106
Duplex Test screen, 287 Addr Audio In Lo, 99
Radio Frequency Analyzer screen, 419 Tests (External Devices) screen, 485 Current, 99, 106
RF Analyzer screen, 419 address DC current, 99
RF Generator screen, 431 digital paging, 322 DC Level, 100, 106
RX Test screen, 442 HP-IB, external devices, 485 De-Emp Gain, 100
ac level HP-IB, printer, 401, 489 De-emphasis, 100
measurement, 59 HP-IB, test set, 385, 528 Detector, 101
peak detector, 104 key, 528 Distn, 106
AC, access channel, 271 pager, 232 Ext Load R, 102
AC/DC button, 529 Address Qualifier Filter 1 and Filter 2, 102
Access annunciator Signaling Encoder screen, MPT 1327 FM Deviation, 102
Call Bit screen, 163 mode, 350 functional block diagram, 97
Call Control screen, 119 adjacent channel power Gain Cntl, 103
Call Data screen, 141 measurement, 87 Input Gain, 103
access channel Adjacent Channel Power screen Notch Freq, 104
channel number, call processing, 199 ACP Meas, 87 Notch Gain, 104
channel number, NMT, 371 AFGen1 Freq, 88 Pk Det To, 104
Access Channel Number AFGen1 To, 88 Scope To, 105
Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, Carrier Ref, 88 Settling, 105
367 Ch Offset, 90 SINAD, 106
Access Channel Power Channel BW, 88 SNR, 106
Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, Ext TX Key, 90 Speaker ALC, 107
367 Input Atten, 90 Speaker Vol, 107
access message, 171 Input Port, 91 TX Freq Error, 107
accessing screens, 42 Res BW, 92 TX Frequency, 107
accessories, 535 Tune Freq, 92 TX Power, 108
ACP, 87 Tune Mode, 92 view of, 97
AM transmitter, 86 TX Freq Error, 93 AF Anl In
input port, 87 TX Frequency, 93 AF Analyzer screen, 97
level, 87 TX Power, 93 Analog Meas screen, 192
measurement, 86 TX Pwr Zero, 94 Duplex Test screen, 288
measurement speed, 92 view of, 87 Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS-
564

Index
TACS mode, 218 AFGen1 Freq 369

Signaling Decoder screen, CDCSS Adjacent Channel Power screen, 88 ALC
mode, 226 Analog Meas screen, 193 disabling, 107
Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page Duplex Test screen, 290 internal speaker, 107
mode, 231 RF Generator screen, 432 alert order, 138
Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF RX Test screen, 442 All Chans?
mode, 235 TX Test screen, 500 Tests (Order of Tests) screen, 474
Signaling Decoder screen, EDACS AFGen1 Lvl Aloha Number
mode, 241 TX Test screen, 500 Signaling Encoder screen, MPT 1327
Signaling Decoder screen, Func Gen AFGen1 To mode, 351
mode, 247 Adjacent Channel Power screen, 88 alpha-numeric operation
Signaling Decoder screen, LTR mode, Analog Meas screen, 193 digital paging, 321
251 Duplex Test screen, 290 alternate traffic area, 375
Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS- RF Generator screen, 432 alternate traffic channel
NTACS mode, 218 RX Test screen, 443 number, 376
Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode, AFGen2 Freq power, 376
263 RF Generator screen, 432 AM
Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq RX Test screen, 442 depth, 59
mode, 281 Signaling Encoder screen, Func Gen input, 435
TX Test screen, 498 mode, 340 RF generator, 88, 290, 302, 315, 320,
AF Cnt Gate AFGen2 To 325, 329, 340, 343, 368, 378, 432,
AF Analyzer screen, 98 RF Generator screen, 433 433, 443
AF Freq RX Test screen, 443 AM Depth
AF Analyzer screen, 106 Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- Audio Analyzer Screen, 99, 419
Analog Meas screen, 193 TACS mode, 302, 305 amplifier
Call Control screen, 119 Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS for distortion measurements, 104
Duplex Test screen, 289 mode, 315 for SINAD measurements, 104
RF Generator screen, 436 Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page Amplitude
RX Test screen, 446 mode, 320 Analog Meas screen, 193
TX Test screen, 98, 499 Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF Call Control screen, 119
AF frequency mode, 325 Duplex Test screen, 291
modulation quality, 121 Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS RF Generator screen, 433
AF generator 1 mode, 329 RX Test screen, 444
amplitude, 290, 432, 443 Signaling Encoder screen, Func Gen Spectrum Analyzer screen, 455
frequency, 88, 290, 432, 442, 500 mode, 340 amplitude
level, 500 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode, AFGen1, 88, 290, 432, 443
modulation, 88, 290, 432, 443 343 AFGen2, 302, 315, 320, 325, 329, 340,
AF generator 2 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- 343, 368, 378, 433, 443
amplitude, 302, 315, 320, 325, 329, NTAC mode, 302, 305 for call control, 119
340, 343, 368, 378, 433, 443 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, for tone sequence, 380
frequency, 340, 432, 442 368 function generator, 340
modulation, 302, 315, 320, 325, 329, Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq off, 88, 290, 302, 315, 320, 325, 329,
340, 343, 368, 378, 433, 443 mode, 378 340, 343, 368, 378, 432, 433, 443
use of, 300 Alarm Level High RF generator, 291, 433, 444, 455
AF power Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, tracking generator, 457
external load resistance, 60, 97, 431, 369 twist, 327
442 Alarm Level Low vertical sensitivity, 393
measurement, 60 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, AMPS Call Control screen
565

Index
view of, 118 AF Freq, 193 sensitivity, 423, 463

AMPS-TACS AFGen1 Freq, 193 Antenna In
control channel decoder, 217 AFGen1 To, 193 Configure screen, 202
forward control channel, 301 Amplitude, 193 Area #
forward voice channel, 301 De-Emphasis, 193 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode,
radio standard, 312 Detector, 194 369
reverse control channel, 222 Filter 1, 194 Area 1
reverse voice channel, 222 Filter 2, 194 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode,
simulated system, 128 FM Deviation, 194 343
voice channel decoder, 217 TX Freq Error, 194 Area 2
AMPS-TACS decoder mode TX Power, 194 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode,
AF Anl In, 218 view of, 192 343
Arm Meas, 218 analog meter, 62 arm
Channel, 218 analyzer measurment, 218, 221, 227, 229, 231,
Data (hex), 219 arming measurements, 221, 229, 234, 234, 235, 238, 242, 243, 248, 249,
Gate Time, 219 238, 243, 249, 254, 266, 283 251, 254, 266, 281, 283
Input Level, 219 calibration, 464 radio interface interrupt, 407
Num of Bits, 220 disarming measurements, 243 Arm Meas
Polarity, 220 frequency, markers, 460 Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS-
Single/Cont, 221 input port, 454 TACS mode, 218
Stop Meas, 221 level, markers, 460 Signaling Decoder screen, CDCSS
Trig Level, 221 analyzer, AF mode, 227
Trigger Pattern (bin), 221 CDCSS decoder settings, 230 Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page
view of, 217 input, 218, 226, 231, 235, 241, 247, mode, 231
AMPS-TACS encoder mode 251, 263, 281 Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF
AFGen2 To, 302 level, 219, 228, 233, 237, 242, 248, mode, 235
Audio Out, 302 252, 265, 282 Signaling Decoder screen, EDACS
B/I Delay, 303 analyzer, RF mode, 242
Bursts, 303 frequency, 297, 425, 504 Signaling Decoder screen, Func Gen
Busy/Idle, 303 input attenuation, 421 mode, 248
Channel, 303 input port, 422 Signaling Decoder screen, LTR mode,
Data Level, 303 level, 419 251
Data Rate, 304 measurements, 424 Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS-
Filler, 305 sensitivity, 423 NTACS mode, 218
FM Coupling, 306 tuning, 297, 425, 504 Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq
Message, 307, 308 ANT IN connector mode, 281
Polarity, 310 avoiding damage, 58, 91, 108, 295, arrow down key, 527
SAT Freq, 311 298, 422, 426, 454, 503, 505, 508 arrow left key, 529
SAT Level, 311 connecting to, 40, 454 arrow up key, 527
Send, 311 description, 508 ASCII terminal, 81
Send Filler, 311 for ACP ratio measurements, 87, 91 configuring, 388
Send Mode, 312 for off-the-air measurements, 91, 256, ASSIGN, 77, 78
Standard, 312 295, 422, 503 Atten Hold
Stop, 312 for RF measurements, 91, 295, 422, Duplex Test screen, 291
Stop Filler, 312 503 RF Generator screen, 434
view of, 301 gain at, 202 RX Test screen, 444
Analog Meas screen input attenuation, 90, 421, 461 attenuation
AF Anl In, 192 loss at, 202 automatic control, 90, 421, 461
566

Index
input, RF analyzer, 90, 421 Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS B

input, spectrum analyzer, 461 mode, 329 B/I Delay (FOCC)
manual control, 90, 421, 461 Signaling Encoder screen, Func Gen Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS-
attenuator mode, 340 TACS mode, 303
decoder interference, 103, 421 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode, Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP-
input, 90, 421, 461 343 NTAC mode, 303
oscilloscope interference, 103, 421 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- backspace key, 529
attenuator hold, 291, 434, 444 NTAC mode, 302 bandwidth
Audio Analyzer Screen Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, adjacent channel power, 88
AM Depth, 99, 419 370 IF filter, 295, 421, 502
Audio Frequency Analyzer screen Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq resolution, ACP measurement, 92
Distortion, 100 mode, 378 Base Freq
audio frequency counter AUDIO OUT connector Configure screen, 203
gate time, 98 coupling, 292, 302, 315, 320, 325, 329, base settings
sampling, 98 340, 343, 370, 378, 434 changing, 74
audio frequency generator, 442 description, 510 default, 74
audio frequency measurements, 59, 98, audio power base station receiver
106, 289, 424, 436, 446, 499 measurement, 97, 431, 442 simulating, AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-
AUDIO IN connector audio source, 218, 226, 231, 235, 241, NTACS, 217
avoiding damage to, 509 247, 251, 263, 281 basic operation, 53
description, 509 Auto All Batt Save
for ac level measurement, 97, 431, 442 Range Hold, 208 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode,
for ac level measurements, 59 Auto/Norm 370
for call processing, 116 Oscilloscope screen, 396 battery, 51
for external load resistancemeasure- automatic level control, 107 saving, 370
ment, 102, 444 autoranging baud rate, 387
for SNR operation, 98, 106, 289, 436, AF/RF measurements, 208 beat frequency, 62
446, 499 gain setting, 103 Beeper
AUDIO IN HI connector, 509 input attenuator, 103, 421 Configure screen, 51, 204
Audio In Lo Autostart Test Procedure on Power-Up beeper
AF Analyzer screen, 99 Tests (ExecutionConditions) screen, error alert, 204
AUDIO IN LO connector 482 volume control, 51, 204
600 ohm impedance, 99, 509 auto-tuning Bell
floating, 99, 509 AF/RF measurements, 208 radio standard, 326
grounded, 99, 509 RF, 92, 297, 425, 504 bias
AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT connector averaging dc, offsetting, 434
description, 510 example, 69 billing information, 375
Audio Out measurement results, 69 bit error, 320
Duplex Test screen, 292 restart averaging, 69 bits
RF Generator screen, 434 AVG, 69, 527 CDCSS data rate, 227
Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- CDCSS data stream, 318
TACS mode, 302 CDCSS sequence, 227
Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS digitial paging data rate, 232
mode, 315 dotting, 306, 308
Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page information, 306, 308
mode, 320 LTR data rate, 252
Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF message, 225
mode, 325 NMT data rate, 371
567

Index
parity, 225, 306, 308, 309 C view of, decoding error message, 122
serial data word, 385 cables Call Data screen
specifying patter to display, 221 power, 539 Access annunciator, 141
sync word, 225 calibration Active, 141
triggering, 221 spectrum analyzer, 464 Active annunciator, 141
type, 306, 308 Call Bit screen Connect annunciator, 141
word sync, 306, 308 Access annunciator, 163 Display Word, 142
block diagram Active, 163 Order, 142, 165
AF Analyzer, 97 Active annunciator, 164 Page, 142, 166
Duplex Test screen, 287 Connect annunciator, 164 Page annunciator, 142, 166
RF Analyzer, 419 Data Spec, 164 Register, 143, 166
RF Generator, 431 Set Message, 166 Register annunciator, 143, 166
RX Test, 441 view of, 161 Release, 143, 166
TX Test, 497 Call Configure screen view of, 139
brightness CMAX, 199 call origination, 137
setting, 50, 207 Detector, 199 call processing
BS TX Pwr Zero, 199 AUDIO IN connector, 116
definition, 262 view of, 198 connecting mobile station, 114
BS Identity Call Control screen description, 109
Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, Access annunciator, 119 general procedure, 117
370 Active, 119 operational overview, 111
buffer overflow error, 233 Active annunciator, 119 screen, description of, 113
Bursts AF Freq, 119 state diagram, 112
Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- Amplitude, 119 Called Number
TACS mode, 303 Called Number, 120 Call Control screen, 120
Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS Chan, 120 Calling Channel Number
mode, 315 Cntl Channel, 120 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode,
Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page Connect annunciator, 120 371
mode, 320 Display, 121 Calling Name
Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF ESN (dec), 123 Tests (External Devices) screen, 485
mode, 325 ESN (hex), 123 CALLP
Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode, FM Deviation, 123 RECCW A, 140
343 Handoff, 123, 142, 165 RECCW B, 140
Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- MS Id, 124 RECCW C, 140
NTAC mode, 303 Order, 125 RECCW D, 140
Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq Page, 125 RECCW E, 140
mode, 379 Page annunciator, 126 RVCOrdCon, 140
busy state, 303 Phone Num, 126 CANCEL key, 529
Busy/Idle Pwr Lvl, 125 card
Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- Register, 126 procedure location, 470, 480
TACS mode, 303 Register annunciator, 126 Carrier
Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- Release, 126 Configure screen, 213
NTAC mode, 303 SAT, 127 carrier
SCM, 127 effect on RX/TX screen, 213
SID, 127 Carrier Ref
System Type, 128 Adjacent Channel Power screen, 88
TX Freq Error, 128 CC, calling channel, 271
TX Power, 128 CCIR1
568

Index
radio standard, 379 Channel clock

CCIR2 Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS- time-of-day, 214
radio standard, 379 TACS mode, 218 Clr Scr
CCITT Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS- Tests (IBASIC Controller) screen, 491
radio standard, 379 NTACS mode, 218 CMAX
CDCSS decoder mode Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- Call Configuration screen, 199
AF analyzer settings, 230 TACS mode, 303 Cnfg External Devices
AF Anl In, 226 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- Tests (Main Menu) screen, 468
Arm Meas, 227 NTAC mode, 303 Cntl Channel
Code (oct), 227 channel Call Control screen, 120
Data (bin), 227 access, NMT, 371 co-channel interference, 369
Data Rate, 227 assignments, NMT, 371 Code
Input Level, 228 bandwidth, ACP measurement, 88 Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS
Polarity, 228 calling, NMT, 371 mode, 315
Single/Cont, 229 changing, 349 Code (oct)
Stop Meas, 229 number, control channel, 120 Signaling Decoder screen, CDCSS
Trig Level, 229 number, NMT encoder, 371 mode, 227
view of, 226 offset, ACP measurement, 90 Code Location
CDCSS encoder mode spacing, user defined, 204 Tests (Save/Delete Procedure) screen,
AFGen2 To, 315 traffic, NMT, 371 479
Audio Out, 315 trunked home, receiver, 347 code word
Bursts, 315 trunked home, transmitter, 348 CDCSS decoder, 227
Code, 315 tuning, 210 color code
Data Rate, 315 Channel BW SAT, 127
FM Coupling, 316 Adjacent Channel Power screen, 88 CONFIG key, 528
Polarity, 316 channel power configuration
Send, 316 level, 87 call control, 198
Send Mode, 317 measurement, 86 call processing, 131
Standard, 317 measuring, 87 radio interface inputs, 408
Stop, 317 ratio, 87 serial port, 81
TOC Time, 317 channel standard test set, 49
view of, 314 AMPS (MS, LS), 209 Configure screen
cellular adapter ETACS (MS, LS), 209 (Gen)-(Anl), 206
connectors, 512 JTACS (MS, LS), 209 Antenna In, 202
cellular telephone, 313 LTR800/900 (MS, LS), 209 Base Freq, 203
Center Freq NAMPS(MSL, MSM, MSU, LSL, Beeper, 51, 204
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 453 LSM, LSU), 209 Carrier, 213
center frequency NTACS (MS, LS), 209 Chan Space, 204
for notch filter, 104 TACS (MS, LS), 209 Date, 50, 205
for spectrum analyzer, 453 USER-DEF, 209 Duplex Out, 205
RF signal, 92, 297, 425, 504 chassis ground, 511 Intensity, 50, 207
spectrum analyzer marker, 459 Check Low Battery, 51
Ch Offset Tests (Pass/Fail Limits) screen, 477 Notch Coupl, 207
Adjacent Channel Power screen, 90 clear PTT, 213
Chan global user key assignment, 78 Range Hold, 208
Call Control screen, 120 local user key assignment, 77 RF Chan Std, 209
Chan Space RAM, 493 RF Display, 210
Configure screen, 204 register contents, 72, 493 RF Gen Volts, 210
569

Index
RF In/Out, 211 Cont/Single 321, 325, 329, 330, 340, 343, 370,
RF Level Offset, 211 Oscilloscope screen, 397 372, 378, 379, 434
RF Offset, 212 Continue dc, 292, 294, 302, 306, 315, 316, 320,
RFGen Volts, 50 Tests (Execution Conditions) screen, 321, 325, 329, 330, 340, 343, 370,
RX/TX Cntl, 213 482 372, 378, 379, 398, 434
Serial No., 214 Tests (IBASIC Controller) screen, 491 notch frequency, 207
Time, 50, 214 Tests (Main Menu) screen, 468 CRT VIDEO OUTPUT connector
Total RAM, 214 Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 487 description, 511
User Def Base Freq, 203 continuous digital controlled squelch sys- Current
view of, 202 tem AF Analyzer screen, 99, 106
connect decoder, 226 Duplex Test screen, 289
DUT to test set, 40 encoder, 314 RF Analyzer screen, 424
mobile station to test set for call pro- control RF Generator screen, 436
cessing, 114 characters, 81 RX Test screen, 446
radio to test set, 40 filler, 306 TX TEST screen, 500
Connect annunciator filler message, 177 TX Test screen, 98, 499
Call Bit screen, 164 message, 306 current
Call Control screen, 120 remote, 80 measurement, dc, 98, 106, 289, 424,
Call Data screen, 141 status, 333 436, 446, 499
connectors Control Channel cursor control, 530
10 MHz REF INPUT, 525 Signaling Encoder screen, MPT 1327 CW RF OUT connector
10 MHz REF OUTPUT, 525 mode, 352 description, 512
114.3 MHz IF OUT, 512 control channel
ANT IN, 508 decoder, AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-
AUDIO IN, 509 NTACS, 217
AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT, 510 number, call processing, 120
AUDIO OUT, 510 turning on, 132
cellular adapters, 512 Control Channel, Number
Control I/O, 512 Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS
CRT VIDEO OUTPUT, 511 mode, 329
CW RF OUT, 512 Control Channel, RX Frequency
DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT, Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS-
511 mode, 329
DC INPUT, 512 Control Channel, TX Frequency
DET OUT, 512 Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS-
digital testing, 512 mode, 329
DUPLEX OUT, 513 Control I/O connector
EXT SCOPE TRIGGER, 513 description, 512
HEADPHONE, 513 Controls
HP-IB, 514 Oscilloscope screen, 392
IQ RF IN, 512 Spectrum Analyzer screen, 451
MIC/ACC, 514 counter
MODULATION INPUT, 517 AF, 98
ParallelPort, 517 RF, 423
parts kit, 512 Counter Connection
RADIO INTERFACE, 519 Service screen, 448
RF IN/OUT, 522 coupling
SERIAL PORT, 523 ac, 292, 294, 302, 306, 315, 316, 320,
570

Index
D mode, 315 description, 512

D (direction) Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page DC Level
Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode, mode, 320 AF Analyzer screen, 100, 106
264 Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS Duplex Test screen, 289
dashes mode, 330 RF Analyzer screen, 424
meaning of, ACP level measurement, Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode, RF Generator screen, 436
87 343 RX Test screen, 446
meaning of, squelch, 423 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- TX TEST screen, 500
meaning of, TX power measurement, NTAC mode, 304 TX Test screen, 98, 499
58, 87, 93, 108, 298, 426, 437, 505 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, dc level
Data 371 measurement, 98, 106, 289, 424, 436,
Signaling Decoder screen, EDACS data rate 446, 499
mode, 242 encoder, 313 dc wave
Signaling Decoder screen, LTR mode, Data Spec function generator, 341
251 Call Bit screen, 164 DCFM, 294, 306, 316, 321, 325, 340,
Data (bin) data stream 343, 372, 379, 434
Signaling Decoder screen, CDCSS CDCSS, 318 decimal format, 63
mode, 227 outputting, 316 decoder
Data (hex) outputting digital paging, 323 AMPS-TACS, 217
Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS- rate, 315 CDCSS, 226
TACS mode, 219 data type digital paging, 231
data buffer pager, 232 DTMF, 235
capacity, 220 Date EDACS, 241
Data Display Configure screen, 50, 205 function generator, 247
Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page date and time, 50 input attenuator, 103, 421
mode, 232 dBm LTR, 251
DATA FUNCTIONS keys, 527 displaying results in, 61 MPT 1327, 257
DATA keys dc NAMPS-NTACS, 217
uses for, 526 power, grounding for safety, 511 narrowband, 243
Data Length power, source, 529 NMT, 262
I/O Configure screen, 385 supply, connector, 511 selecting, 216
Data Level dc bias set up for, 216
Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- offsetting, 434 squelch effects, 423
TACS mode, 303 dc coupling, 398 tone sequence, 281
Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- input, 294, 306, 316, 321, 325, 330, wideband, 243
NTAC mode, 303 340, 343, 372, 379, 434 decrement
Data Rate offsetting bias, 434 changing setting, 65
Signaling Decoder screen, CDCSS output, 292, 302, 315, 320, 325, 329, De-Emp Gain
mode, 227 340, 343, 370, 378, 434 AF Analyzer screen, 100
Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page DC Current De-Emphasis
mode, 232 AF Analyzer screen, 99 AF Analyzer screen, 100
Signaling Decoder screen, LTR mode, dc current Duplex Test screen, 292
252 zeroing measurement offset, 99 TX Test screen, 500
Signaling Decoder screen, MPT 1327 DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT con- De-emphasis
mode, 260 nector Analog Meas screen, 193
Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- description, 511 de-emphasis
TACS mode, 304 DC FM zero, 434 bypassing, 100, 292, 500
Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS DC INPUT connector effect on DTMF frequency, 237
571

Index
filter, description, 237 AF Analyzer functional block, 97 Call Control screen, 121
gain, 100 Duplex Test functional block, 287 Display Page
input level, 219, 228, 237, 248, 282 RF Analyzer functional block, 419 Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page
off for digital paging, 233 RF Generator functional block, 431 mode, 232
off for NMT decoder, 265 RX Test functional block, 441 Display Word
selecting, 100, 292, 500 TX Test functional block, 497 Call Data screen, 142
default settings Digital Paging decoder mode Distn
base, 74 AF Anl In, 231 AF Analyzer screen, 106
changing, 73, 74 Arm Meas, 231 Duplex Test screen, 289
power-on, 73 Data Display, 232 RF Analyzer screen, 424
delay Data Rate, 232 RF Generator screen, 436
busy/idle, 303 Display Page, 232 RX Test screen, 446
first bit, 303 Gate Time, 233 TX Test screen, 98, 499
word sync, 303 Input Level, 233 Distortion
Delet Ins Number of Pages, 233 Audio Frequency Analyzer screen, 100
Tests (External Devices) screen, 485 Polarity, 234 RF Analyzer screen, 420
Delet Stp Single/Cont, 234 TX TEST screen, 502
Tests (Order of Tests) screen, 475 Stop Meas, 234 distortion, 60
delete Trig Level, 234 measurement, 98, 106, 289, 424, 436,
global user key assignment, 78 view of, 231 446, 499
local user key assignment, 77 Digital Paging encoder mode measurement, amplifier, 104
RAM contents, 493 AFGen2 To, 320 measurement, variable notch filter, 104
register contents, 72, 493 Audio Out, 320 dotting bits, 306, 308
Delete Ch Bursts, 320 down arrow key, 527
Tests (Channel Information) screen, Data Rate, 320 downloading programs, 276
472 Error Bit, 320 DSAT, 220, 225
depth FM Coupling, 321 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP-
AM, 59 Function, 321 NTAC mode, 304
Description Mssg Length, 321 DST, 220, 225
Tests (Main Menu) screen, 468 Pager Alpha-Numeric Message, 322 DTMF, 220, 225
DET OUT connector Pager Code, 322 DTMF decoder mode
description, 512 Pager Numeric Message, 322 AF Anl In, 235
Detector Pager Type, 322 Arm Meas, 235
AF Analyzer screen, 101 Polarity, 322 Gate Time, 236
Analog Meas screen, 194 Send, 323 Hi Tone, 236
Call Configuration screen, 199 Send Mode, 323 Input Level, 237
Duplex Test screen, 293 Standard, 323 Lo Tone, 238
TX Test screen, 501 Stop, 323 Off Time, 238
detector view of, 319 On Time, 238
peak, 101, 104, 293, 501 digital signaling tone, 220, 225 Single/Cont, 238
rms, 101, 293, 501 digital supervisory audio tone, 220, 225 Stop Meas, 239
selecting, 101, 293, 501 digital test connections, 512 Sym, 239
deviation disarm view of, 235
FM, 59, 102, 294, 420, 502 measurment, 243 DTMF sequence
device-under-test radio interface interrupt, 407 outputting, 326
connecting, 40 disk DTMF Sequence encoder mode
for NMT encoder, 372 procedure location, 470, 480 AFGen2 To, 325
diagram Display Audio Out, 325
572

Index
Bursts, 325 RF Gen Freq, 296 E

FM Coupling, 325 SINAD, 289 EDACS decoder mode
Off Time, 325 SNR, 289 AF Anl In, 241
On Time, 325 Tune Freq, 297 Arm Meas, 242
Pre-Emp, 326 Tune Mode, 297 Data, 242
Send, 326 TX Freq Error, 298 Input Level, 242
Send Mode, 326 TX Frequency, 298 Polarity, 242
Standard, 326 TX Power, 298 Radio/Repeater, 243
Stop, 326 view of, 287 RX Test, 243
Symbol Frequencies (Hz), 326 DUT Single/Cont, 243
Twist, 327 connecting, 40 Standard, 243
view of, 324 definition for NMT, 262 Stop Meas, 243
dual-tone Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, view of, 241
frequency pair, 225, 236, 238 372 EDACS encoder mode
dual-tone multi-frequency AFGen2 To, 329
decoder, 235 Audio Out, 329
encoder, 324 Control Channel, Number, 329
dual-tone multi-frequency tone pair, 225 Control Channel, RX Frequency, 329
dump graphics, 66, 528 Control Channel, TX frequency, 329
DUPLEX key, 528 Data Rate, 330
Duplex Out FM Coupling, 330
Configure screen, 205 Group ID, 330
DUPLEX OUT connector Handshake, 330
avoiding damage, 296, 435, 445, 456 Logical ID, 331
description, 513 Polarity, 331
gain at, 205 RX Test, 331
loss at, 205 Signaling Dev, 332
Duplex Test screen Site ID, 332
AC Level, 287 Standard, 332
AF Anl In, 288 Status, 333
AF Freq, 289 Stop, 333
AFGen1 Freq, 290 Sub-Audible Dev, 333
AFGen1 To, 290 view of, 328
Amplitude, 291 Working Channel, Number, 333
Atten Hold, 291 Working Channel, RX frequency, 333
Audio Out, 292 Working Channel, TX frequency, 333
Current, 289 edit
DC Level, 289 tone sequence, 380
De-emphasis, 292 EEX key, 526
Detector, 293 EIA
Distn, 289 radio standard, 379
Ext TX key, 294 electronic serial number
FM Coupling, 294 decimal, 123
FM Deviation, 294 hexadecimal, 123
functional block diagram, 287 emergency call, 241
IF Filter, 295 emf voltage, 210
Input Port, 295 encoder
Output Port, 296 AMPS-TACS, 301
573

Index
CDSCC, 314 Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode, F

data rate, 313 263 FCC mobile station control word 2
digital paging, 319 exponents order, 180
DTMF, 324 entering numbers, 526 voice channel assignment, 182
EDACS, 328 Ext Load R, 60 FCC mobile station control, word 1, 179
function generator, 339 AF Analyzer screen, 102 FF at End
LTR, 342 effect of Audio In Lo, 102 Print Configure screen, 400
MPT 1327, 350 RX Test screen, 97, 431, 442, 444 Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 487
NAMPS-NTACS, 301 EXT SCOPE TRIGGER connector FF at Start
narrowband, 332 description, 513 Print Configure screen, 400
NMT, 366 Ext TX key Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 487
selecting, 300 Adjacent Channel Power screen, 90 fields
set up for, 300 Duplex Test screen, 294 changing settings, 43
tone sequence, 378 RF Analyzer screen, 420 control channel (FOCC), 301
turning off AF Gen 1, 300 TX Test screen, 502 interactions, 54
wideband, 332 extended address word priority settings, 54
encoder/decoder order, 180 types of, 43
interactions, 313 reverse control channel, 146 voice channel (FVC), 301
enhanced digital access communications voice channel assignment, 182 filename
system external AM procedure to load, 470
decoder, 241 input, 435 procedure to save, 479
encoder, 328 External Disk Specification files
ENTER key, 526 Tests (External Devices) screen, 485 saving, 479
Enter Procedure Filename external FM securing, 493
Tests (Save/Delete Procedure) screen, input, 435 selecting, 470
479 external load resistance, 60, 97, 102, 431, filler data
equivalent front-panel control characters, 442, 444 FOCC, AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-
81 external modulation NTACS, 301
Error Bit input, 435 Filter 1
Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page external monitor, 536 Analog Meas screen, 194
mode, 320 Filter 1 and Filter 2
error detection code AF Analyzer screen, 102
CDCSS encoder, 318 RX Test screen, 445
error message TX Test screen, 502
buffer overflow, 233 Filter 2
error messages, 549 Analog Meas screen, 194
IBASIC, 385 filters
operation, 558 IF bandwidth, 295, 421, 502
ESC characters, 81 IF, for ACP measurements, 92
ESN (dec) selecting, 102, 445, 502
Call Control screen, 123 settings for CDCSS decoder, 230
ESN (hex) variable notch, 104
Call Control screen, 123 Firmware
Euro Configure screen, 205
radio standard, 379 firmware
Exec Execution Cond upgrading, 534
Tests (Main Menu) screen, 468 Firmware revision number
Exit Status Configure screen, 205
574

Index
First Frame data rate, 304 Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq
Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode, filler data, AMPS-TACS/NAMPS- mode, 282
262 NTACS, 301 Freq (marker)
first word of called address, 149 menu, 303 Spectrum Analyzer screen, 460
floating input outputting, 311 Freq Channel Information
at AUDIO IN LO, 99 FOCC message Tests (Main Menu) screen, 469
FM data format, AMPS-TACS/NAMPS- Freq Error
accuracy degradation, 123 NTACS, 301 Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq
deviation, 59 form feed, 400 mode, 282
deviation measurement, 102, 294, 420, forward control channel, 313 Frequency
502 AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTACS, 301 Service screen, 448
deviation, modulation quality, 121 filler data format, AMPS-TACS/ Signaling Decoder screen, Func Gen
input, 435 NAMPS-NTACS, 301 mode, 248
RF generator, 88, 290, 302, 315, 320, message data format, AMPS-TACS/ frequency
325, 329, 340, 343, 368, 378, 432, NAMPS-NTACS, 301 AFGen1, 88, 290, 432, 442, 500
433, 443 modifying messages, 161 AFGen2, 340, 432, 442
FM Coupling turning on, 119, 141, 163 carrier, ACP measurement, 88
Duplex Test screen, 294 forward voice channel, 313 center, for notch filter, 104
RF Generator screen, 434 AMPS-TACS, 301 center, for spectrum analyzer, 453
Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- message data format, AMPS-TACS, center, RF signal, 92, 297, 425, 504
TACS mode, 306 301 decoded signal, 248
Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS message data format, NAMPS- effects of RF offset, 212
mode, 316 NTACS, 301 for DTMF sequence, 326
Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page modifying messages, 161 for tonesequence, 380
mode, 321 NAMPS-NTACS, 301 measurement, 93, 107, 298, 425, 437,
Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF four dashes 505
mode, 325 meaning of, ACP level measurement, offset RF generator/analyzer, 206
Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS 87 range, for DTMF decoder, 240
mode, 330 meaning of, AF frequency, 119 RF generator, 445
Signaling Encoder screen, Func Gen meaning of, FM deviation, 123 RF generator, reference, 203
mode, 340 meaning of, squelch, 423 setting, 210, 296, 435
Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode, meaning of, TX frequency error, 128 span, 454
343 meaning of, TX power measurement, spectrum analyzer, 460
Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- 58, 87, 93, 108, 298, 426, 437, 505 symbol, 282
NTAC mode, 306 Frame Digits transmitter, 58
Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode, tuning, 92, 297, 425, 504
372 264 frequency error
Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq frames measurement, 93, 107, 298, 425, 437,
mode, 379 definition for NMT, 262 505
FM Deviation NMT information, 264 modulation quality, 121
AF Analyzer screen, 102 suffixes, 271 symbol, 282
Analog Meas screen, 194 Free 1 transmitter, 58
Call Control screen, 123 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode, frequency offset, 79
Duplex Test screen, 294 344 tracking generator, 458
RF Analyzer screen, 420 Free 2 frequency pair
TX Test screen, 502 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode, DTMF, high tone, 236
FOCC 344 DTMF, low, 225, 238
AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTACS, 301 Freq Function
575

Index
Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page G frequency, 296, 445

mode, 321 gain output port, 296, 445, 456, 458
function generator automatic control, 103 reference frequency, 203
waveform, 341 between ANT IN and device-under- generator, tracking
Function Generator decoder mode test, 202 amplitude, 457
AF Anl In, 247 between DUPLEX OUT and device- frequency, 453
Arm Meas, 248 under-test, 205 frequency offset, 458
Frequency, 248 between RF IN/OUT and device-un- output port, 458
Gate Time, 248 der-test, 211 RF offset, 457
Input Level, 248 de-emphasis, 100 sweep, 458
Single/Cont, 249 input, 103 sweep frequency range, 454
Stop Meas, 249 manual control, 103 use with spectrum analyzer, 457
Trig Level, 249 notch filter, 104 Golay sequential code, 323
view of, 247 Gain Cntl Goto 1
Function Generator encoder mode AF Analyzer screen, 103 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode,
AFGen2 Freq, 340 Gate Time 344
AFGen2 To, 340 Service screen, 448 Goto 2
Audio Out, 340 Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS- Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode,
FM Coupling, 340 TACS mode, 219 344
Sine Units, 340 Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page grounded input
view of, 339 mode, 233 at AUDIO IN LO, 99
Waveform, 341 Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF grounding, 511
functional diagram mode, 236 group call, 241
AF Analyzer, 97 Signaling Decoder screen, Func Gen Group ID
Duplex Test screen, 287 mode, 248 Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS
RF Analyzer, 419 Signaling Decoder screen, LTR mode, mode, 330
RF Generator, 431 252 GSC
RX Test, 441 Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS- data rates, 320
TX Test, 497 NTACS mode, 219 radio standard, 323
functional test Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq
for verifying operation, 46 mode, 282
FVC gate time, 98
AMPS-TACS, 301 decoder, 219, 233, 236, 248, 252, 282
data rate, 304 RF counter, 423
menu, 303 Gaussian noise
NAMPS-NTACS, 301 function generator, 341
outputting, 311 generator
FVC message CDCSS, 314
data format, AMPS-TACS, 301 DTMF, 324
data format, NAMPS-NTACS, 301 tone sequence, 378
FVC mobile station control message generator, AF
order, 183 amplitude, 88, 290, 302, 315, 320, 325,
voice channel assignment, 185 329, 340, 343, 368, 378, 432, 433,
443
frequency, 88, 290, 340, 432, 442, 500
level, 500
generator, RF
amplitude, 291, 444
576

Index
H HP-IB control, 80 I
Handoff HP-IB operation I/O Config
Call Control screen, 123, 142, 165 squelch effects, 424 Radio Interface screen, 408
handoff hum and noise I/O Configure screen
mobile station to new voice channel, measuring, 197 Data Length, 385
135 HP-IB Address, 385
Handshake IBASIC Echo, 385
Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS Inst Echo, 385
mode, 330 Mode, 386
hardware Parity, 386
modifications, 532 Rcv Pace, 386
heading Save/Recall, 387
for printout, 401, 488 Serial Baud, 387
HEADPHONE connector Serial In, 388
description, 513 Stop Length, 388
HELP key, 528 view of, 384
Help screen Xmt Pace, 388
view of, 382 IB_UTIL, 493
hexadecimal format, 64 IBASIC controller
hexadecimal numbers configuring, 388
for tone sequence, 380 IBASIC Echo
HI indicator, 67 I/O Configure screen, 385
HI LIMIT key, 527 IBASIC error messages, 385
Hi Tone IBASIC IBASIC Cntrl
Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF Tests (Main Menu) screen, 469
mode, 236 IBASIC programs
high limit running, 80
removing, 68 ID 1
setting, 67 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode,
Hold All 344
Range Hold, 208 ID 2
HOLD key, 528 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode,
Home 1 344
Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode, identification
344 base station, 370
Home 2 mobile station, 124
Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode, mobile station subscriber, 373
344 mobile telephone exchange, 369
horizontal sweep octal code for radio, 315
oscilloscope, 393 subscriber identity security challenge,
HP-IB 374
address, external devices, 485 subscriber identity security response,
address, printer, 401, 489 374
address, test set, 385, 528 idle
HP-IB Address state, 303
I/O Configure screen, 385 status, 333
HP-IB connector IF Filter
description, 514 Duplex Test screen, 295
577

Index
RF Analyzer screen, 421 AF Analyzer screen, 103 NAMPS-NTACS, 222, 313

TX Test screen, 502 input impedance endcoder and decoder radio standards,
IF filter bandwidth selecting, 509 282
selecting, 295, 421, 502 Input Level high-power/low-power measurements,
If Unit-Under-Test Fails Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS- 94, 506
Tests (Execution Conditions) screen, TACS mode, 219 Range Hold and other fields, 208
482 Signaling Decoder screen, CDCSS RF generator/analyzer, RF offset, 212
impedance mode, 228 RX/TX screen automatic changes, 213
input, 509 Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page spectrum analyzer with RF generator,
input, for call processing, 116 mode, 233 455
output, for call processing, 116 Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF spectrum analyzer with tracking gener-
INCR SET key, 527 mode, 237 ator, 457
increment Signaling Decoder screen, EDACS twist and pre-emphasis, 327
changing setting, 65 mode, 242 interference
indicators Signaling Decoder screen, Func Gen co-channel, 369
oscilloscope input, 398 mode, 248 Internal
status, 317 Signaling Decoder screen, LTR Seq Oscilloscope screen, 396
individual call, 241 mode, 252 internal clock
information bits, 306, 308 Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS- date, 205
input NTACS mode, 219 Interrupt 1
AF analyzer, 218, 226, 231, 235, 241, Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode, Radio Interface screen, 407
247, 251, 263, 281 265 inverted data, 220, 228, 234, 253, 310,
analyzer, 454 Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq 316, 322, 331, 344
audio, 600 ohm impedance, 99 mode, 282 IQ RF IN connector
audio, floating, 99 Input Port description, 512
audio, grounded, 99 Adjacent Channel Power screen, 91
configuring, radio interface, 408 Duplex Test screen, 295
coupling, 294, 306, 316, 321, 325, 330, RF Analyzer screen, 422
340, 343, 372, 379, 434 TX Test screen, 503
gain, 103 Insert Ch
oscilloscope, 398 Tests (Channel Information) screen,
RF, 91, 295, 422, 503 472
spectrum analyzer, 454 Insrt Stp
types of, 97, 288, 498 Tests (External Devices) screen, 485
Input Atten Tests (Order of Tests) screen, 475
Adjacent Channel Power screen, 90 Inst Echo
RF Analyzer screen, 421 I/O Configure screen, 385
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 461 Inst#
input attenuation, 461 Tests (External Devices) screen, 486
automatic control, 90, 421, 461 INSTRUMENT STATE Keys, 528
manual control, 90, 421, 461 Intensity
setting, 90, 421 Configure screen, 50, 207
input attenuator intensity
decoder interference, 103, 421 setting, 50
oscilloscope interference, 103, 421 interactions
Input Data between fields, 54
Radio Interface screen, 406 between screens, 54
Input Gain encoder/decoder, AMPS-TACS/
578

Index
J K CURSOR CONTROL, 530

JTACS k1 through k5, 75 SQUELCH, 530
radio standard, 312 k1’ through k3’, 75 VOLUME, 530
simulated system, 128 key sequences
for front-panel controls, 81, 82
keyboard
external, 388
keying
effect on amplitude, 291, 433, 444, 455,
457
external transmitter, 90, 294, 420, 502
keys
$Leftarrow$, 529
ADRS, 528
backspace, 529
CANCEL, 529
CONFIG, 528
DATA, 526
DATA FUNCTIONS, 527
DUPLEX, 528
EEX, 526
ENTER, 526
front-panel, 526
HELP, 528
HI LIMIT, 527
HOLD, 528
INCR SET, 527
LO LIMIT, 527
LOCAL, 528
MEAS RESET, 528
MSSG, 528
NO, 526
ON/OFF, 526
POWER, 529
PRESET, 528
PREV, 528
PRINT, 528
RECALL, 528
REF SET, 527
RX, 528
SAVE, 528
SCREEN CONTROL, 528
SHIFT, 529
TESTS, 528
TX, 528
unit-of-measure, 526
YES, 526
knob
579

Index
L Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS ID 1, 344

Latch mode, 331 ID 2, 344
Service screen, 448 loss LTR message, 344
leakage between ANT IN and device-under- Polarity, 344
ACP measurement, 92 test, 202 Send, 344
left arrow key, 529 between DUPLEX OUT and device- Send Mode, 345
level under-test, 205 Standard, 345
ac, 59 between RF IN/OUT and device-un- Stop, 345
ACP, 87 der-test, 211 view of, 342
AF analyzer, 219, 228, 233, 237, 242, Low Battery LTR message
248, 252, 265, 282 Configure screen, 51 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode,
AF generator 1, 500 low battery setting, 51 344
data, 303 low limit LTR tests
oscilloscope, 395 removing, 68 setup, 255
reference for spectrum analyzer, 453 setting, 67 Lvl (marker)
spectrum analyzer, 460 Lower Limit Oscilloscope screen, 395
supervisory audio tone, 311 Tests (Pass/Fail Limits) screen, 477 Spectrum Analyzer, 460
triggering, 221, 229, 234, 249, 254, low-level RF power measurements, 93, LVL_MTR, 492
266, 283 108, 295, 298, 422, 426, 437, 503,
Level (div) 505
Oscilloscope screen, 397 LTR
Library radio standard, 345
Tests (Main Menu) screen, 469 LTR decoder mode
limits AF Anl In, 251
example, 68 Arm Meas, 251
indicators, 67 Data, 251
pass/fail, 67 Data Rate, 252
removing, 68 Gate Time, 252
setting, 67 Input Level, 252
Lines/Page Polarity, 253
Print Configure screen, 401 Single/Cont, 254
Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 488 Stop Meas, 254
LO indicator, 67 Trig Level, 254
LO LIMIT key, 527 view of, 251
Lo Tone LTR encoder mode
Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF AFGen2 To, 343
mode, 238 Area 1, 343
load Area 2, 343
external resistance, 60, 97, 102, 431, Audio Out, 343
442, 444 Bursts, 343
Load Test Data Rate, 343
Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode, FM Coupling, 343
265 Free 1, 344
LOCAL key, 528 Free 2, 344
logic trunked radio Goto 1, 344
decoder, 251 Goto 2, 344
encoder, 342 Home 1, 344
Logical ID Home 2, 344
580

Index
M measurement frequency, DTMF, 236

Main Menu accuracy, gain control for, 103 frequency, transmitter, 93, 107, 298,
Tests (Channel Information) screen, accuracy, zeroing for, 99 425, 437, 505
472, 473 accuracy, zeroing power for, 94, 427, hum and noise, 197
Tests (Execution Conditions) screen, 506 LTR data rate, 252
482 arming, analyzer, 221, 229, 234, 238, mobile station receiver, 338
Tests (External Devices) screen, 486 243, 249, 254, 266, 283 NMT data rate, 371
Tests (IBASIC Controller) screen, 491 averaging, 69 RECC, AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-
Tests (Order of Tests) screen, 475 disarming, analyzer, 243 NTACS, 224
Tests (Pass/Fail Limits) screen, 477 limit indicators, 67 RF, 58
Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 488 removing limits, 68 RF power, 93, 108, 298, 426, 437, 505
Tests (Save/Delete Procedure) screen, saving and recalling setups, 71 RF sensitivity, 196
479 setting a reference, 70 rms potential, 97, 431, 442
main traffic area, 376 setting limits, 67 RVC, AMPS-TACS, 224
main traffic channel settling, 105 RVC, NAMPS-NTACS, 225
number, 377 speed, ACP measurement, 92 signal/noise ratio, 60, 98, 106, 289,
power, 377 stopping, analyzer, 254 424, 436, 446, 499
manual tuning, 92, 297, 425, 504 units, 61 SINAD, 60, 98, 106, 289, 348, 424,
manuals, 537 measurements 436, 446, 499
marker ac level, 59, 97, 287, 419, 431, 442 SNR, 60, 98, 106, 289, 424, 436, 446,
spectrum analyzer, position, 459 ac level, peak detector, 104 499
Marker To ACP reference, 88 stopping analyzer, 221, 229, 234, 239,
Oscilloscope screen, 394 adjacent channel power, 86, 87 243, 249, 283
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 459 AF power, 60 transmitter frequency, 58
markers AM depth, 59 transmitter frequency error, 58
frequency, 460 arming decoder, 218, 227, 231, 235, transmitter power, 58, 93, 108, 298,
level, 395, 460 242, 248, 251, 281 426, 437, 505
oscilloscope, 394 audio frequency, 59, 98, 106, 289, 424, voltage, 97, 431, 442
oscilloscope, peak+, 394 436, 446, 499 memory
spectrum analyzer, 459 audio power, 97, 431, 442 cards, 80
spectrum analyzer, center frequency, beat frequency, 62 considerations, 74
459 CDCSS code word, 227 total RAM, 214
spectrum analyzer, peak, 459 CDCSS data rate, 227 memory overflow error, 74
spectrum analyzer, reference level, 459 CDCSS, 23-bit sequence, 227 Message
time, 395 current, dc, 98, 106, 289, 424, 436, 446, Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS-
triggering, 395 499 TACS mode, 307, 308
mass storage dc level, 98, 106, 289, 424, 436, 446, Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP-
loading NMT test from, 265 499 NTAC mode, 307, 309
Meas Ch # decoded frequency, 248 message
Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, digital paging data rate, 232 abbreviated address word, 179
372 distortion, 60, 98, 106, 289, 424, 436, access, 171
Meas Field Strength 446, 499 access type parameters global action,
Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, DTMF decoder limits, 240 171
373 EDACS transmitter, 246 beeper alert, 204
MEAS RESET key, 528 FM deviation, 59, 102, 294, 420, 502 C-FILMESS, 177
Measure frequency error, DTMF, 236 changing contents, 190
Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS- frequency error, transmitter, 93, 107, control filler, 177
NTACS mode, 220 298, 425, 437, 505 detection, 260
581

Index
digital paging, 321 to view, from mobile station handoff, decoding LTR data, 255
error, 549 156 mobile station
error, buffer overflow, 233 to view, from mobile station origina- connecting to test set, 336
extended address word, order, 180 tion, 160 contol channel, 337
extended address word, voice channel to view, from mobile station page, 154 receiver test procedure, 336
assignment, 182 to view, from mobile station registra- receiver testing, 335
FCC mobile station control, word 1, tion, 153 transmitter testing, 335
179 to view, from mobile station release, mobile subscriber number, 373
FCC mobile station control, word 2, or- 158 Mod In To
der, 180 to view, from order to change TX pow- RF Generator screen, 435
FCC mobile station control, word 2, er of mobile, 159 Mode
voice channel assignment, 182 types of, 549 I/O Configure screen, 386
FOCC, AMPS-TACS/NAMPS- Message 1 Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS-
NTACS, 301 LTR encoder, 342 TACS, 217
FVC mobile station control, order, 183 Message 2 Signaling Decoder screen, CDCSS,
FVC mobile station control, voice LTR encoder, 342 226
channel assignment, 185 Message screen Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page,
FVC O Mes, 183 view of, 390 231
FVC V Mes, 185 Message/DST Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF, 235
FVC, AMPS-TACS, 301 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- Signaling Decoder screen, EDACS,
FVC, NAMPS-NTACS, 301 NTAC mode, 310 241
IBASIC error, 385 METER, 527 Signaling Decoder screen, Func Gen,
MS IntVCh, 182 meter 247
MS WORD1, 179 analog, 62 Signaling Decoder screen, LTR, 251
MSMessOrd, 180 changing display, 62 Signaling Decoder screen, MPT 1327,
operation, 558 changing settings, 62 257
output, FOCC, 311 dc current, 511 Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS-
output, FVC, 311 signal strength, 492 NTACS, 217
query, 260 Mgmt/Maint Signaling Decoder screen, NMT, 262
RECCW A, 144 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq,
RECCW B, 146 373 281
RECCW C, 148 Mic Pre-Emp Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS-
RECCW D, 149 RF Generator screen, 434 TACS mode, 301
RECCW E, 150 MIC/ACC connector Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS, 314
REG ID, 175 description, 514 Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page,
REG INC, 173 for keying external transmitter, 90, 294, 319
registration identification message, 175 420, 502 Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF, 324
registration increment global action, dB, 61 Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS,
173 pre-emphasis 328
reverse control channel, 144 750, 326, 379 Signaling Encoder screen, Func Gen,
reverse voice channel, 144 microphone, 291, 433 339
RVCOrdCon, 151 keying, 444, 455, 457 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR, 342
SPC Word 1, 167 pre-emphasis, 434 Signaling Encoder screen, MPT 1327,
SPC Word 2, 169 push-to-talk, 213 350
system parameter overhead, word 1, use of, 515 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMPS-
167 MIN NTACS mode, 301
system parameter overhead, word 2, MS id, 124 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT, 366
169 mobile radio Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq,
582

Index
378 System Identity, 363 N

Model Test Mode, 352 names
Print Configure screen, 66, 401 Traffic Chan. Msg., 359 printout, 401, 488
Tests (External Devices) screen, 486 Traffic Channel, 353 registers, 73
Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 488 undisplayed controls, 353 NAMPS-NTACS
modifications view of, 350 control channel decoder, 217
hardware, 532 MPT 1327 tests forward control channel, 301
modulation manual, 258 forward voice channel, 301
AM, 88, 290, 302, 315, 320, 325, 329, MS radio standard, 312
340, 343, 368, 378, 432, 433, 443 definition, 262 reverse control channel, 222
carrier, ACP reference measurement, MS Id reverse voice channel, 222
88 Call Control screen, 124 voice channel decoder, 217
external AM, 435 MSN NAMPS-NTACS decoder mode
external, FM, 435 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, AF Anl In, 218
external, input, 435 373 Arm Meas, 218
FM, 88, 290, 302, 315, 320, 325, 329, MSSG key, 528 Channel, 218
340, 343, 368, 378, 432, 433, 443 Mssg Length Gate Time, 219
input, 435 Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page Input Level, 219
input, coupling, 294, 306, 316, 321, mode, 321 Measure, 220
325, 330, 340, 343, 372, 379, 434 MTX Num of Bits, 220
LTR encoder, 344 definition, 262 Polarity, 220
sensitivity, input, 435 mW (milliwatt) RECC Data, 220
turning off, 333 displaying results in, 61 Single/Cont, 221
MODULATION INPUT connector Stop Meas, 221
coupling, 294, 306, 316, 321, 325, 330, Trig Level, 221
340, 343, 372, 379, 434 Trigger Pattern (bin), 221
description, 517 view of, 217
for modulating RF generator, 435 NAMPS-NTACS encoder mode
modulation quality AFGen2 To, 302, 305, 311
AF frequency, 121 Audio Out, 302
FM deviation, 121 B/I Delay, 303
transmitter frequency error, 121 Bursts, 303
transmitter power, 121 Busy/Idle, 303
monitor Channel, 303
external, 536 Data Level, 303
MPT 1327 decoder mode Data Rate, 304
Data Rate, 260 DSAT, 304
Timing, 260 FM Coupling, 306
view of, 257 Message, 307, 309
MPT 1327 encoder mode Message/DST, 310
Address Qualifier, 350 Polarity, 310
Aloha Number, 351 Send, 311
Control Channel, 352 Send DSAT, 311
Delay Parameter, 353 Send Mode, 312
FCC Msg and Buffers, 354 Standard, 312
Msg Structures, 360 Stop, 312
Radio Unit Under Test, 364 Stop DSAT, 312
Simulated Calling Unit, 365 Stop Filler, 312
583

Index
view of, 301 AFGen2 To, 368 Spectrum Analyzer screen, 463
narrowband Alarm Level High, 369 Nordic mobile telephone
decoder, signaling standard, 243 Alarm Level Low, 369 decoder, 262
encoder, signaling standard, 332 Area #, 369 encoder, 366
for 900 MHz system, 330 Audio Out, 370 Normalize
narrow-band advanced mobile phone ser- basic operation, 268 Spectrum Analyzer screen, 462
vice Batt Save, 370 Notch Coupl
decoder, 217 BS Identity, 370 Configure screen, 207
narrowband advanced mobile phone ser- Calling Channel Number, 371 used with variable notch, 104
vice Data Rate, 371 notch filter
encoder, 301 DUT, 372 gain, 104
narrow-band total access communication FM Coupling, 372 variable, 104
system Meas Ch #, 372 Notch Freq
decoder, 217 Meas Field Strength, 373 AF Analyzer screen, 104
narrowband total access communication Mgmt/Maint, 373 Notch Gain
system MSN, 373 AF Analyzer screen, 104
encoder, 301 Password, 374 NPC
NATEL Phi Signal, 373 defined, 227
radio standard, 379 Pre-Emp, 374 Num
negative edge SIS Challenge, 374 Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode,
triggering, 397 SIS Response, 374 264
newlink ampolarity, 310 Standard, 375 Num of Bits
NMT TCI, 375 Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS-
radio standard, 266, 375 Traffic Area, Alt, 375 TACS mode, 220
NMT decoder mode Traffic Area, Main, 376 Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS-
AF Anl In, 263 Traffic Channel (Alt), Number, 376 NTACS mode, 220
basic operation, 268 Traffic Channel (Alt), Power, 376 Number of Pages
D (direction), 264 Traffic Channel (Main), Number, 377 Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page
Exit Status, 263 Traffic Channel (Main), Power, 377 mode, 233
First Frame, 262 view of, 366 numbers
Frame Digits, 264 NMT tests changing, 63
Input Level, 265 base station, 267 decimal format, 63
Load Test, 265 creating, 272 entering, 63
Num, 264 manual, 269 hexadecimal format, 64
Run Test, 266 mobile station, 267 scientific notation, 526
Single/Cont, 266 mobile telephone exchange, 267 numeric entries, 63
Standard, 266 programming, 272
Stop Test, 266 programming commands, 277
Time, 264 programming example, 274, 275
Trig Level, 266 programming file format, 272
Type, 264 required settings, 270
view of, 262 saving, 273
NMT ENCODER stopping, 266
Calling Channel Power, 371 terms and abbreviations, 262
NMT encoder mode using external computer, 275
Access Channel Number, 367 using RAM, 273
Access Channel Power, 367 NO key, 526
Add Info, 367 No Pk/Avg
584

Index
O input attenuator, 103, 421 Spectrum Analyzer screen, 456

octal code level, markers, 395 Output Results For
for CDCSS encoder, 315 marker types, 394 Tests (Execution Conditions) screen,
Off Time markers, level, 395 483
Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF resolution, 105 Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 488
mode, 238 scale, 394 Output Results To
Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq signal source, 105 Tests (Execution Conditions) screen,
mode, 283 squelch effects, 423 482
Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF triggering display, 397 Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 488
mode, 325 Oscilloscope screen overpower
Tone Sequence encoder, 380 Auto/Norm, 396 at ANT IN, 58, 508
offset Cont/Single, 397 at RF IN/OUT connector, 91, 295, 422,
example, 79 Controls, 392 503
for dc bias, 434 Internal, 396 damage, 40
frequency, RF generator/analyzer, 206 Level (div), 397 damage, at ANT IN connector, 91, 108,
frequency, tracking generator, 458 Lvl (marker), 395 295, 298, 422, 426, 454, 503, 505
measurement, zeroing, 99 Main menu, 393 damage, at DUPLEX OUT, 296, 435,
RF generator/analyzer, 212 Marker menu, 394 445, 456
RF level, 211 Marker To, 394 warning, 91, 295, 422, 503
setting, frequency, 79 Position, 394 overview of operation, 53
tracking generator, 457 Pre-Trig, 397
vertical, oscilloscope, 393, 395 Time (marker), 395
Offset Freq (Tracking Gen) Time/div, 393
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 458 Trigger menu, 396
off-the-air measurements, 91, 295, 422, Vert Offset, 393
503, 508 Vert/div, 393
On Time view of, 392
Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF output
mode, 238 coupling, 292, 302, 315, 320, 325, 329,
Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq 340, 343, 370, 378, 434
mode, 283 data stream, 316
Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF data, radio interface, 408
mode, 325 digital paging data stream, 323
tone sequence, 380 F0CC, 311
ON/OFF key, 526 FVC, 311
operating basics, 53 RF, 296, 435, 445, 456, 458
operation messages, 558 tone sequence, 326, 379
Options tracking generator, 458
Tests (External Devices) screen, 486 Output Data
options Radio Interface screen, 408
adding, 532 Output Heading
Order Tests (Execution Conditions) screen,
Call Control screen, 125 482
Call Data screen, 142, 165 Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 488
origination, call, 137 Output Port
oscilloscope Duplex Test screen, 296
display, 394 RF Generator screen, 435
input, 398 RX Test screen, 445
585

Index
P password, 493 344

Page peak Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP-
Call Control screen, 125 hold, spectrum analyzer, 463 NTAC mode, 310
Call Data screen, 142, 166 spectrum analyzer marker, 459 polarity
page units, 340, 433, 443 radio interface strobe, 408
selecting, 232 peak detector, 101, 104, 293, 501 Port/Sweep (Tracking Gen)
Page annunciator signal source, 104 Spectrum Analyzer screen, 458
Call Control screen, 126 peak+ Position
Call Data screen, 142, 166 oscilloscope marker, 394 Oscilloscope screen, 394
pager Phi Signal Spectrum Analyzer screen, 459
address, 232 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, positive edge
alpha-numeric format, 322 373 triggering, 397
code (address), 232 Phone Num power
data type, 232 Call Control screen, 126 access channel, NMT encoder, 367
numeric format, 322 phone number AF, 60
signal type, 232 called by mobile, 120 mobile station output, 125
testing, 231, 319 MS Id, 124 transmitter, 58
tone-only format, 322 Phone numbers zero reference, 94, 427, 506
Pager Alpha-Numeric Message customer support, 9 power cables, 539
Signaling Encoder screen, DigiPage Pk Det To POWER key, 529
mode, 322 AF Analyzer screen, 104 power meter
Pager Code Pk Hold zeroing, 94, 427, 506
Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page Spectrum Analyzer screen, 463 power source
mode, 322 POCSAG ac, 529
Pager Numeric Message data rates, 320 dc, 529
Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page- radio standard, 323 power switch, 529
mode, 322 Polarity power-on settings
Pager Type Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS- changing, 73
Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page TACS mode, 220 Pre-Emp
mode, 322 Signaling Decoder screen, CDCSS Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF
paging mode, 228 mode, 326
mobile station, 133 Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode,
Parallel Data In mode, 234 374
Radio Interface screen, 408 Signaling Decoder screen, EDACS Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq
Parallel Port connector mode, 242 mode, 379
description, 517 Signaling Decoder screen, LTR mode, pre-emphasis
Parity 253 automatic control, 434
I/O Configure screen, 386 Signaling Decoder screen, NAMP- bypassing, 326, 379, 434
parity bits, 306, 308, 309 NTAC mode, 220 manual control, 434
Parm Test Parameters Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- microphone, 434
Tests (Main Menu) screen, 469 TACS mode, 310 NMT encoder, 374
Pass Word Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS tone sequence encoder, 326, 379
Tests (Save/Delete Procedure) screen, mode, 316 PRESET key, 528
479 Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page preset state
pass/fail limits, 67 mode, 322 changing, 74
Password Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS default, 74
Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, mode, 331 Pre-Trig
374 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode, Oscilloscope screen, 397
586

Index
PREV key, 528 292, 293, 424, 432, 433, 436, 443, R
print 444, 446, 455, 498, 499, 500, 501 radio
screens, 66, 528 Proc Save/Delete Procedure connecting, 40
Print All Tests (Main Menu) screen, 470 LTR trunking data, 253
Tests (Channel Information) screen, Procedure Library test software, 538
472, 473 Tests (Save/Delete Procedure) screen, Radio Frequency Analyzer screen
Tests (External Devices) screen, 486 480 AC Level, 419
Tests (Order of Tests) screen, 475 Program RADIO INTERFACE connector
Tests (Pass/Fail Limits) screen, 477 Tests (Main Menu) screen, 470 description, 519
Print Configure screen Programmer’s Guide, 80 Radio Interface screen
Abort Print, 400 programming I/O Config, 408
FF at End, 400 downloading, 276 Input Data, 406
FF at Start, 400 NMT tests, 272 Interrupt 1, 407
Lines/Page, 401 programming example Output Data, 408
Model, 66, 401 NMT test, external controller, 275 Parallel Data In, 408
Print Data Destination, 401 NMT test, internal controller, 274 Send data, 408
Print Title, 66, 401 programs Strobe Pol, 408
Printer Address, 66, 401 language, 466 view of, 406
Printer Port, 66, 401 running from memory card, 80 Radio Repeater
settings, 66 PTT Signaling Decoder screen, EDACS
view of, 400 Configure screen, 213 mode, 243
Print Data Destination push to talk, 213 radio standard
Print Configure screen, 401 Pwr Lvl AMPS, 217, 301
PRINT key, 528 Call Control screen, 125 AMPS-TACS, 312
Print Printer Setup Bell, 326
Tests (Main Menu) screen, 469 CCIR1, 379
Print Title CCIR2, 379
Print Configure screen, 66, 401 CCITT, 379
printer CDCSS, 317
connecting, 401, 489 DTMF, 326
model, 401, 488 EDACS, 4800, 243, 332
Printer Address EDACS, 9600, 243, 332
Print Configure screen, 66, 401 EEA, 379
Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 489 EIA, 379
Printer Port European, 379
Print Configure screen, 66, 401 GSC, 323
Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 489 JTACS, 217, 301, 312
printing LTR, 345
aborting, 400 NAMPS, 217, 301
form feed, 400, 487 NAMPS-NTACS, 312
lines per page, 401, 488 NATEL, 379
printer address, 401, 489 NMT, 266, 375
printer model, 401, 488 NMT, STD450, 269, 375
screens, 399 NMT, STD900, 269, 375
selecting printer port, 401 NTACS, 217, 301
title, 401, 488 POCSAG, 323
priority fields, 56, 88, 97, 98, 106, 218, TACS, 217, 301
235, 247, 281, 288, 289, 290, 291, tone sequence, 379
587

Index
ZVEI1, 379 receive pace, 386 Res BW

ZVEI2, 379 Ref indicator, 70 Adjacent Channel Power screen, 92
Radio Unit Under Test Ref Level resolution
Signaling Encoder screen, MPT 1327 Spectrum Analyzer screen, 453 bandwidth, ACP measurement, 92
mode, 364 REF SET, 70 bandwidth, spectrum analyzer, 464
RAM REF SET key, 527 oscilloscope, 105
for NMT decoder tests, 273 reference response timing
procedure location, 470, 480 carrier, ACP, 88 MPT 1327 decoder, 261
total available, 214 external input, 525 reverse control channel, 313
RAM Initialize external output, 525 AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTACS, 222
Service screen, 449 frequency, ACP measurement, 88 data, 121
RAM_MNG, 493 level, spectrum analyzer, 453 decoding, AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-
ramp wave setting, 70, 395 NTACS, 218
function generator, 341 transmitter power, zero, 94, 427, 506 measurements, AMPS-TACS/
Range Hold Register NAMPS-NTACS, 224
Configure screen, 208 Call Control screen, 126 message viewing, 142
Rcv Pace Call Data screen, 143, 166 reverse RF power, 296, 435, 445, 456
I/O Configure screen, 386 Register annunciator reverse voice channel, 313
recall Call Control screen, 126 AMPS-TACS, 222
example, 72 Call Data screen, 143, 166 data, 121
instrument setups, 71 registers decoding, AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-
saved register with hardware change, clearing, 72 NTACS, 218
74 naming, 73 DSAT, NAMPS-NTACS, 220
settings, 71 registration DST, NAMPS-NTACS, 220
RECALL key, 528 of mobile station, 132 DTMF, NAMPS-NTACS, 220
using, 71 registration identification message, 175 measurements, AMPS-TACS, 224
RECC registration increment global action mes- measurements, NAMPS-NTACS, 225
AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTACS, 222 sage, 173 message viewing, 142
measurements, AMPS-TACS/ RELEASE, 77, 78 NAMPS-NTACS, 222
NAMPS-NTACS, 224 Release order confirmation message, 151
RECC Data Call Control screen, 126 revision number
Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS- Call Data screen, 143, 166 firmware, 205
NTACS mode, 220 release RF Analyzer screen
RECCW A global user key assignment, 78 AC Level, 419
CALLP, 140 local user key assignment, 77 Current, 424
messages, 144 mobile station, 135 DC Level, 424
RECCW B remote control, 80 Distn, 424
CALLP, 140 remote operation, 80 Distortion, 420
messages, 146 mode, 386 Ext TX key, 420
RECCW C squelch effects, 424 FM Deviation, 420
CALLP, 140 remove functional block diagram, 419
messages, 148 register contents, 72 IF Filter, 421
RECCW D remove high/low limits, 68 Input Atten, 421
CALLP, 140 remove pass/fail limits, 68 Input Port, 422
messages, 149 repeater RF Cnt Gate, 423
RECCW E decoding LTR data, 256 Sensitivity, 423
CALLP, 140 LTR system, 253 SINAD, 424
messages, 150 simulating, EDACS, 328 SNR, 424
588

Index
Squelch, 423 Mod In To, 435 RF voltage

Tune Freq, 425 Output Port, 435 setting, 50
Tune Mode, 425 RF Gen Freq, 435 RFGen Volts
TX Freq Error, 425 SINAD, 436 Configure Screen, 50
TX Frequency, 425 SNR, 436 rms
TX Power, 426 TX Freq Error, 437 dectector, 101, 293, 501
TX Pwr Meas (HP 8920B), 427 TX Frequency, 437 measurement, 97, 431, 442
TX Pwr Zero, 427 TX Power, 437 units, 340, 433, 443
view of, 419 view of, 431 ROM
RF auto-tuning, 92, 297, 425, 504 RF In/Ant procedure location, 470, 480
RF Chan Std Spectrum Analyzer screen, 454 ROM program
Configure screen, 209 RF In/Out IB_UTIL, 493
RF Cnt Gate Configure screen, 211 ROMprogram
RF Analyzer screen, 423 RF IN/OUT connector RAM_MNG, 493
RF counter connecting to, 40 Run
sampling, 423 description, 522 Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 491
RF Display for ACP level measurements, 87, 91 Run Test
Configure screen, 210 for ACP ratio measurements, 87 Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode,
RF Gen Freq for measuring high-power devices, 458 266
Duplex Test screen, 296 for measuring transmitter power, 91, Tests (Execution Conditions) screen,
RF Generator screen, 435 108, 295, 298, 422, 426, 437, 503, 483
RX Test screen, 445 505 Tests (Main Menu) screen, 470
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 456 for RF measurements, 91, 295, 422, Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 489
RF Gen Volts 503 RVC
Configure screen, 210 for testing tranceivers, 456 AMPS-TACS, 222
RF generator for testing transceivers, 296, 435, 445 measurements, AMPS-TACS, 224
amplitude, 291, 433, 444, 455 gain at, 211 measurements, NAMPS-NTACS, 225
frequency, 296, 435, 445 input attenuation, 90, 421, 461 NAMPS-NTACS, 222
microphone modulation, 515 loss at, 211 RVCOrdCon
output, 435, 445, 458 power measured at, 93, 108, 298, 426, CALLP, 140
output port, 296, 435, 456 437, 505 messages, 151
use with spectrum analyzer, 455 RF input RX key, 528
RF Generator screen selecting port, 91, 295, 422, 503 RX Test
AC Level, 431 RF Level Offsert Signaling Decoder screen, EDACS
AF Freq, 436 Configure screen, 211 mode, 243
AFGen1 Freq, 432 RF measurements, 58 Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS
AFGen1 To, 432 RF Offset mode, 331
AFGen2 Freq, 432 Configure screen, 212 RX Test screen
AFGen2 To, 433 RF offset AC Level, 442
Amplitude, 433 example, 79 AF Freq, 446
Atten Hold, 434 setting, 79 AFGen1 Freq, 442
Audio Out, 434 RF output AFGen1 To, 443
Current, 436 selecting port, 296, 435, 445, 456, 458 AFGen2 Freq, 442
DC Level, 436 RF power AFGen2 To, 443
Distn, 436 exceeding limits, 91, 295, 422, 503 Amplitude, 444
FM Coupling, 434 measurement, 93, 108, 298, 426, 437, Atten Hold, 444
functional block diagram, 431 505 Current, 446
Mic Pre-Emp, 434 zero reference, 94, 427, 506 DC Level, 446
589

Index
Distn, 446 S using screen control keys, 42

Ext Load R, 444 s, 326, 379 second word of called address, 150
Filter 1 and Filter 2, 445 S, battery save, 271 SECURE_IT, 493
functional block diagram, 441 sampling securing files, 493
Output Port, 445 AF counter, 98 Select Procedure Filename
priority settings, 54 RF counter, 423 Tests (Main Menu) screen, 470
RF Gen Freq, 445 SAT Select Procedure Location
SINAD, 446 Call Control screen, 127 Tests (Main Menu) screen, 470
SNR, 446 SAT color code, 127 Tests (Save/Delete Procedure)screen,
view of, 441 SAT Freq 480
RX/TX Cntl Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- Send
Configure screen, 213 TACS mode, 311 Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS-
save TACS mode, 311
example, 72 Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS
instrument setups, 71 mode, 316
settings, 71 Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page
SAVE key, 528 mode, 323
using, 71 Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF
Save/Recall mode, 326
I/OConfigure screen, 387 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode,
saving instrument setups, 71 344
saving settings, 71 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP-
scale NTAC mode, 311
for oscilloscope, 394 Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq
SCC, 127 mode, 379
scientific notation Send Data
entering numbers, 526 Radio Interface screen, 408
SCM Send DSAT
Call Control screen, 127 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP-
scope NTAC mode, 311
horizontal sweep, 393 Send Filler
input, 398 Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS-
level, markers, 395 TACS mode, 311
markers, 395 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP-
triggering display, 397 NTAC mode, 311
vertical offset, 393 Send Mode
Scope To Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS-
AF Analyzer screen, 105, 398 TACS mode, 312
SCREEN CONTROL keys, 528 Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS
screen control keys, 42 mode, 317
screen dump, 66, 399, 528 Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page
screens mode, 323
accessing, 42 Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF
go to previous, 528 mode, 326
interactions, 54 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode,
printing, 66, 399, 528 345
RX/TX screen interactions, 213 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP-
setting intensity, 50, 207 NTAC mode, 312
590

Index
Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq base, 74 Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS-TACS
mode, 379 beeper volume, 51 mode
Sensitivity changing, field, 43 AF Anl In, 218
RF Analyzer screen, 423 date, 50 Arm Meas, 218
Spectrum Analyzer screen, 463 default, 73, 74 Channel, 218
sensitivity meter, 62 Data (hex), 219
adverse effects on measurements, 423, power-on, 73 Gate Time, 219
463 recalling, 71 Input Level, 219
ANT IN, 423, 463 RF voltage, 50 Num of Bits, 220
modulation input, 435 saving, 71 Polarity, 220
RF, measuring, 196 time, 50 Single/Cont, 221
Seq Num Settling Stop Meas, 221
tone sequence, 380 AF Analyzer screen, 105 Trig Level, 221
Seqn Order Of Tests settling time Trigger Pattern(bin), 221
Tests (Main Menu) screen, 470 AF measurements, 105 Signaling Decoder screen, CDCSS mode
sequence setups AF Anl In, 226
CDCSS, 314 recalling, 71 Arm Meas, 227
DTMF, 324 saving, 71 Code (oct), 227
tone, 378 SHIFT key, 529 Data (bin), 227
Serial Baud shock hazard, avoiding, 511 Data Rate, 227
I/O Configure screen, 387 SID Polarity, 228
serial data word Call Control screen, 127 Stop Meas, 229
bits, 385 signal level Trig Level, 229
Serial In data, 303 Signaling Decoder screen, CSCSS mode
I/O Configure screen, 388 signal strength Input Level, 228
Serial No. Phi signal, 373 Single/Cont, 229
Configure screen, 214 signal strength meter, 492 Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page
serial number signal type mode
electronic, decimal, 123 pager, 232 AF Anl In, 231
electronic, hexadecimal, 123 signal/noise ratio Arm Meas, 231
serial number word, 148 measurement, 60 Data Display, 232
serial port operation, 98, 106, 289, 424, 436, 446, Data Rate, 232
configuring, 81 499 Display Page, 232
SERIAL PORT connector signaling decoder Gate Time, 233
description, 523 selecting, 216 Input Level, 233
Service screen Signaling Decoder screen Number of Pages, 233
Counter Connection, 448 Mode, AMPS-TACS, 217 Polarity, 234
Frequency, 448 Mode, CDCSS, 226 Single/Cont, 234
Gate Time, 448 Mode, Digi Page, 231 Stop Meas, 234
Latch, 448 Mode, DTMF, 235 Trig Level, 234
RAM Initialize, 449 Mode, EDACS, 241 Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF mode
Value, 449 Mode, Func Gen, 247 AF Anl In, 235
view of, 448 Mode, LTR, 251 Arm Meas, 235
Voltage, 449 Mode, MPT 1327, 257 Gate Time, 236
Voltmeter Connection, 449 Mode, NAMPS-NTACS, 217 Hi Tone, 236
Set Message Mode, NMT, 262 Input Level, 237
Call Bit screen, 166 Mode, Tone Seq, 281 Lo Tone, 238
settings Off Time, 238
591

Index
On Time, 238 Input Level, 219 Mode, CDCSS, 314

Single/Cont, 238 Measure, 220 Mode, Digi Page, 319
Stop Meas, 239 Num of Bits, 220 Mode, DTMF, 324
Sym, 239 RECC Data, 220 Mode, EDACS, 328
Signaling Decoder screen, EDACS mode Single/Cont, 221 Mode, Func Gen, 339
AF Anl In, 241 Stop Meas, 221 Mode, LTR, 342
Arm Meas, 242 Trig Level, 221 Mode, MPT 1327, 350
Data, 242 Trigger Pattern(bin), 221 Mode, NAMPS-NTACS, 301
Input Level, 242 Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS- Mode, NMT, 366
Polarity, 242 NTACS Seq mode Mode, Tone Seq, 378
Radio/Repeater, 243 Gate Time, 219 Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS-TACS
RX Test, 243 Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode mode
Single/Cont, 243 AF Anl In, 263 AFGen2 To, 302, 305
Standard, 243 D (direction), 264 Audio Out, 302
Stop Meas, 243 Exit Status, 263 B/I Delay (FOCC), 303
Signaling Decoder screen, Func Gen First Frame, 262 Bursts, 303
mode Frame Digits, 264 Busy/Idle, 303
AF Anl In, 247 Input Level, 265 Channel, 303
Arm Meas, 248 Load Test, 265 Data Level, 303
Frequency, 248 Num, 264 Data Rate, 304
Gate Time, 248 Run Test, 266 FM Coupling, 306
Input Level, 248 Single/Cont, 266 Message, 307, 308
Single/Cont, 249 Standard, 266 Polarity, 310
Stop Meas, 249 Stop Test, 266 SAT Freq, 311
Trig Level, 249 Time, 264 Send, 311
Signaling Decoder screen, LTR mode Trig Level, 266 Send Filler, 311
AF Anl In, 251 Type, 264 Send Mode, 312
Arm Meas, 251 Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq Standard, 312
Data, 251 mode Stop, 312
Data Rate, 252 AF Anl In, 281 Stop Filler, 312
Gate Time, 252 Arm Meas, 281 Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS mode
Input Level, 252 Freq, 282 AFGen2 To, 315
Polarity, 253 Freq Error, 282 Audio Out, 315
Single/Cont, 254 Gate Time, 282 Bursts, 315
Stop Meas, 254 Input Level, 282 Code, 315
Trig Level, 254 Off Time, 283 Data Rate, 315
Signaling Decoder screen, MPT 1327 On Time, 283 FM Coupling, 316
mode Single/Cont, 283 Polarity, 316
Data Rate, 260 Stop Meas, 283 Send, 316
Timing, 260 Sym, 283 Send Mode, 317
Signaling Decoder screen, NAMP- Trig Level, 283 Standard, 317
NTAC mode Signaling Dev Stop, 317
Polarity, 220 Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS TOC Time, 317
Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS- mode, 332 Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page
NTACS mode signaling encoder mode
AF Anl In, 218 selecting, 300 AFGen2 To, 320
Arm Meas, 218 Signaling Encoder screen Audio Out, 320
Channel, 218 Mode, AMPS-TACS, 301 Bursts, 320
592

Index
Data Rate, 320 Working Channel, RXFrequency, 333 Bursts, 303

Error Bit, 320 Working Channel, TXFrequency, 333 Busy/Idle, 303
FM Coupling, 321 Signaling Encoder screen, Func Gen Channel, 303
Function, 321 mode Data Level, 303
Mssg Length, 321 AFGen2 Freq, 340 Data Rate, 304
Pager Alpha-NumericMessage, 322 AFGen2 To, 340 DSAT, 304
Pager Code, 322 Audio Out, 340 FM Coupling, 306
Pager NumericMessage, 322 FM Coupling, 340 Message, 307, 309
Pager Type, 322 Sine Units, 340 Message/DST, 310
Polarity, 322 Waveform, 341 Polarity, 310
Send, 323 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode Send, 311
Send Mode, 323 AFGen2 To, 343 Send DSAT, 311
Standard, 323 Area 1, 343 Send Filler, 311
Stop, 323 Area 2, 343 Send Mode, 312
Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF mode Audio Out, 343 Standard, 312
AFGen2 To, 325 Bursts, 343 Stop, 312
Audio Out, 325 Data Rate, 343 Stop DSAT, 312
Bursts, 325 FM Coupling, 343 Stop Filler, 312
FM Coupling, 325 Free 1, 344 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode
Off Time, 325 Free 2, 344 Access Channel Number, 367
On Time, 325 Goto 1, 344 Access Channel Power, 367
Pre-Emp, 326 Goto 2, 344 Add Info, 367
Send, 326 Home 1, 344 AFGen2 To, 368
Send Mode, 326 Home 2, 344 Alarm Level High, 369
Standard, 326 ID 1, 344 Alarm Level Low, 369
Stop, 326 ID 2, 344 Area #, 369
Symbol Frequencies, 326 LTR message, 344 Audio Out, 370
Twist, 327 Polarity, 344 Batt Save, 370
Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS mode Send, 344 BS Identity, 370
AFGen2 To, 329 Send Mode, 345 Calling Channel Number, 371
Audio Out, 329 Standard, 345 Data Rate, 371
Control Channel, Number, 329 Stop, 345 DUT, 372
Control Channel, RXFrequency, 329 Signaling Encoder screen, MPT 1327 FM Coupling, 372
Control Channel, TXFrequency, 329 mode Meas Ch #, 372
Data Rate, 330 Address Qualifier, 350 Meas Field Strength, 373
FM Coupling, 330 Aloha Number, 351 Mgmt/Maint, 373
Group ID, 330 Control Channel, 352 MSN, 373
Handshake, 330 Radio Unit Under Test, 364 Password, 374
Logical ID, 331 Simulated CallingUnit, 365 Phi Signal, 373
Polarity, 331 System Identity, 363 Pre-Emp, 374
RX Test, 331 Test Mode, 352 SIS Challenge, 374
Signaling Dev, 332 Traffic Channel, 353 SIS Response, 374
Site ID, 332 undisplayed controls, 353 Standard, 375
Standard, 332 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- TCI, 375
Status, 333 NTAC mode Traffic Area, Alt, 375
Stop, 333 AFGen2 To, 302, 305 Traffic Area, Main, 376
Sub-Audible Dev, 333 Audio Out, 302 Traffic Channel (Alt),Number, 376
Working Channel, Number, 333 B/I Delay (FOCC), 303 Traffic Channel (Alt),Power, 376
593

Index
Traffic Channel (Main),Number, 377 mode, 229 Span

Traffic Channel (Main),Power, 377 Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page Spectrum Analyzer screen, 454
Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq mode, 234 span
mode Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF effect on AF analyzer, 454
AFGen2 To, 378 mode, 238 spectrum analyzer, 464
Audio Out, 378 Signaling Decoder screen, EDACS speaker
Bursts, 379 mode, 243 ALC, 107
FM Coupling, 379 Signaling Decoder screen, Func Gen disabling, 107
Pre-Emp, 379 mode, 249 volume control, 107
Send, 379 Signaling Decoder screen, LTR mode, Speaker ALC
Send Mode, 379 254 AF Analyzer screen, 107
Standard, 379 Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS- Speaker Vol
Stop, 379 NTACS mode, 221 AF Analyzer screen, 107
Symbol Definition, 380 Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode, Spec Pass/Fail Limits
Symbol Sequence, 380 266 Tests (Main Menu) screen, 470
signaling format Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq Spec#
AMPS, 217, 301 mode, 283 Tests (Order of Tests) screen, 477
JTACS, 217, 301 SIS Challenge specifications
NAMPS, 217, 301 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, setting limits, 476
NTACS, 217, 301 374 spectrum analyzer
TACS, 217, 301 SIS Response calibration, 464
signaling standard Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, frequency, markers, 460
narrowband, 243, 332 374 input port, 454
wideband, 243, 332 Site ID level, markers, 460
Simulated Calling Unit Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS marker position, 459
Signaling Encoder screen, MPT mode, 332 markers, 459
1327mode, 365 slot timing markers, frequency, 460
SINAD MPT 1327 decoder, 260 markers, level, 460
AF Analyzer screen, 106 Sngl Step measuring low-level RF power, 93,
Duplex Test screen, 289 Tests (IBASIC Controller) screen, 491 108, 295, 298, 422, 426, 437, 503,
measurement, 60, 98, 106, 289, 424, SNR 505
436, 446, 499 AF Analyzer screen, 106 resolution bandwidth, 464
measurement, amplifier, 104 Duplex Test screen, 289 span, 464
measurement, variable notch filter, 104 measurement, 60, 98, 106, 289, 424, squelch effects, 423
RF Analyzer screen, 424 436, 446, 499 sweep rate, 464
RF Generator screen, 436 operation, 98, 106, 289, 424, 436, 446, traces, 462
RX Test screen, 446 499 use of, 93, 108, 295, 298, 422, 426, 437,
TX TEST screen, 504 RF Analyzer screen, 424 503, 505
TX Test screen, 98, 499 RF Generator screen, 436 use with RF generator, 455
Sine Units RX Test screen, 446 use with tracking generator, 457
Signaling Encoder screen, Func Gen TX Test screen, 98, 499 Spectrum Analyzer screen
mode, 340 software Amplitude, 455
sine wave automated testing, 538 Amplitude (Tracking Gen), 457
function generator, 341, 442 for automated testing, 313 Auxiliary menu, 461
Single/Cont running, 466 Avg 1-100, 463
Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS- source Center Freq, 453
TACS mode, 221 oscilloscope, 105 Controls, 451
Signaling Decoder screen, CDCSS peak detector, 104 Freq (marker), 460
594

Index
Input Atten, 461 Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF TACS mode, 312
Lvl (marker), 460 mode, 326 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP-
Main menu, 453 Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS NTAC mode, 312
Marker menu, 459 mode, 332 Stop Length
Marker To, 459 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode, I/O Configure screen, 388
No Pk/Avg, 463 345 Stop Meas
Normalize, 462 Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS-
Offset Freq (Tracking Gen), 458 NTAC mode, 312 TACS mode, 221
Output Port (RF Gen), 456 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, Signaling Decoder screen, CDCSS
Pk Hold, 463 375 mode, 229
Port/Sweep (Tracking Gen), 458 Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page
Position, 459 mode, 379 mode, 234
Ref Level, 453 station class mark, 127 Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF
RF Gen Freq, 456 Status mode, 239
RF In/Ant, 454 Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS Signaling Decoder screen, EDACS
Sensitivity, 463 mode, 333 mode, 243
Span, 454 status Signaling Decoder screen, Func Gen
view of, 452 control, 333 mode, 249
spurs idle, 333 Signaling Decoder screen, LTR mode,
ACP measurement, 92 indicators, 317 254
square wave working, 333 Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS-
function generator, 341 STD450 NMT radio standard, 269, 375 NTACS mode, 221
Squelch STD900 NMT radio standard, 269, 375 Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq
RF Analyzer screen, 423 Step# mode, 283
squelch Tests (Order of Tests) screen, 475 Stop Test
CDCSS, 314 Stop Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode,
digital decoding, 226 Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- 266
effects on decoder, 423 TACS mode, 312 Strobe Pol
effects on HP-IB operation, 424 Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS Radio Interface screen, 408
effects on oscilloscope, 423 mode, 317 Sub-Audible Dev
effects on remote operation, 424 Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS
effects on spectrum analyzer, 423 mode, 323 mode, 333
fixed level, 423 Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF subscriber identity security challenge,
manual control, 423 mode, 326 374
off, 423 Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS subscriber identity security response, 374
using attenuator hold, 291, 434, 444 mode, 333 subscriber number, 373
squelch control, 530 Signaling Encoder screen, LTR mode, support, 546
Standard 345 Support Contacts
Signaling Decoder screen, EDACS Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- electronic mail, 9
mode, 243 NTAC mode, 312 HP Desk, 9
Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode, Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq telephone, 9
266 mode, 379 sweep
Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- stop bit, 388 frequency range, tracking generator,
TACS mode, 312 Stop DSAT 454
Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS Signaling Encoder screen, NAMP- oscilloscope, 393
mode, 317 NTAC mode, 312 rate, spectrum analyzer, 464
Signaling Encoder screen, Digi Page Stop Filler time per division, 393
mode, 323 Signaling Encoder screen, AMPS- tracking generator, 458
595

Index
Sym T Model, 486

Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF TA1, main traffic area, 271 Options, 486
mode, 239 TA2, alternate traffic area, 271 Output Heading, 486
Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq talk & listen, 386 view of, 484
mode, 283 tariff class information, 375 Tests (IBASIC Controller) screen, 467
symbol TC1, main traffic channel, 271 Clr Scr, 491
for tone sequence, 239, 283, 380 TC2, alternate traffic channel, 271 Continue, 491
frequency, 239, 282, 283 TCI Main Menu, 491
frequency error, 282 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode, Sngl Step, 491
hexadecimal number, 380 375 view of, 490
Symbol Definition terminal, ASCII, 81 Tests (Main Menu) screen, 467
Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq Test Mode Cnfg External Devices, 468
mode, 380 Signaling Encoder screen, MPT 1327 Continue, 468
Symbol Frequencies mode, 352 Description, 468
Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF Test Name Exec Execution Cond, 468
mode, 326 Tests (Order of Tests) screen, 475 Freq Channel Information, 469
Symbol Sequence Test Procedure Run Mode IBASIC IBASIC Cntrl, 469
Signaling Encoder screen, Tone Seq Tests (Execution Conditions) screen, Library, 469
mode, 380 483 Parm Test Parameters, 469
sync delay test set Pass/Fail Limits, 470
word, 303 configuring, 49 Print Printer Setup, 469
synchronization sequence test subsystem, 467 Proc Save/Delete Procedure, 470
decoder, MPT 1327, 259 Tests (Channel Information) screen, 467 Program, 470
syntax Delete Ch, 472 Run Test, 470
NMT programming, 277 Insert Ch, 472 Select Procedure Filename, 470
system identification number, 127 Main Menu, 472, 473 Select Procedure Location, 470
System Identity Print All, 472, 473 Seqn Order of Tests, 470
Signaling Encoder screen, MPT 1327 view of, 471 view of, 468
mode, 363 Tests (Execution Conditions) screen, 467 Tests (Order of Tests) screen, 467
system parameter overhead word 2 mes- Autostart Test Procedureon Power-Up, All Chans?, 474
sage, 169 482 Delet Stp, 475
System Type Continue, 482 Insrt Stp, 475
Call Control screen, 128 If Unit-Under-Test Fails, 482 Main Menu, 475
Main Menu, 482 Output Heading, 475
Output Heading, 482 Spec#, 477
Output Results For, 483 Step#, 475
Output Results To, 482 Test Name, 475
Run Test, 483 view of, 474
Test Procedure Run Mode, 483 Tests (Pass/Fail Limits) screen, 467
view of, 481 Check, 477
Tests (External Devices) screen, 467 Lower Limit, 477
Addr, 485 Main Menu, 477
Calling Name, 485 Output Heading, 477
Delet Ins, 485 Units, 477
External Disk Specification, 485 Upper Limit, 477
Insrt Ins, 485 view of, 476
Inst#, 486 Tests (Printer Setup) screen, 467
Main Menu, 486 Continue, 487
596

Index
FF at End, 487 for printout, 401, 488 Symbol Definition, 380

FF at Start, 487 TOC Symbol Sequence, 380
Lines/Page, 488 defined, 227 view of, 378
Main Menu, 488 TOC Time tone-only operation
Model, 488 Signaling Encoder screen, CDCSS digital paging, 321
Output Heading, 488 mode, 317 total access communication system for
Output Results For, 488 tone length Japan
Output Results To, 488 DTMF encoder, 325 decoder, 217
Printer Address, 489 tone sequence decoder, 238, 283 encoder, 301
Printer Port, 489 Tone Sequence endcoder, 380 total access communications systems
Run, 491 tone sequence decoder, 217
Run Test, 489 burst, 312, 317, 323, 326, 345, 379 encoder, 301
view of, 487 continuous, 312, 323, 326, 345, 379 Total RAM
Tests (Save/Delete Procedure) screen, editing, 380 Configure screen, 214
467 entering, 380 trace
Code Location, 479 outputting, 379 comparison, spectrum analyzer, 462
Enter Procedure Filename, 479 single, 312, 317, 323, 326, 345, 379 spectrum analyzer, 462
Main Menu, 479 stepped, 312, 326, 345, 379 tracking generator
Pass Word, 479 stopping, 312, 317, 323, 326, 345, 379 amplitude, 457
Select ProcedureLocation, 480 symbol frequency, 282 frequency, 453
view of, 478 symbol frequency error, 282 frequency offset, 458
Tests (Test Parameters) screen, 467 using frequencies, 380 offset, 457
view of, 473 using hexadecimal numbers, 380 output, 458
TESTS key, 528 using relative amplitude, 380 output port, 458
Time Tone Sequence decoder mode sweep, 458
Configure screen, 50, 214 AF Anl In, 281 use with spectrum analyzer, 457
Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode, Arm Meas, 281 Traffic Area, Alt
264 Freq, 282 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode,
time Freq Error, 282 375
markers, 395 Gate Time, 282 Traffic Area, Main
Time (marker) Input Level, 282 Signaling Encoder screen, NMT mode,
Oscilloscope screen, 395 Off Time, 283 376
time and date, 50 On Time, 283 Traffic Channel
Time/div Single/Cont, 283 Signaling Encoder screen, MPT 1327
Oscilloscope screen, 393 Stop Meas, 283 mode, 353
timebase Sym, 283 traffic channel
decoder, 216 Trig Level, 283 channel number, NMT, 371
external input, 525 view of, 281 Traffic Channel (Alt), Number
external output, 525 Tone Sequence encoder mode Signaling Encoder screen, NMTmode,
timer AFGen2 To, 378 376
low battery, 51 Audio Out, 378 Traffic Channel (Alt), Power
Timing Bursts, 379 Signaling Encoder screen, NMTmode,
Signaling Decoder screen, MPT 1327 FM Coupling, 379 376
mode, 260 Pre-Emp, 379 Traffic Channel (Main), Number
timing Send, 379 Signaling Encoder screen, NMTmode,
response, MPT 1327 decoder, 261 Send Mode, 379 377
slot, MPT 1327 decoder, 260 Standard, 379 Traffic Channel (Main), Power
title Stop, 379 Signaling Encoder screen, NMTmode,
597

Index
377 decoder, AMPS-TACS/NAMPS- manual, 92, 297, 425, 504

training, 546 NTACS, 218, 221 turn off code
transmit pace, 388 decoder, CDCSS, 227, 229 CDCSS encoder, 318
transmitter decoder, digital paging, 231, 234 frequency, 315
keying, 90, 294, 420, 502 decoder, DTMF, 235, 238 output time, 317
transmitter frequency, 58 decoder, EDACS, 242, 243 turning off squelch, 423
measurement, 93, 107, 298, 425, 437, decoder, function generator, 248, 249 Twist
505 decoder, LTR, 251, 254 Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF
transmitter frequency error, 58 decoder, MPT 1327, 258 mode, 327
measurement, 93, 107, 298, 425, 437, decoder, NMT, 266 twist
505 decoder, tone sequence, 281, 283 recommended settings, 327
transmitter power, 58 display, 397 twist and pre-emphasis
fast (HP 8920B), 427, 505 encoder, oscilloscope, 396 interactions, 327
measurement, 93, 108, 298, 426, 437, external, oscilloscope, 396 TX Freq Error
505 gate time, 219, 233, 236, 248, 252, 282 Adjacent Channel Power screen, 93
mobile station, 136 input level, 219, 228, 233, 237, 242, AF Analyzer screen, 107
modulation quality, 121 248, 252, 265, 282 Analog Meas screen, 194
zero reference, 94, 427, 506 internal, 397 Call Control screen, 128
transmitter testing internal, oscilloscope, 396 Duplex Test screen, 298
EDACS, 244 level, 221, 229, 234, 249, 254, 266, RF Analyzer screen, 425
triangle wave 283, 396 RF Generator screen, 437
function generator, 341 negative edge, 397 TX Test screen, 505
Trig Level NMT alarm, 369 TX Frequency
Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS- positive edge, 397 Adjacent Channel Power screen, 93
TACS mode, 221 radio interface, 406 AF Analyzer screen, 107
Signaling Decoder screen, CDCSS signal, 396 Duplex Test screen, 298
mode, 229 source, oscilloscope, 396 RF Analyzer screen, 425
Signaling Decoder screen, Digi Page time, 395 RF Generator screen, 437
mode, 234 troubleshooting, 448 TX Test screen, 505
Signaling Decoder screen, Func Gen trunked receiver channel TX key, 528
mode, 249 home channel, 347 TX Power
Signaling Decoder screen, LTR mode, trunked transmit channel Adjacent Channel Power screen, 93
254 home channel, 348 AF Analyzer screen, 108
Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS- trunking data, 342 Analog Meas screen, 194
NTACS mode, 221 trunking message, 342 Call Control screen, 128
Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode, Tune Freq Duplex Test screen, 298
266 Adjacent Channel Power screen, 92 RF Analyzer screen, 426
Signaling Decoder screen, Tone Seq Duplex Test screen, 297 RF Generator screen, 437
mode, 283 RF Analyzer screen, 425 TX Test screen, 505
Trigger Pattern (bin) TX Test screen, 504 TX Pwr Meas (HP 8920B)
Signaling Decoder screen, AMPS- Tune Mode RF Analyzer screen, 427
TACSmode, 221 Adjacent Channel Power screen, 92 TX Test screen, 505
Signaling Decoder screen, NAMPS- Duplex Test screen, 297 TX Pwr Zero
NTACSmode, 221 RF Analyzer screen, 425 Adjacent Channel Power screen, 94
triggering TX Test screen, 504 Call Configuration screen, 199
automatic, 396 tuning RF Analyzer screen, 427
bit position, 221 automatic, 92, 297, 425, 504 TX Test screen, 506
continuous, 397 channel, automatic, 210 TX TEST screen
598

Index
Current, 500 U V
DC Level, 500 undisplayed controls V
Distortion, 502 Signaling Encoder screen, MPT 1327 displaying results in, 61
SINAD, 504 mode, 353 V (volts)
TX Test Screen unit-of-measure displaying results in, 61
view of, 497 changing, 61, 64 Value
TX Test screen converting, 61, 64 Service screen, 449
AF Anl In, 498 keys, 526 variable frequency notch filter, 104
AF Freq, 98, 499 Units version number
AFGen1 Freq, 500 Tests (Pass/Fail Limits) screen, 477 firmware, 205
AFGen1 Lvl, 500 units Vert Offset
Current, 98, 499 peak, 340 Oscilloscope screen, 393
DC Level, 98, 499 rms, 340 Vert/div
De-emphasis, 500 universal noise Oscilloscope screen, 393
Detector, 501 function generator, 341 vertical offset
Distn, 98, 499 up arrow key, 527 oscilloscope, 393, 395
Ext TX key, 502 upgrades vertical sensitivity
Filter 1 and Filter 2, 502 firmware, 534 oscilloscope, 393
FM Deviation, 502 hardware, 532 video averaging
functional block diagram, 497 Upper Limit spectrum analyzer, 463
IF Filter, 502 Tests (Pass/Fail Limits) screen, 477 VMAC
Input Port, 503 User Def Base Freq power level, 125
priority settings, 54 Configure screen, 203 voice channel assignment, 120
SINAD, 98, 499 user keys voice channel decoder
SNR, 98, 499 assigning global, 78 AMPS-TACS, 217
Tune Freq, 504 assigning, local, 77 NAMPS-NTACS, 217
Tune Mode, 504 clearing, global assignment, 78 voice guard, 241
TX Freq Error, 505 clearing, local assignment, 77 Voltage
TX Frequency, 505 deleting, global assignment, 78 Service screen, 449
TX Power, 505 deleting, local assignment, 77 voltage
TX Pwr Meas (HP 8920B), 505 example, 77 measurement, 97, 431, 442
TX Pwr Zero, 506 explanation, 75 RF, across 50 ohm load, 210
Type global, assignment, 78 RF, emf (open circuit), 210
Signaling Decoder screen, NMT mode, global, defined, 75 setting, 50
264 local, assignment, 77 Voltmeter Connection
type bits, 306, 308 local, defined, 75 Service screen, 449
preassigned, 76 volume
releasing, global assignment, 78 beeper, 51, 204
releasing, local assignment, 77 control, 530
setting, global, 78 internal speaker, 107
setting, local, 77
599

Index
W mode, 333 X
W (watts) Xmt Pace
displaying results in, 61 I/O Configure screen, 388
Waveform Xon/Xoff, 386, 388
Signaling Encoder screen, Func Gen
mode, 341
waveform
dc, 341
Gaussian noise, 341
selecting, 341
sine, 341
square, 341
triangle, 341
universal noise, 341
wideband
decoder, signaling standard, 243
encoder, signaling standard, 332
word
abbreviated address, 144
extended address, 146
first word of called address, 149
reverse voice channel order confirma-
tion message, 151
second word of called address, 150
serial number, 148
to view, from mobile station handoff,
156
to view, from mobile station origina-
tion, 160
to view, from mobile station page, 154
to view, from mobile station registra-
tion, 153
to view, from mobile station release,
158
to view, from order to change TX pow-
er of mobile, 159
word sync bits, 306, 308
word sync delay, 303
working
status, 333
Working Channel, Number
Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS
mode, 333
Working Channel, RX Frequency
Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS-
mode, 333
Working Channel, TX Frequency
Signaling Encoder screen, EDACS-
600

Index
Y Z
YES key, 526 zero crossing
detecting, 228
zero reference
tranmitter power, 94, 427, 506
zeroing
DCFM, 434
measurement offset, 99
power meter, 94, 130, 427, 506
ZVEI1
radio standard, 379
ZVEI2
radio standard, 379
601

8921a Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

8921a Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

8921a Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this document?

What is the purpose of this document?

What safety considerations are mentioned?

What safety considerations are mentioned?

HP 8921A Cell Site Test Set

SCREEN CONTROL INSTRUMENT STATE

USER DATA FUNCTIONS DATA

k1’ REF METER AVG

MIC/ VOL- SQUELC AUDIO AUDIO IN

MAX POWER MAX MAX

HP Part No. 08921-90022

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Notice Information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A WARNING note denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure,

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Product Markings CE - the CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community. A CE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

WARRANTY This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Product Name: RF Communications Test Set / Cell Site Test Set

Model Number: HP 8920A, HP 8920B, and HP 8921A

conforms to the following Product specifications:

Safety: IEC 348:1978 / HD 401S1:19811)

EMC: CISPR 11:1990 / EN 55011:1991 Group 1, Class A

1) The product was introduced prior to 12/1993

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

• Instrument model number (HP 8924C)

HP Desk: Spokane Service / HP1000/21

cc:Mail: SERVICE, SPOKANE /HP-Spokane,desk1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

United States of America United States of America United Kingdom

South Eastern Europe European Multicountry Region Northern Europe

Asia Japan International Sales Branch Head-

Australia, New Zealand Canada Canada

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Canada Latin America United Kingdom

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 1, Get Started

Chapter 2, Configuring Your Test Set

Chapter 3, Operating Overview

Chapters 4 through 23, Screen and Field Descriptions

Chapter 24, Connector, Key, and Knob Descriptions

Chapter 25, Modifications, Accessories, Manuals, Support

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Before Connecting a Radio 40

Accessing the Test Set’s Screens 41

Changing A Field’s Setting 43

How do I Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly? 46

Instrument Functional Diagram 47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2 Configuring Your Test Set

General Operating Information 50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Interaction Between Screens 54

Entering and Changing Numbers 63

Using Measurement Limit Indicators 67

Setting A Measurement Reference 70